JP7384302B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won at an operating port provided in a gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur. Fluctuation display starts. If the lottery is won, a specific symbol combination or the like is stopped and displayed, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175

Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a technique machine capable of improving interest.

The present invention
a firing means capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
a predetermined ball entrance means into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means;
specific determination means for performing a specific determination based on the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means;
variable ball entry means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
Variable control means for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on the result of the specific determination;
A display means capable of displaying changing patterns;
a control means capable of starting displaying a change in the symbol on the display means based on the specific determination being made by the specific determination means, and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the specific determination;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is
In a situation where the result of the specific determination is a first result corresponding to execution of the variable ball entry control, a display of a stop result corresponding to the first result is emitted in a manner that can reach the variable ball entry means. a first means that allows the game to be played in a second period that is longer than the first period until a predetermined game ball reaches the variable ball entry means;
In a situation where the result of the specific determination is a second result that does not correspond to the execution of the variable ball entry control, a stop result corresponding to the second result is displayed in a third period that is longer than the first period. A second means that makes it possible to
a third means that enables display of a stop result corresponding to the second result to be performed in a fourth period shorter than the third period in a situation where the result of the specific determination is the second result; ,
A specific notification capable of prompting the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means during at least a part of the second period in which the first means displays a stop result corresponding to the first result. means that enable the
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the present invention, it becomes possible to improve interest.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. (a) A front view showing the configuration of the game board, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the unit at the operating port. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. It is a flowchart which shows information acquisition processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. It is a schematic diagram showing a suspension notice. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a reservation notice. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram for explaining the final display time. It is a flowchart which shows processing for confirmation display. It is a flowchart which shows processing at the time of a stop start. (a) is a flowchart illustrating processing for determining the number of executions of special period setting, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the number of pending determinations. It is a schematic diagram showing a fluctuating display of symbol rows. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the first type of preview performance, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the second type of preview performance, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the execution timing of the first and second preview performance. It is a flow chart showing variable display control processing by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows processing for a fluctuation start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a stop start. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating a reservation notice in Modification 1 of the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a re-fluctuation effect. It is a flow chart showing variable display control processing by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining information included in a first stop display command. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a stop start. It is a flow chart which shows processing for revariation. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a suspension result table for suspension notice. It is a flowchart which shows processing during stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for complete disconnection. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating a reservation notice in modification 2 of the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating processing at the start of stopping by the MPU of the main control device. (a) is a flowchart illustrating a process for determining the number of executions for setting a special period on the suspension side, and (b) is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for suspension notice on the suspension side and variable side. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram for explaining an execution mode of a suspension notice. 7 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variable display time for complete misses. (a) is a flowchart illustrating a process for determining the number of executions of the special period setting on the variable side, and (b) is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting suspension notices on the variable side and the stop side. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram for explaining an execution mode of a suspension notice. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram for explaining the information form of a variation command in a third modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/failing lottery etc. in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a propriety table for ordinary figures, (b) is a general figure open pattern, and (c) and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for ordinary figures. It is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and fixed display time of the regular figure game game. It is a schematic diagram showing the state of the display screen in the regular game game round. It is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for regular figure confirmation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric support by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the normal figure game times control process. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of normal figure finalization display time. It is a flowchart showing a normal figure game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows accessory opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation start process by MPU of a notification/performance control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a special display effect, and (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between execution start timing of the special display effect and fixed display time. It is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and the fixed display time of the regular figure game time in a modification of the second embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing game stop determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of normal figure finalization display time. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. 12 is a flowchart showing error handling processing by the MPU of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows processing at the time of a stop start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a stop start. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a delay effect is performed. It is a timing chart showing how a delay effect is performed. 12 is a flowchart showing error handling processing in a modification of the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows processing at the time of a stop start. 3 is a flowchart showing error resolution processing by the MPU of the main control device. (a) is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing operation response processing by the MPU of the main controller. (a) is a flowchart showing processing at the start of stopping, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a delay effect is performed. (a) is a flowchart showing a stop start process in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is a flowchart which shows processing at the time of a stop start. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. FIG. 7 is a front view for explaining the operation of the second ball entry section. (a) is a vertical sectional view of the variable winning device according to the fifth embodiment as seen from the side side, and (b) is a vertical sectional view of the variable winning device as seen from the back side. It is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table. It is a flow chart showing performance setting processing for a jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart showing the deceleration process of the middle symbol row. It is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row. It is a schematic diagram showing the execution timing of preliminary result notification and immediate result notification. It is a flowchart showing the stopping process of the middle symbol row. It is a schematic diagram showing a type-in notification effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of preliminary result notification and immediate result notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a stop start in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for V operation|movement by MPU of a main control device in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing processing at the start of stopping, and (b) is a flowchart showing processing for starting V distribution. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first confirmed display time according to the number of reservations, and (c) and (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the number of reservations and the V occurrence rate. It is. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table. It is a schematic diagram showing a validity table and a distribution table in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing at the time of a stop start. It is a flowchart which shows opening processing. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for reach. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first form of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be explained in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 developed. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting plate-shaped frame materials on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game parlor.

The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 rotatably supports a front door frame 14, and can rotate forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. It is said that In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the inner frame 13 rotatably supports a back pack unit 15, which rotates rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is said that it is possible to move.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, which has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It also has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. When the game board 24 is attached to the resin base 21, the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21. Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 4(a). FIG. 4(a) is a front view of the game board 24.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an operating opening unit 33 having an upper operating opening 33a and a lower operating opening 33b, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display section 43, and an accessory display section. 44 etc. are provided respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operating holes 33a and 33b, it is detected by a detection sensor installed on the back side of the game board 24, and a predetermined value is determined based on the detection result. A number of prize balls are paid out.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. Furthermore, a large number of nails 38 are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball passes through the game area PE after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of a game ball into the out port 37, the entry of a game ball into the variable winning device 32, the operating ports 33a, 33b, or the through gate 35 will also be referred to as winning. express.

The upper operating port 33a and the lower operating port 33b are arranged vertically in parallel, and are both open upward. Further, the operating port unit 33 is provided with an electric accessory 34 having a pair of left and right movable pieces 34a and a drive section that operates the movable pieces 34a.

The electric accessory 34 (more specifically, the drive unit) is connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and is in an open state (support state or guide state) that allows the ball to enter the lower operating port 33b based on a signal from the main control device. state) and a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) in which the ball cannot enter the lower operating port 33b. Note that the electric accessory 34 only needs to be switchable between a first state and a second state where winnings are more likely to occur than the first state, and does not necessarily need to be switchable between an open state and a closed state. .

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of support modes are set in which the manner of support by the electric accessory 34 is different. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the electric accessory 34 becomes open per unit time is determined when compared with a situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner into the game area PE. A low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set to be relatively high and low.

In the high-frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be won in the operating port than in the low-frequency support mode. Then, when a winning occurs in the operating port, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of his balls.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4(b), a supplementary description will be given of the operating port unit 33 provided with the operating ports 33a and 33b. FIG. 4(b) is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the operating port unit 33.

The operating port unit 33 is formed with a guide path 33c that guides the game balls that have flowed into the upper operating port 33a to a recovery path provided on the back side of the game board 24. The guide passage 33c branches into a first branch passage 33d and a second branch passage 33e at an intermediate position.

A distribution means 33g is provided at a branch position in the guide passage 33c to alternately distribute game balls that have reached the branch position to the first branch passage 33d and the second branch passage 33e. The sorting means 33g can be switched between a first guide state in which the game balls that have reached the branch position are guided to the first branch passage 33d and a second guide state in which they are guided to the second branch passage 33e. This sorting means 33g is configured to switch from one guiding state to the other guiding state based on guiding the game ball. Therefore, the game balls flowing into the upper operating port 33a are sequentially sorted into the first branch passage 33d/second branch passage 33e.

The lower operating port 33b is connected to the second branch passage through the communication passage 33f, and the game ball that has flowed into the lower operating opening 33b directly flows into the second branch passage. In other words, the game balls that flowed into the upper operating port 33a flow into both branch passages, while the game balls that flowed into the lower operating port 33b flow only into the second branch passage.

A detection sensor 211c for detecting game balls is disposed in the first branch passage 33d (hereinafter also referred to as the first ball entry part 33d), and in the second branch passage 33e (hereinafter also referred to as the second ball entry part 33e). A detection sensor 211d for detecting game balls is disposed at a position downstream of the communication portion of the communication passage 33f. These detection sensors 211c and 211d are connected to the main control device, and the main control device determines whether the ball enters the branch passages 33d and 33e based on detection information (detection signals) from the detection sensors 211c and 211d, that is, the actuating port 33a. , 33b.

The variable winning device 32 includes a big winning hole 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32b that opens and closes the big winning hole 32a. The opening/closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which it is not possible to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 32a, and if the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state) in the internal lottery, the opening/closing door 32b opens the grand prize opening. It is possible to switch to an open state in which winning of a game ball to 32a is permitted. Here, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the player enters when a jackpot is won. The opening mode of the variable prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is defined as one round when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or a predetermined number of prizes (for example, 10 prizes) are won, and variable winnings with a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as the upper limit. There are embodiments in which the device 32 is repeatedly opened. It should be noted that the variable winning device 32 only needs to be switchable between the first state and the second state in which winnings are more likely to occur, and does not necessarily need to be switchable between the open state and the closed state.

The main display section 43 and the accessory display section 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the lower outer edge of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 protrudes from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided in the front door frame 14 in order to make the gaming area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and The distance between them is narrower than the distance of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

A main display section 43 and an accessory display section 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. In other words, the main display section 43 and the accessory display section 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls are visible in front of both display sections 43 and 44. Falling is suppressed. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the plurality of general prize winning holes 31 mentioned above is installed in an upwardly open state.

Although detailed explanation with illustrations will be omitted, the main display section 43 has a segment display device, and the segment display device is provided with a result display section for the operating port. The result display section for the operating port has a display area for the first ball entry section 33d and a display area for the second ball entry section 33e in one-to-one correspondence with each of the ball entry sections 33d and 33e. In these display areas, the results of the internal lottery conducted based on winnings into the operating ports 33a and 33b (more specifically, balls entering into the ball entry sections 33d and 33e) are clearly displayed. In this case, in the same display area, a variable display (variable display) of the picture is performed by sequentially turning on and off each display segment, triggered by the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, and the variable display is stopped. As a result, the results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings will be clearly displayed. In other words, the lottery result based on the ball entering the first ball entering section 33d is clearly displayed in the display area for the first ball entering section, and the lottery result based on the ball entering the second ball entering section 33e is displayed in the second ball entering section. It is clearly displayed in the department display area.

The accessory display section 44 also has a segment display like the main display section 43, and the segment display is provided with an accessory result display section. The accessory result display section is a display section for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings in the through gate 35. In this case, in the accessory result display section, a variable display (or variable display or switching display) of the symbols is performed by sequentially turning on and off the lights in each display segment, using the win in the through gate 35 as a trigger. As a result of the stoppage of the variable display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings in the through gate 35 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 35 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory result display section and a variable display is performed. After this is stopped, the state shifts to the open state. In the electric accessory open state, the electric accessory 34 attached to the lower operating port 33b is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that has a display screen 41a and displays symbols variably (variably displayed) on the display screen 41a. Further, a center frame 42 is disposed in the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the symbol display device 41 (specifically, the display screen 41a). The upper part of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen 41a, and the drop of the game ball reduces the visibility of the display screen 41a (for example, the above-mentioned symbols and the holding image described later), which is an inconvenience. The structure is such that it is difficult for this to occur.

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. On the symbol display device 41, symbol rows are displayed, for example, arranged in the upper, middle, and lower rows, and these symbol rows are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be displayed variably. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winnings to the operating ports 33a and 33b. For example, in the game round when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to 16 rounds is entered, in which the big winning hole 32a of the variable winning a prize device 32 is opened 16 times as the opening/closing execution mode, the pattern display device 41 is set in advance. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

At the lower part of the center frame 42, a holding lamp section 47 corresponding to the accessory result display section of the accessory display section 44 is provided. The number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the holding lamp section 47. Note that the pending information corresponding to the through gate 35 can also be configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

An inner rail part 51 and an outer rail part 52 are attached to the game board 24, and the inner rail part 51 and the outer rail part 52 constitute a guide rail, and the game ball launched from the game ball firing mechanism 53 is guided by the inner rail part 51 and the outer rail part 52. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area PE. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball firing mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and fires the game ball by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. An action is taken.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 has a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire area of the gaming area PE to be viewed from the front. (See FIG. 1 or 2). As shown in FIG. 1, the window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, it is not limited thereto, and may be made of synthetic resin and colorless and transparent.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 61. A display lamp section 63 is provided above the window section 61 as a part of the various lamp sections. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp section 63, speaker sections 64 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulge 65 and a lower bulge 66 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. The upper bulge 65 is provided with an upper plate 71 that opens upward, and the lower bulge 66 is provided with a lower plate 72 that also opens upward. The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71. Game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper tray 71 and the lower tray 72 through a passage forming unit 73 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back side of the front door frame 14.

Further, in an area of the upper bulging portion 65 facing the front of the Pachinko machine 10, an effect operation section 75 (more specifically, an operation button) that is manually operated by a player is provided. For example, by manually operating the performance operation unit 75 in accordance with a suggestion displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, the performance content on the display screen 41a, etc. of the symbol display device 41 changes to a predetermined value corresponding to the same operation. This is the content of the performance.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and a notification/performance control device 82 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 is equipped with a main control board that controls the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board that monitors the power supply. Contained and configured. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are connected inseparably by a box connecting portion 85 serving as a separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. Since these boxes are connected inseparably by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 is required to be destroyed or a portion thereof to be removed in order to open the internal space of the substrate box 83. A plurality of box coupling parts 85 are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as it connects the box base and the box cover in a non-releasable manner. The box cover is irreleasably coupled to the box cover. The joining process by the box joining unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, such a situation can be detected early and easily. Even after being released, it is possible to perform the release process again. That is, the joining process is performed by inserting a locking pawl into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box joining parts 85. When the board box 83 is opened in the event of a malfunction of the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the box joint part 85 into which the locking claw is inserted is connected to the other box joint part 85. Cut the connecting part and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. Thereafter, when performing the joining process again, a locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box joining part 85. If a history indicating that the board box 83 has been opened is left in the board box 83, it can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 83 that the board box 83 has been opened illegally.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of pieces to be coupled 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81, and the coupling pieces 86 and the pieces to be coupled 87 connect the board box 83 and the mounting base. A join process is performed between the two.

Note that as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal is removed from the place where it is pasted, the adhesive layer of the seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving traces of it. Furthermore, the seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the above response is received. A configuration may also be adopted in which it is impossible to transmit waves.

The notification/effect control device 82 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls audio, lamp displays, and a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 81. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 84 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a dispensing mechanism section 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, notification/performance control device 82, etc. from the rear. have.

The payout mechanism section 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 94, and includes a tank 95 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a tank 95 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball stored in the tank 95. A dispensing device 96 for dispensing balls. The game balls put out by the payout device 96 are discharged onto the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the dispensing mechanism section 92 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the upper edge side, which is on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal board 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95, etc., an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time the machine is lent out, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and state transition such as opening/closing execution mode. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal during (or during transition to) the state. Then, through these output terminals, signals regarding the state of the frame side are outputted to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source/firing control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply/launch control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 97 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power source/launch control device 98 includes a power source/launch control board housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the launch handle 54. In addition, this pachinko machine 10 has a memory retention function for various data, so that even in the event of a power outage, it can maintain the state at the time of the power outage and return to the state at the time of the power outage when recovering from the power outage. It looks like this.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 5.

A main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81 has an MPU 202 mounted thereon. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 202, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 203. It is an element that includes a RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 202, such as the functions of the ROM 203 and the functions of the RAM 204, may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Connected to the input side of the MPU 202 are a power outage monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, and the like. In this case, the power supply/launch control device 98 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power outage monitoring board 205. In addition, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a general winning hole 31, a variable winning device 32, operating holes 33a, 33b (more specifically, the first ball entering section 33d and the second ball entering section 33e), the through gate 35, etc. Detection sensors provided in the various winning-compatible ball entry parts (payout-compatible ball entry parts) are connected, and the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 determines each entry based on detection information (detection signals) from these detection sensors. A prize-winning determination (ball entry determination) for the ball club is made. The MPU 202 also executes a jackpot lottery based on winnings to the operating ports 33a and 33b, and a support lottery based on winnings to the through gate 35.

A power outage monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and a notification/presentation control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning determination result for the winning ball entering portions such as the above-mentioned operating ports 33a and 33b. In this case, the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and when a winning to the first ball entering section 33d is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the paying out of three game balls is output to the second ball entering section 33e. When a winning prize is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output.

The main control device 81 outputs various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, an ending command, a hold command, and a shift command to the notification/performance control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Note that each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive section 32c that opens and closes the door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory drive section 34b that opens and closes the movable piece 34a of the electric accessory 34, and a main display section. 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c so that the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 34 is won, the MPU 202 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed. Furthermore, display control of the main display section 43 is executed by the MPU 202 .

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202, and through this external output terminal board 99 ball entry information to various ball entry sections is sent to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. Information regarding lottery results such as winnings and jackpots is output. This makes it possible to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10 on the hall computer HC.

The power outage monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply/launch control device 98, and the power outage monitoring board 205 has a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 98. It has the ability to monitor. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power source/launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 201, payout control device 97, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power supply/launch control device 98 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The notification/performance control device 82 operates based on various commands input from the main control device 81 , a holding lamp portion 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 , a display lamp portion 63 provided in the front door frame 14 , and a speaker portion 64 . It drives and controls the display control device 212 and the like.

The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 82. In this case, the notification/performance control device 82 determines the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 (for example, the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach effect, the content of the ready-to-reach effect, etc.) based on various commands input from the main control device 81. Specify the stop display mode (the type of combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed upon completion of the variable display) and the summary of the final display mode based on the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols.

Here, the structure related to the fluctuating display of symbols in each game round and the contents of the fluctuating display will be explained. In addition, in the following description, FIGS. 6 and 7 will be referred to as appropriate. 6 and 7 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41.

The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. The character ROM contains data for nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9" (see Figures 6(a) to (i)) and data for sub-symbols that are not numbered. (see FIG. 6(j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 7A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 41a, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7(b), the display screen 41a is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It is now possible to do so. Further, five effective lines are set on the display screen 41a, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on any active line. When the variable display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a video for the jackpot (for example, an opening movie) is displayed as a jackpot result.

In addition, considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the first symbol row). 2 symbol row), and the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

Among the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and if a Type 1 jackpot result (16R corresponding jackpot result) occurs. For example, a combination of the same specific symbols is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a type 2 jackpot result (4R corresponding jackpot result) occurs, for example, the same A combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but may be arbitrary, and may include the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to be vertical.

On the display screen 41a, a pending display area NE is set in the lower part of the variable display area ME, which has a variable display area for the upper symbol row, a variable display area for the middle symbol, and a variable display region for the lower symbol. ing. In the holding display area NE, there are unit holding display areas Da1 to Da8 of the same number as the maximum holding number when game balls enter the operating ports 33a and 33b (when balls enter the ball entry parts 33d and 33e). A reservation number display area Da is provided which is partitioned so as to be lined up in the left and right direction.

Specifically, the maximum number of game balls that can be held when the game balls enter the first ball entry section 33d is four, and the maximum number of game balls that can be held when the game ball enters the second ball entry section 33e is four. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, a total of eight pieces of reservation information are stored in the order of winnings in the first ball entering section 33d and the second ball entering section 33e. Correspondingly, the pending number display area Da includes a first unit pending display area Da1, a second unit pending display area Da2, a third unit pending display area Da3, a fourth unit pending display area Da4, and a fifth unit pending display area. Area Da5, sixth unit pending display area Da6, seventh unit pending display area Da7, and eighth unit pending display area Da8 are set.

For example, if the number of reserved game balls (total number of reserved balls) is one when a game ball enters the operating ports 33a, 33b, the predetermined reserved display image MP is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Da1. , if the number of reserved balls is 4 when game balls enter the operating ports 33a and 33b, a predetermined pending display image MP is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 to the fourth unit pending display area Da4. The configuration is as follows. Note that FIG. 6(b) illustrates a case where the number of pending items is three.

In addition, in the hold display area NE, a hold display image corresponding to the game round to be executed (currently being executed) is displayed side by side with the hold count display area Da (more specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1). An execution target display area Db in which MP is displayed is provided.

When a game round ends and you move on to the next game round, the hold display image MP displayed in the hold count display area Da (first unit hold display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db, The pending display image MP displayed in the pending number display area Da is shifted to the lower side.

In the display screen 41a, a special display area OE is set above the variable display area ME. A display section KP is provided in the special display area OE, and variable display is possible by switching the display color on the display section KP. The special display area OE is smaller than the variable display area in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the display part KP in the special display area OE is smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

The special display area OE corresponds to the main display section 43, and when a variable display is performed on the main display section 43, a variable display is also performed in the special display area OE. Specifically, the variable display on the display section KP is performed so that the variable display of the picture on the main display section 43 matches the variable display start timing and the variable display time. Furthermore, regarding the stop display on the display section KP (a state in which the display color is fixed without switching the display color), the stop display of the picture on the main display section 43 is made to match the stop display start timing and the stop display time. This is how it is done.

Note that in this embodiment, the stop display on the display section KP does not indicate the result of the win/fail determination based on winnings in the operating ports 33a and 33b; It is also possible to provide a structure that explicitly or suggests the above results. Furthermore, the display section KP is not limited to being configured with a single display image, but may be configured with a plurality of display images.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

During the game, the MPU 202 uses various counter information to perform jackpot lottery, display settings on the main display section 43, outline settings for symbol display on the symbol display device 41, display settings on the accessory display section 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 8, there is a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the lottery to generate a jackpot, and a jackpot random number counter C1 used when determining the jackpot type such as the first type jackpot result or the second type jackpot result. A jackpot type counter C2 to be used, a reach random number counter C3 to be used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 is off and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a main display section. 43, a variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the variation display area ME of the symbol display device 41 and the display part KP in the special display area OE. There is. Furthermore, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not to put the electric accessory 34 of the lower operating port 33b into the electric role release state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. 33e), the ball is stored in the held ball storage area 232 as an acquisition information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE for the operation port. The holding area RE includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8. The jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231, according to the history of winnings to the openings 33a and 33b (more specifically, the history of balls entering the first ball entering section 33d and the second ball entering section 33e) Each numerical value information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as pending information in one of the areas Ra1 to Ra8. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when winnings to the actuating ports 33a and 33b (more specifically, balls entering the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e) occur multiple times in a row. , each numerical information is chronologically arranged in the order of first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4 → fifth area Ra5 → sixth area Ra6 → seventh area Ra7 → eighth area Ra8. will be stored in. By providing the eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, the history of game balls entering the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e is four each, that is, into the operating ports 33a and 33b. A total of 8 prize winning histories are stored in a suspended memory. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with a storage area for the total number of reserved balls, and the total number of reserved balls is stored in the total number of reserved balls based on the ball entering the first ball entering section 33d or the second ball entering section 33e. Information for specifying the number of stored reservation information is stored.

For example, if a ball enters only one of the first ball entry part 33d and the second ball entry part 33e, and the number of balls enters is 4 or more, the maximum number of entries related to winnings to the operating ports 33a and 33b is stored. is limited to four, but as long as the game balls enter the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e alternately by the already explained distribution means 33g, the number of winnings in the operating ports 33a and 33b is limited to four. The maximum number of memories related to this will be raised to eight. In other words, in the present embodiment, even in a situation where winnings to the lower operation port 33b are unlikely to occur, it is possible to prevent the number of stored pending information from reaching a limit of four. .

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the main display section 43, and when starting one game round, the execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE. Based on various numerical information stored in the AE, judgments are made as to whether or not the information is correct.

In detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the operating ports 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing when the game ball that has entered the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is stored as a win/fail table (win/fail information group) in a win/fail table storage area 221 as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the validity table will be explained.

In the win/fail table, address information consisting of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information also consisting of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is expressed in decimal numbers and is set in 10 types from "1" to "10", and the jackpot numerical information is expressed in decimal numbers as "7", "36", and "67". , "100", "131", "164", "195", "223", "241", "272" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are 1:1. are associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in the numerical range of "0" to "299" of random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode are different, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referenced during the lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced during the lottery. Referenced. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one piece of numerical information that results in a jackpot, and in the high probability mode, there are 10 pieces of numerical information, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/300, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode. The probability of winning is higher. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the operating ports 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing when the game ball that has flowed into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204.

The destinations to which game results are distributed to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area serving as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Then, the first type jackpot result (special game result corresponding to 16R) and the second type jackpot result (special game result corresponding to 4R) are set as such distribution destinations.

If you win the 1st type jackpot result or the 2nd type jackpot result, you will move to the opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode will become the high probability mode, and after the transition to the support mode. This is a jackpot result in which the high-frequency support mode is activated until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). Note that after the end reference number of times (defined number of times) has elapsed, a transition is made to the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In the following explanation, a gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode will be referred to as a high probability gaming state.

The variable winning device 32 is opened 16 times when the result is a type 1 jackpot, and the variable winning device 32 is opened 4 times when the result is a type 2 jackpot. In other words, it is set so that the number of game balls that can be acquired in the opening/closing execution mode is greater for the first type jackpot result than for the second type jackpot result, and a difference is set in the degree of advantage.

In addition, in the distribution table corresponding to the first ball entry section 33d, "0 to 9" correspond to the first type jackpot results, "10 to 29" correspond to the second type jackpot results, and the second type jackpot results correspond to the second type jackpot results. In the distribution table corresponding to the ball entry section 33e, "0 to 19" correspond to the first type jackpot results, and "20 to 29" correspond to the second type jackpot results. Thereby, a difference is provided so that the distribution based on the ball entering the second ball entering section 33e is more advantageous for the player than the allocation based on the ball entering the first ball entering section 33d.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the actuation openings 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing when the game ball that has entered the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the game round that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually depending on the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-reach display (ready-to-reach state) is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the opening/closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is the high-frequency winning mode. In a gaming machine where the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result in the game round, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display (or variable display) of the symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 41. This refers to a display state that is used to make the player think that this is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode can be created. This is a display state in which combinations of ready-to-win symbols that are likely to be established are displayed, and in this state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is displayed on a preset active line on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying combinations of reach symbols that are likely to be established, and symbols are fluctuated and displayed by a final stopped symbol sequence under the situation where the reach line is formed.

With reference to FIG. 7, an example of a display mode in the case of the above-mentioned reach display will be described. In the case of reach display, first the fluctuating display of symbols is ended (displayed in a stopped state) in the upper row of symbols Z1, and then the fluctuating display of symbols is ended (displayed in a stopped state) in the symbol row Z3 in the lower row. In this state, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying main symbols with the same number on any of the active lines L1 to L5. Then, under the situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the middle symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbols with the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line, so that the main symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 The fluctuating display of symbols is ended.

In addition, in the reach display, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, the remaining symbol rows display fluctuating symbols, and the background screen displays a predetermined character etc. as a moving image. These include those that perform a reach effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen while reducing or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols. In addition, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to display a sign using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character when the reach display is being performed or before the reach display. You can also do this.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 202 to determine the variable display time in the main display section 43 and the variable display time in the variable display area ME and special display area OE of the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, when the symbol display device 41 determines a variation pattern at the start of symbol variation, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired.

When determining the fluctuation display time on the symbol display device 41 and the main display section 43 (specifically, the result display section for the actuation opening), the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the display time table storage area of the ROM 203 are used. 223 is referenced. In addition, the MPU 202 determines the stop result in the result display section for the operating opening using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result determination table stored in the ROM 203 is used.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is configured such that it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34 to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 99, the electric accessory 34 is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=100 to 199, the electric accessory 34 is not controlled to be in the open state.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 81)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 to advance the game in each game round will be explained. In addition to the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 202 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , description of these various processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (eg, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 81, determines the states of the winning winning detection sensors, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the subsequent step S104, a winning process for a through prize is executed in conjunction with a winning in the through gate 35. In the winning process for the through gate, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the power holding area. On the condition that the stored accessory storage number is less than 4, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area. Further, the notification/performance control device 82 executes a process for lighting the reservation lamp part 47 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of reservation memories. If the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 235, the winning detection flag is deleted and the winning processing for the through gate ends.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process advances to step S105, and in step S105, the winning process for the actuated opening associated with the winning of the operating openings 33a and 33b is executed, and this timer interrupt processing ends. do.

<Winning process for actuation port>
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 and 11, the winning process for the actuation port will be described.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first ball entry section 33d (winning). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entry section 33d, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls.

In the subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side, indicating that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section 33d. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the first ball entry section 33d. After that, in step S204, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, etc., and the main prize winning processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the first ball entry section 33d, the process advances to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second ball entry section 33e (winning). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entry section 33e, the process advances to step S206, and a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S206 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in external output processing S401 of the normal processing described later.

In the subsequent step S207, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section 33e to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the second ball entry section 33e. Thereafter, information acquisition processing is performed in step S204, and the main winning processing ends.

It should be noted that if a negative determination is made in the process of step S205, that is, if there is no ball entering either the first ball entering section 33d or the second ball entering section 33e, the main winning process is directly ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the information acquisition process in step S204 will be described.

<Information acquisition process>
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the starting pending memory number N stored in the pending number storage area FE of the pending ball storage area 232, specifically, the relevant number N of the first ball entering section 33d and the second ball entering section 33e. It is determined whether or not the starting pending storage number N related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If the starting pending memory number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is directly terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the starting pending memory number N of the corresponding ball entry section is incremented by 1 in step S302. At the same time, the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as common reservation number CRN) stored in the reservation number storage area FE in step S303 is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S304, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103 is updated to the first value of the free storage area of the operation opening holding area RE. , that is, the storage area corresponding to the common reservation number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302.

In subsequent steps S305 and S306, the notification/performance control device 82, which is a sub-side (sub-side) control device, notifies that a prize has been won to the operating ports 33a, 33b (balls have entered the ball entering sections 33d, 33e). Then, a confirmation process for a pending notice and a process for setting a pending command, which are processes for causing the display control device 212 to recognize and execute a pending notice, which will be described later, are executed, and this information acquisition process is ended. Note that the hold command includes information as to which of the first ball entering section 33d and the second ball entering section 33e the winning is based on.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process of step S306 will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process to be described later. Upon receiving the hold command, the display control device 212 executes processing for changing the display in the hold count display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the hold count.

Specifically, when the display control device 212 receives the same command via the notification/effect control device 82, the display control device 212 displays the above-mentioned pending display image MP in the pending number display area Da. (for example, add). In the pending number display area Da, pending images are displayed sequentially from the left side. For example, if the common pending number CRN is 1, the pending image is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 at the left end, and the common pending image is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 at the left end. If the number CRN is 8, the pending image is displayed in the eighth unit pending display area Da8, which is the eighth unit from the left.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing in steps S401 to S406 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step S401, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. In addition, if various commands such as production commands such as variation commands, type commands, and variation end commands, hold commands, and shift commands to be described later are set, they are sent to the notification/production control device 82. do.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the subsequent step S403, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display section 43, etc. are performed.

After executing the game time control process in step S403, the process advances to step S404, and a game state transition process is executed. Although the details will be described later, this gaming state transition process causes the gaming state to shift to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode (high certainty gaming state), and the like. The details of the gaming cycle control process in step S403 and the gaming state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S405, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34 provided in the operating port unit 33 is executed. In this process for electric role support, numerical information acquired from the electric role object release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 233 of the RAM 204 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric role object 34. A lottery is held, and when the electric accessory open state is won, opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 34 is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display section 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery results of the electric prize opening lottery.

As already explained, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the electric accessory 34, and transition to either support mode is performed in the game state transition process. After this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, the mode becomes high-frequency support mode, and if the flag is not set, the mode becomes low-frequency support mode.

In the electric support support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34 will be in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode. Set the opening time to be longer. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, if the electric role opening state is won and the electric role opening state occurs multiple times, the next opening state will start after one opening state ends. The closing time is set to be shorter than the opening time.

Incidentally, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

After that, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the game ball launch control process is performed once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply/launch control device 98 (that is, a launch operation is being performed). , the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 53 is energized. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. Furthermore, in step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the change type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S401 to S406 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process in step S403 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 to 16.

In the game time control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the main game round is continued without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S506 and the game round progression process of steps S507 to S510. Control processing ends.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the result display section for the operating port of the main display section 43 is in the variable display mode. If the result display section for the operating port is not displaying fluctuations, the process advances to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether the confirmation display on the result display section for the operating port of the main display section 43 has been completed. That is, after the above-mentioned fluctuating display ends, the result display continues for a predetermined period, but if this final display has already ended, an affirmative determination is made in step S503 and the main game cycle is resumed. Control processing ends. In other words, the start of the next game round is regulated during the confirmation display.

If a negative determination is made in both step S502 and step S503, the process proceeds to steps S504 to S506 for starting the game round. In the process for starting a game round, first, in step S504, it is determined whether the total number of starting reservation balls (common reservation number CRN) is "0" or not. When the common reservation number CRN is “0”, it means that no reservation information is stored in the reservation ball storage area 232. Therefore, the main game round control process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step S505, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation ball storage area 232 for variable display, Further, in step S506, after executing a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuating display on the main display section 43 and the fluctuating display on the symbol display device 41, this game round control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process in step S505 and the fluctuation start process in step S506 will be explained in detail. First, the data setting process in step S505 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

<Data setting process>
In the data setting process, first in step S601, among the start hold storage numbers N stored in the hold count storage area FE, the one targeted for the current setting process and the common hold count CRN are decremented by one. In the following step S602, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

Thereafter, in step S603, a process is executed to shift the data (ie, reservation information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra8 of the reservation area RE. This data shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Ra1, and also clears the data in the second area Ra2→ 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3, 5th area Ra5 → 4th area Ra4, 6th area Ra6 → 5th area Ra5, 7th area Ra7 → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: sixth area Ra6, eighth area Ra8→seventh area Ra7.

In the subsequent step S604, a shift command is set, which is information for making the notification/performance control device 82 recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. After that, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the notification/effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Upon receiving the shift command, the display control device 212 executes a process for changing the display in the reserved number display area Da for actuating ports in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process in step S506 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15.

In the variation start process, first in step S701, a validity determination process is executed to determine whether the pending information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. When the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the obtained information is changed to the information corresponding to the jackpot by referring to the low probability mode win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. If the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the determined information is determined to be a jackpot by referring to the win/fail table for the high probability mode stored in the win/fail table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. Identify whether the information is included in the information corresponding to winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S701 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the result corresponds to a jackpot win, type determination processing is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, it is specified whether the information for type determination grasped above is included in the information corresponding to the first type jackpot result. Specifically, when the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the first ball entering section 33d, the distribution table for the first ball entering section 33d is referred to, and the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the second ball entering section 33e. If it corresponds to the ball entering the second ball entering section 33e, the type is determined with reference to the distribution table for the second ball entering section 33e.

In the following step S704, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot win is a type 1 jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703. If it is the 1st type jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the 1st type jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not the 1st type jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the 2nd type jackpot is executed in step S706. Execute result setting processing. Further, if it is determined in step S702 that it is not a jackpot win, then in step S707, a stop result setting process for the case of a loss is executed.

In each stop result setting process from step S705 to step S707, information about the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 43 is obtained by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203. The specified information is stored in the RAM 204. In addition, in step S705 and step S706, the MPU 202 stores information (first type jackpot flag or second type jackpot flag) in various types of RAM 204 for specifying that the judgment result of the current game round is a jackpot result. It is stored in the flag storage area 235.

After executing any of the processes in steps S705 to S707, in step S708, a process for setting a variable display time for variable display is executed. In the following step S709, a variation command and a type command are set. The fluctuation command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, and information on the fluctuation display time. Further, the type command includes information on game results. That is, the type command includes information on the first type jackpot result, information on the second type jackpot result, information on the losing result, etc. as information on the game result.

The variation command and type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The notification/performance control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp section 63 and the output pattern of the sound from the speaker section 64 for the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls the determined performance. The display lamp unit 63 and speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the content is executed. Further, the notification/effect control device 82 transmits the above-mentioned variation command and type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining their information formats. The display control device 212 grasps the variable display pattern on the symbol display device 41 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls the symbol display device so that the grasped variable display pattern is executed. Display control of 41 is performed. Thereafter, in step S710, the variable display of the picture pattern is started on the operating port display section of the main display section 43, and then the present variation start process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 13), when the main display section 43 is in the variable display mode, the game round progression process of steps S507 to S510 is executed. In the game progress processing, first in step S507, it is determined whether the variable display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 17). Further, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S508. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display section 43 is changed. After that, the main game round control process is ended.

If the variable display time has elapsed, a final display process is executed in step S509. The final display process is for definitively displaying the picture on the main display section 43 based on the stop result set in any one of steps S705 to S707. After executing step S509, the main game round control process is ended. Note that details of the final display process in step S509 will be described later.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process in step S404 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the gaming state transition process, first in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variable display→confirmation display on the main display section 43 (specifically, the result display section for the operating opening) for one game round has ended. If it is not the timing at which the confirmation display has ended, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is the timing at which the confirmation display has ended, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the game result of the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the first type jackpot flag or the second type jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If none of the above-mentioned flags are stored, the main game state transition process is ended as is.

If any of the above flags is stored, opening processing is executed in step S804. In the opening process, the opening time at the start of the opening/closing execution mode is set. Then, in step S805, a value determined according to the type of jackpot is entered in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, specifically, "16" in the case of the first type jackpot, In case of a type 2 jackpot, set "4". The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the big winning hole 32a is opened. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. In the grand prize opening/closing process, when the grand prize opening 32a is closed, the variable winning drive unit 32c is driven to win the grand prize on the condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more. Open the mouth 32a. In addition, when the grand prize opening 32a is open, it is confirmed that a predetermined time (30 sec in this embodiment) has passed since the opening of the grand prize opening 32a or a predetermined number of prizes (10 seconds in this embodiment) has passed since the grand prize opening 32a has been opened. On the condition that the number of game balls (5) have won, the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 32c is stopped and the big winning opening 32a is closed.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the main gaming state transition process is immediately ended. When the value of the round counter area RC is "0", in step S808, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the win/fail lottery mode is set to a high probability mode, and the support mode is set to a high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability modes and high frequency support modes are terminated when the game continues for a specified number of times (100 times) or when a jackpot is won during the specified number of times, and after that, if the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and The support mode shifts to a normal gaming state where the support mode is a low-frequency support mode.

Thereafter, in step S809, the opening/closing execution mode termination process is executed, and then the main game state transition process is terminated. In the opening/closing execution mode termination process, the jackpot flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 is erased, and an ending command is output to the notification/effect control device 82 as a command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. Perform processing.

The notification/performance control device 82 displays a moving image (ending movie) indicating that the opening/closing execution mode ends based on this ending command. This video includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended and the state has shifted to a high-precision gaming state.

In this embodiment, an attempt is made to prevent monotony of game progress by changing the speed of game progress depending on the game situation. Here, the variable display time setting process shown in step S708 (see FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17.

<Variable display time setting process>
In the variable display time setting process, first in step S901, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 stores either the first special jackpot flag or the second special jackpot flag.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the result of the winning lottery is a losing result, the process advances to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach display will occur on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S902 as the occurrence of the reach display. When specifying the presence or absence of a reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S901 or step S902, the process advances to step S903, and the current fluctuation is determined by referring to the fluctuation display time table for reach occurrence stored in the display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. The variable display time information corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is acquired, and in the subsequent step S904, the variable display time information is stored in the variable display time counter area (variable display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Set to . After that, this setting process ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the lottery is a big hit, or when the result of the lottery is a loss and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Here, the reach display includes a normal reach display and a super reach display, which have different variable display modes. In the variable display time table for reach occurrence, variable display time information corresponding to normal reach display and super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set. be obtained. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, there is a table in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS, and by referring to this table, the value of the current variation type counter CS can be determined. A corresponding reach display is determined.

In addition, more specifically, the variable display time table for reaching occurrence corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a type 1 jackpot result, a variable display time is set so that a combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and in the case of a type 2 jackpot result, a combination of non-specific symbols can be displayed. A variable display time is set so that the display can be stopped. Incidentally, the variable display time table for reaching occurrence that is referred to is common in both the normal gaming state and the high certainty gaming state.

Returning to the explanation of step S902, if a negative determination is made in step S902, the process advances to step S905. In step S905, it is determined whether the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the process advances to step S906, and the current fluctuation type counter is determined by referring to the fluctuation display time table for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the high probability gaming state stored in the display time table storage area 223. The variable display time corresponding to the value of CS is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area in step S906. After that, this setting process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S905, the process advances to step S907, and the current variation type is determined by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the normal gaming state stored in the display time table storage area 223. The variable display time corresponding to the value of the counter CS is obtained, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area in step S906. After that, this setting process ends.

In this embodiment, the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set to, for example, 8 seconds. Further, the variable display time information when a reach does not occur is set such that the larger the common reservation number CRN, the shorter the variable display time. Specifically, when the number of pending items is three or more, the time is set to be shorter than 8 seconds (for example, 4 seconds) (pending number time saving function). Furthermore, when the game is in a high-precision gaming state (the support mode is a high-frequency support mode), the number of pending information is the same as when it is in a normal gaming state (the support mode is a low-frequency support mode). The variable display time table for reach non-occurrence is set so that a shorter variable display time is selected in certain cases.

As described above, the variable display time for each game round is determined based on parameters such as whether or not a reach occurs, the type of reach display, the number of stored pending information (number of subsequent pending information), and the value of the variable type counter CS. determined (so-called time-saving function). However, the variable display time of each game is based on the contents of other pending information, specifically, information for jackpot determination, information for type determination, and information for reach determination included in other pending information as parameters. It is decided without doing anything.

Some recent pachinko machines are set so that the number of prize balls for a ball entry section with an attached electric accessory is set to be "3" or more. In this type of gaming machine, if the electric accessory picks up a large number of game balls, the player may be given more benefits than expected. Therefore, in order to avoid such an event, the opening time etc. in the high-frequency winning mode are suppressed so that the number of balls entering the electric accessory does not become excessive, and the variable display time per game is adjusted accordingly. The degree of shortening has been determined. In other words, suppressing the occurrence of incoming balls is a factor that prevents shortening of the variable display time. In addition, with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the number of balls held in a high-precision gaming state by firing game balls in accordance with the release of the electric accessory through technical intervention such as so-called stop hitting. If this kind of behavior were to become easy, there is a concern that the function that improves the speed of digestion would not be utilized effectively and speedy game progress would not be realized.

In this embodiment, as already explained, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second ball entering section 33e is set to "1". By setting the prize ball number to "1" for "1" ball entering, the opening time of the electric accessory 34 is more than twice that of conventional gaming machines (approximately "6 seconds" in this embodiment). Even if it is configured so that it remains the same, it is possible to avoid giving the player a benefit that exceeds the above-mentioned assumption. In other words, even if the configuration is such that most of the fired game balls enter the electric accessory 34→second ball entry section 33e, the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by this does not occur. Therefore, the above-mentioned time-saving function can be suitably exhibited, and an improvement in the speed at which reservations are completed in a high-guarantee gaming state is realized.

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect related to the reservation notice that suggests the content of the reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 is displayed before the game round related to the reservation information starts. It is configured to run. The performance corresponding to the pending information that has not yet been selected for lottery is executed at a timing before the game round related to the pending information. According to such a configuration, in addition to the game in which the lottery result of the pending information corresponding to the currently ongoing game round is confirmed, the content of the above-mentioned performance is based on the result when the pending information that will later become a lottery target. A game of checking or predicting accordingly is added, thereby diversifying the game. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<About suspension notice>
Next, the flow of pending notice will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 18. The suspension notice is made by using the final display time in a game session earlier than the game session (specific game session) that is the subject of the suspension notice. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 18(a1) and (a2), after the variable display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 18(a3), In addition, the display screen 41a is configured to display a plurality of presentation images (bubble images) that resemble bubbles upward from the lower end of the display screen 41a.

This bubble image is an opaque or translucent display image, and is displayed in front of the symbols in a state where the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the bubble image passes in front of the pattern, the pattern is hidden behind the bubble image. However, the passage area of the bubble image does not overlap with the display part KP in the special display area OE, or even if it overlaps, it is only a small amount, so that the visibility of the display part KP is not obstructed or is hardly obstructed by the bubble image. .

This preview display effect is executed over a plurality of game times before the specific game time. Specifically, two times is set as the number of executions of the preview performance, and it is performed in each game game starting from the game game two games before the specific game game. That is, as shown in FIGS. 18(a1) to (a3), after the bubble image is displayed in the final display in the previous game round, as shown in FIGS. 18(a4) to (a6), The confirmation display in the next game round is also performed by displaying the bubble image in the same way.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 18(a7) to (a10), in a specific game round, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the result of the win/fail determination. At this time, the bubble image as a pending notice is not displayed in the confirmation display of the specific game round. In addition, FIG. 18 shows a case where, as a specific game round, a jackpot result or a missed reach result is announced via a reach effect after the fluctuation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 starts.

As a process related to a pending notice, a confirmation process for a pending notice (step S305 in FIG. 11) is set, and this process is a confirmation process for the operating port set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The winning process (FIG. 10), specifically, is configured to be executed as part of the information acquisition process in step S204. In other words, the confirmation process for the pending notice is executed based on winnings in the operating ports 33a and 33b. The confirmation process for pending notice will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19.

<Confirmation process for pending notice>
In the reservation notice confirmation process, in step S1001, the starting reservation memory number N and the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE of the reservation ball storage area 232 are read out, and the information on the reservation number is sent to the MPU 202. Store in register. Thereafter, in steps S1002 to S1006, it is checked whether the pending information acquired by the current prize winning includes information about the jackpot winning.

Specifically, first, in step S1002, information for jackpot determination among the pending information obtained in step S304 (FIG. 11) based on the current winning to the operating ports 33a and 33b, that is, the obtained jackpot random number counter. Understand the value of C1.

In the following step S1003, it is determined whether the mode is low probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether a high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined whether the current win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode. If it is the low probability mode, the process advances to step S1004, and the information for jackpot determination (value of jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1002 by referring to the low probability mode win/fail table is information corresponding to jackpot winning. Identify whether it is included in a group. If it is the high probability mode, the process advances to step S1005, and the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1002 is determined to be a jackpot win with reference to the high probability mode win/fail table. Identify what is included in the configured information.

After step S1004 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006, and it is determined whether the information for jackpot determination (value of jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1002 corresponds to jackpot winning. If it corresponds to a jackpot win, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1007, and the confirmation process for the reservation notice is immediately ended.

In addition, in the process of step S1007, the information for jackpot type determination among the pending information acquired in step S304 above based on the current winning is grasped, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is Refer to this to determine the type of jackpot. Therefore, the information stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1007 includes information regarding the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, variable probability jackpot, etc.).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1006, the process advances to step S1008. In step S1008, based on the current winning to the actuating ports 33a and 33b, information for out-of-reach determination among the pending information acquired in step S304, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the subsequent step S1009, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to, and the reach determination information group grasped in step S1008 is referred to. It is specified whether the information for reach determination (value of reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as reach winning.

After executing the process in step S1009, the process advances to step S1010, and it is determined whether the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1008 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, in step S1011, the information on the occurrence of a reach is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then this confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is ended as is.

The jackpot information and the reach occurrence information stored in the register of the MPU 202 in steps S1007 and S1011 are referred to in the pending command setting process in step S306 in the information acquisition process (FIG. 11), and in the setting process, the jackpot and reach occurrence information are The pending command is set so as to include information regarding the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot.

Here, in the present embodiment, a final display time for displaying a picture on the main display section 43 is set in association with the result specified by the confirmation process for the pending notice. That is, when executing the suspension notice, the length of the final display time is changed in order to ensure a period (effect period) for displaying the bubble image. Therefore, in the following, first, the fixed display time will be explained, and then a specific control process for changing the fixed display time will be explained.

<About the confirmed display time>
As shown in FIG. 20, in the game round on the main display section 43, the symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner based on the result of a winning lottery, and thereafter, the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning lottery. The final display is performed once. In other words, a game round consists of a fluctuating display of symbols and a final display of the fluctuating symbols.

Here, the fixed display of the symbols is not completed by the end of the variable display, but is completed by the continuous display of the symbols in the form corresponding to the result of the win/fail lottery for a predetermined fixed display time. This is to ensure that the player has time to recognize the game results and to clarify the boundary between the subsequent game and the game.

Therefore, after the start of the fluctuating display of symbols, the next game round (fluctuating display) will start only after the fluctuating display time, which is the actual execution period of the game round, has elapsed, and then during the waiting period. This occurs after the display time has further elapsed. In the following, the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the next game round, that is, the period that is the sum of the execution period and the standby period of the game round, will be referred to as "gaming time related to one game round." Incidentally, the reason why it is set as "determined" is that the stop display at the above-mentioned fixed display time is performed to display a definite stop result with the display content (picture) unchanged.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this embodiment, the final display time is divided into a first final display time and a second final display time. Specifically, the period from the start of the determined display time to the middle of the determined display time is the first determined display time, and the remaining time until the end of the determined display time is the second determined display time. The time length of the first confirmed display time is set based on the specified result specified in the confirmation process for the above-mentioned pending notice. The types of lengths as the first confirmed display time include a normal time, a special time longer than the normal time, and a time saving time shorter than the normal time. On the other hand, the second confirmed display time is set to a predetermined time length regardless of the above-mentioned identification result.

On the main display section 43, the same picture is continuously displayed in a stopped state during both the first confirmed display time and the second confirmed display time. That is, the picture that has been stopped and displayed as a result of the stop continues to be displayed even after the first confirmed display time has elapsed, and the stopped display ends when the second confirmed display time has elapsed. At that time, if there is pending information that has not yet been selected for the lottery, the changing display of the symbols will start after the second confirmed display time has elapsed, and conversely, if there is no pending information that has not yet been selected for the lottery. continues to be displayed in a stopped state even after the second confirmed display time has elapsed.

In the following explanation, in order to distinguish between the confirmation display performed during the first confirmation display time and the confirmation display performed during the second confirmation display time, the former will be referred to as the "first confirmation display", and the latter will be referred to as the "first confirmation display". is sometimes referred to as a "second confirmation display."

Next, control processing for changing the fixed display time will be explained. In this embodiment, a final display process (step S509 in FIG. 13) is set as the process. This process is executed in the game cycle control process (FIG. 13), which is set as a part of the normal process (FIG. 12), and is configured to be executed at the start of the confirmation display. The final display process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

<Process for confirmation display>
In the confirmation display processing, first in step S1101, it is determined whether the result display section for the operating port of the main display section 43 is in the second confirmation display. If the second confirmation display is not in progress, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the result display section for the operating port of the main display section 43 is in the first confirmation display.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, it means that confirmation display has not started on the main display section 43. In this case, the process advances to step S1103, and a stop start process is executed to start the first confirmation display. Here, the stop start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

In the stop start process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The special setting flag is set when the first confirmed display time is set to a special time for pending notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not a special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The special setting flag is set when the first confirmed display time should be set to a special time.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, it is determined in step S1203 whether the subsequent reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 232 corresponds to the occurrence of a jackpot or a reach. Here, all pending information acquired after this step was executed at the final display timing of the previous game round is targeted. The process in step S1203 is performed with reference to the information stored in the register of the MPU 202, that is, the result of the confirmation process for the pending notice. Specifically, it is determined whether jackpot occurrence information (step S1007) or reach occurrence information (step S1011) is stored in the register as corresponding to the subsequent pending information. Then, if any of the information is stored, an affirmative determination is made, and if none of the information is stored, a negative determination is made.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, the process advances to step S1204, and a process of determining the number of executions DN is executed. The number of executions DN indicates the number of times the first confirmed display time is set to the special time. Here, the process of determining the number of executions DN will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23(a).

In the process of determining the number of executions DN, first in step S1301, the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE is read out, and the common reservation number CRN is determined. The common reservation number CRN in this case is not the one at that time, but the common reservation number when the reservation information (special reservation information) corresponding to the jackpot or reach occurrence is stored. For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(b), after timing tA, which is the previous setting timing, winnings to the operating ports 33a and 33b occur at timing tB and timing tC, and the winnings occur at timing tB, which is the earlier setting timing. If the reservation information stored in step S1301 is special reservation information, 2, which is the common reservation number CRN at timing tB, is determined in step S1301.

After step S1301 is executed, in step S1302, the common reservation number CRN that has been grasped is compared with the set number AN (two times in this embodiment) that is preset as the number of executions of the reservation notice, and the common reservation number CRN is It is determined whether the number CRN is greater than or equal to the set number AN.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1302 (for example, when the common reservation number CRN is 4), in step S1303, the set number of times AN is directly set as the number of executions DN. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302 (for example, if the common reservation CRN is 1), in step S1304, the common reservation number CRN is set as the execution number DN instead of the set number AN. In this way, when the common reservation number CRN is less than the set number AN, by reducing the execution number DN in accordance with the common reservation number CRN, the reservation notice can be issued even if the common reservation number CRN is less than the set number AN. Execution becomes possible.

Returning to the explanation of the stop start processing (FIG. 22), after the execution count DN is grasped in step S1204, in the subsequent step S1205, the hold information that is earlier than the special hold information within the range of the execution count DN is Determine whether there is something corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence. This step is also performed with reference to the information stored in the register of the MPU 202, that is, the result of the confirmation process for the pending notice, as in step S1203.

In this step, for example, if the number of executions DN is 2, the identification results (results of confirmation processing for reservation notice) regarding the two previous reservation information than the special reservation information are referred to, and the Determine whether there is something corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence. If any of the pending information corresponds to a jackpot or reach occurrence, a negative judgment is made; conversely, if none of the pending information corresponds to a jackpot or reach occurrence, a positive judgment is made. . Incidentally, this step is provided in order to prevent a game round in which a jackpot or reach occurrence unrelated to the pending notice does not occur during the execution of the pending notice. This makes it possible to clarify the correlation between the pending notice and the game rounds, and it becomes possible to easily convey to the player the performance intention of the pending notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to set the first confirmed display time to the special time in step S1206. In other words, on the condition that a specific game round that supports a jackpot or a missed reach is forthcoming, and that there is no game round that supports a jackpot or a missed reach in a game round that precedes the specific game run within the range of the number of executions DN. , whether or not to execute the suspended notice is determined by lottery.

Specifically, a lottery table stored in the ROM 203 is referred to to determine whether or not the pending notice is available. Regarding the lottery table, there is a lottery table for jackpot that is referenced when the pending information that triggered it corresponds to a jackpot, and a lottery table that is referenced when the pending information that triggered it corresponds to a normal reach. It is roughly divided into a lottery table for normal reach and a lottery table for lose super reach, which is referred to when the pending information that triggered it corresponds to a lose super reach. Thereby, the probability of appearance of a pending notice can be varied depending on the content to which the pending information corresponds, such as, for example, the execution frequency of pending notices increases in the order of a missed normal reach, a missed super reach, and a jackpot. As the lottery value used for the above-mentioned lottery, an existing counter value such as the jackpot random number counter C1 may be used, or a dedicated counter value for the lottery may be provided.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, since the main control device 81 determines whether or not to issue a pending notice as described above, the sub-side control device, such as the notification/presentation control device 82 or the display control device 212, determines whether or not to issue a pending notice. Such processing such as determination of availability is not executed.

If it is determined in step S1207 that the lottery has been won, the process advances to step S1208, and an execution count counter DC is set in the execution count counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Here, the number of executions DN is set as the value of the number of executions counter DC. The execution number counter DC is a counter for counting the number of executions when the first confirmed display time is set to the special time.

In subsequent step S1209, a standby count counter WC is set in the standby count counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. If the common reservation number CRN is greater than the execution number DN, it is necessary to wait for special setting of the confirmed display time, and the waiting number counter WC is a counter for counting the number of gaming times during the waiting period. In this step, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the execution number DN from the common reservation number CRN is set as the value of the waiting number counter WC.

After executing step S1209, a special setting flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 in step S1210. In the following step S1211, it is determined whether the value of the waiting number counter WC is 0 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, a special setting flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 in step S1212.

In the subsequent step S1213, "750" (equivalent to 1.5 sec) is set in the first confirmed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. As a result, the first confirmed display time is set to 1.5 seconds as a special period.

As described above, in this embodiment, at the start of the confirmation display, it is determined in the confirmation process for the reservation notice whether or not reservation information corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot or reach occurrence is specified, and based on the determination result, A first final display time for final display is set. As a result, when pending information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence occurs during variable display, the result can be quickly reflected in the final display time of the final display.

After executing step S1213, in step S1214, the value of the execution number counter DC is updated by decrementing by one.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if the value of the wait count counter WC is not 0, the value of the wait count counter WC is decremented by 1 and updated in step S1215. In the subsequent step S1216, it is determined whether the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE is equal to or greater than a predetermined value K preset as a time saving setting number. The time saving setting number K is for shortening the first confirmed display time based on the common reservation number CRN, and is set to 3, which is the same as the setting number for variable display in this embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S1216, "100" (equivalent to 0.2 sec) is set in the first confirmed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1217. As a result, the first confirmed display time is set to 0.2 seconds as the normal time. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, "0" (equivalent to 0 sec) is set in the first confirmed display time counter area in step S1218. As a result, the first confirmed display time is set to 0 sec as a time saving time.

After executing steps S1214, S1217, and S1218, in step S1219, the final display of the picture (first final display) is started on the operating port display section of the main display section 43, and then the main stop start process is ended. do.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in steps S1203 or S1207, or an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1216, and the first confirmed display time is set to either the normal time or the time-saving time based on the common reservation number CRN. Set to .

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, that is, if only the special setting flag among the special setting flag and the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, then the next game This means that there is a waiting period in order to set the first confirmed display time to a special time. In this case, the process advances to step S1211 to determine whether or not waiting has been completed, and depending on the result, the process from step S1212 onwards or the process from step S1215 onwards is executed.

In this way, by skipping the processing in steps S1203 to S1210 when an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, while the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, the pending destination in step S1203 is Execution of specific result determination processing is restricted. As a result, even if new pending information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence occurs during the waiting period, it will be suppressed from being reflected in the setting of the first confirmed display time, and the setting will not be duplicated or changed midway. It becomes possible to suppress it.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, the process advances to step S1220 to determine whether the value of the execution number counter DC is 0 or not. Determine whether If the value of the execution number counter DC is not 0, that is, if the number of games DN set in steps S1303 and S1304 in FIG. is set to a special time (1.5 sec). As a result, before the specific game time is started, the first confirmed display time is set to the special time in each game time for the number of executions DN.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, that is, if the number of game times for which the first confirmed display time should be set as special time reaches the number of executions DN, the process advances to step S1221, and the flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Delete the special setting flag and special setting flag that have been set. After that, the process advances to step S1216, and the processes from step S1216 onwards are executed. In other words, if the value of the execution counter DC reaches 0 and it is time to start the confirmation display (when the timing to start the confirmation display for a specific game), either the normal time or the time-saving time will be displayed. is set as the first confirmed display time.

Returning to the explanation of the final display process (FIG. 21), after step S1103 is executed, a first stop display command is set in step S1104, and this final display process ends. The first stop display command includes information regarding the length of the first confirmed display time. The set first stop display command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 12).

The notification/performance control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp section 63 and the sound output pattern from the speaker section 64 for the game round based on the received first stop display command, and controls the determined performance. The display lamp unit 63 and speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the content is executed. Further, the notification/effect control device 82 transmits the first stop display command to the display control device 212 while maintaining its information format.

The display control device 212 determines the length of the first confirmed display time based on the received first stop display command. Then, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP continue to be displayed in a stopped state at the determined length. Furthermore, the display control device 212 grasps the stop display timing of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 in the game round based on the received first stop display command, and displays all symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the timing. The symbol display device 41 is controlled to stop displaying the symbol. Furthermore, the display section KP in the special display area OE is also controlled to start stop display based on the first stop display command.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbols in the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 41 are stopped and displayed, the symbols in the final stop row (symbol row Z2 in this embodiment) are not suddenly stopped, but are displayed at a variable display speed. It is common to stop the engine gradually while lowering the engine speed. Under such circumstances, in the present embodiment, for example, in response to the display control device 212 receiving the first stop display command, the display controller 212 starts stopping the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (last stop row). With this configuration, the time during which the symbols remain stationary is shortened by the amount of deceleration time required for the symbols to stop, resulting in a substantial shortening of the stop display time.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped) before receiving the first stop display command, and then the first stop display command is received. Based on this, the temporarily stopped symbol is permanently stopped (determined display). In this case, the timing of the temporary stop is determined based on the information on the variable display time included in the variable command from the main controller 81, and the type of symbol to be temporarily stopped is determined based on the type command from the main controller 81. do. These decisions may be made by the notification/presentation control device 82 or by the display control device 212.

The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the temporary stop is different from that during the final display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 moves slowly back and forth, or at least a part of a character such as an octopus (see FIG. 6) that constitutes the main symbol or the sub symbol moves. In other words, the temporary stop is performed in such a way that although the symbol appears to be stopped at first glance, it remains in an incomplete stopped state (stopped display). On the other hand, the final display is performed so that the character is completely stopped without any slight reciprocating movements or movements of the character. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the temporary stop and the final display do not have different display modes, and it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between them.

On the other hand, the display portion KP in the special display area OE is controlled to suddenly stop from the fluctuating display state, unlike the case of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is because the manner of variable display and static display on the display section KP is made to match that of the picture on the main display section 43. Therefore, when viewed in relation to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped, the display section KP still continues to display the variable display, and the final display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 starts. At the same time, the display section KP also stops displaying.

Returning to the explanation of the confirmation display process (FIG. 21), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, that is, if the first confirmation display is in progress, in step S1105, the settings made in steps S1213, S1217, and S1218 in FIG. It is determined whether the first confirmed display time has elapsed. If the first confirmed display time has elapsed, the process advances to step S1106, and "250" (equivalent to 0.5 sec) is set in the first confirmed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. As a result, the second confirmed display time is set to 0.5 sec. Note that the second confirmed display time is set regardless of the specific result specified in the confirmation process for pending notice (FIG. 19), and is uniformly set to a fixed time of 0.5 seconds.

After execution of step S1106, a second stop display command is set in step S1107, and the main final display process is ended. This set second stop display command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 12).

The second stop display command includes information regarding the length of the second confirmed display time, and the notification/effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 perform the second stop display command based on the received second stop display command. The start timing of the second confirmation display and the length of the second confirmation display time are ascertained so that the confirmation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP is completed 0.5 seconds after receiving the second stop display command. Then, the symbol display device 41 is controlled.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, that is, if the second confirmation display is in progress, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the second confirmation display time set in step S1106 has elapsed. If the second confirmation display time has elapsed, in step S1109, the confirmation display of the picture (second confirmation display) on the actuating port display section of the main display section 43 is ended, and then the main stop start process is ended. do. Further, if a negative determination is made in steps S1105 and S1108, the final confirmation display process is immediately terminated.

<About the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 82 and the display control device 212>
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 5, supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 82 and the display control device 212.

An MPU 242 is mounted on the notification/performance control board 241 provided in the notification/performance control device 82. The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. A RAM 244 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are built-in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and RAM 244 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 242, and each may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242, and the main control device 81 executes game cycle control such as the above-mentioned variation command, type command, first stop display command, and second stop display command. command (gaming cycle control information). It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands (opening/closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already described, the output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the holding lamp section 47 provided on the variable display unit 36, the display lamp section 63 and speaker section 64 provided on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 212. ing. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 81 to the notification/effect control device 82 are transmitted to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information format as is.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board on which an MPU, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, and a video RAM, which are elements in which a program ROM and a work RAM are combined into chips, are mounted. The MPU of the display control device 212 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 81 via the notification/effect control device 82, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP (specifically (generation of internal commands for VDP). More specifically, the MPU executes a process of grasping the fluctuating display pattern of each game round on the symbol display device 41 based on commands sent from the main control device 81 via the notification/performance control device 82. At the same time, drawing processing for the VDP 255 is executed in accordance with the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41.

The program ROM is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data by adjusting the timing of each of the MPU, video RAM, etc., and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 256 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

<Explanation regarding the production of each game round>
Here, an outline of the game performance (linked performance) using the display screen 41a will be explained with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25.

When a game round is started, first, high-speed fluctuating display is started for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the fluctuating display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from a high-speed fluctuating display to a slow fluctuating display in which the player can recognize the fluctuating symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(b), when the fluctuating display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the fluctuating display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuating display to the low-speed fluctuating display. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends.

After the variation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed, a stop display time is provided in which the stop display is maintained and waited for a predetermined period. During the stop display time, a confirmation display is performed to clearly show the game result of the current game round to the player. Then, when the fixed display time elapses while the combination of symbols (specific symbols or non-specific symbols) corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on any of the active lines L1 to L5, the jackpot result is assumed to have occurred, and the opening/closing is then performed. Move to execution mode. The stop display time is comprised of a temporary stop time for temporary stop and a final display time for permanent stop. As already explained, the suspension notice is given using the confirmed display time.

In this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned pending notice, (1) a window step-up notice effect as a first type notice effect and (2) a character passing notice as a second type notice effect are displayed on the display screen 41a. is configured to do so. These preview effects do not suggest the occurrence of a jackpot or reach in the game session in which these preview effects are executed, rather than suggesting the presence or absence of a jackpot or reach in the game session in which these preview effects are executed. It has become something to do.

First, with reference to FIG. 25(a), a window step-up preview performance as a first type preview performance will be explained. In the window step-up preview performance, as shown in FIG. 25(a1), a window image 301 partitioned into a rectangular shape is displayed as a performance image. The window image 301 is opaque or semi-transparent, and predetermined characters, characters, etc. are displayed inside it.

The window step-up preview performance is configured so that the content of the performance is upgraded (promoted) in stages. Specifically, in addition to providing a mode in which the window image 301 is displayed as step 1, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25(a3), in step 3, a window image 303 larger than the window image 302 is displayed. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot result is highest when the preview video of step 3 is displayed.

After the window image 301 in Step 1 is displayed, the window image 302 in step S2 is displayed so as to cover the window image 301 from the front side. Furthermore, after the window image 302 in Step 2 is displayed, the window image 303 in Step S3 is displayed so as to cover the window image 302 from the front side. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 25, in order to make it easier to understand that the window images 301 to 303 are displayed in order, the upper window image covers a part of the lower window image. It is also possible to cover the entire window image.

As shown in FIG. 25(c), the window step-up preview performance is performed using the period from the start of the fluctuating display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the middle of the high-speed fluctuating display. Here, each of the window images 301 to 303 is displayed in front of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are hidden behind the regions overlapping with each of the window images 301 to 303. However, in this case, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a high-speed variable manner, and it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, so that practical problems are unlikely to occur. Note that the display portions KP in the special display area OE do not overlap, or even if they overlap, it is only a small amount, so that the display portions KP do not become difficult or invisible due to the respective window images 301 to 303.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25(b), a character passing preview performance as a second type of preview performance will be explained. In the character passage preview performance, a performance image 304 imitating a fish is displayed across the display screen 41a. Specifically, the effect image 304 that appears from the right end of the display screen 41a advances in the same direction (to the left) as the fluctuating display direction of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and then moves out of the display screen 41a from the left end of the display screen 41a. It appears to disappear. Although not shown, as a character passage preview effect, a mode is also available in which the effect image 304 appears from the left end of the display screen 41a and moves in the opposite direction (to the right) from the direction of the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. has been done. In this embodiment, the appearance rate is lower when the effect image 304 moves to the right, and the expectation of a jackpot result is higher.

As shown in FIG. 25(c), this character passage preview performance is performed using the period of high-speed variable display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, so as not to overlap with the first type preview performance. The effect image 304 is displayed on the front side of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but it does not overlap with the display part KP, or even if it overlaps, it is only a small amount.

Regarding the window step-up preview performance and the character passage preview performance, unlike the case of the pending notice, whether or not to execute them is determined by the notification/performance control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are sub-side control devices. In detail, although the jackpot information included in the fluctuation command from the main control device 81 is referred to in order to correlate it with the expectation level of the jackpot result, the notification execution lottery independently performed by the notification/effect control device 82, etc. The system is configured such that the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 makes the final decision, taking into account the results of the above and the overlap with other effects. In this way, when executing multiple types of preview performances, the decision-making authority is distributed to each control device, thereby avoiding concentration of control load caused by diversification of preview performances.

<About processing related to various performances>
As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 41a is specified by the notification/performance control device 82 with reference to the command from the main control device 81, and based on the specified result. The display control device 212 is configured to grasp the details of the variable display mode. Specifically, the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82 executes a fluctuating display control process as part of a regular process that is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and this fluctuating display control process controls the fluctuating display of symbols. The outline of the aspect etc. is specified. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

<Fluctuating display control processing>
In the variable display control process, first in step S1401, it is determined whether a fixed display flag is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown) provided in the RAM 244. The confirmed display flag is set when the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP in the special display area OE are displayed in a confirmed manner.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether the symbol display device 41 is performing variable display to final display of symbols for one game. do. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S1403, and it is determined whether or not a variation command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the present variable display control process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the fluctuation start process is executed in step S1404, and then the present fluctuation display control process is ended. Here, details of the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

<Processing for starting fluctuation>
The variation start process is a process for starting the performance of the game round based on receiving the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81. In the fluctuation start processing, settings such as a reach display are performed as effects for the game round.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S1501, the command for fluctuation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, information on the presence or absence of a reach, and information on the fluctuation display time are specified. As already explained, when the main control device 81 transmits the variation command, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1501, the received type command is read together with the fluctuation command received this time, and from the command, information on game results such as information on the first type jackpot result, information on the second type jackpot result, or information on the loss result is obtained. Identify. Then, in step S1501, from the above-identified information, information on whether there is a jackpot win, information on the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot win, information on whether reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, information on the variable display time. The information is grasped and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 242.

In the following step S1502, based on the information grasped in step S1501, it is determined whether the game result of the game round to be started this time is a game result corresponding to a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a type 1 jackpot result or a type 2 jackpot result, in the subsequent step S1503, a stop result (symbol combination) for the jackpot is determined (stop result determination processing is performed) .

In the stop result determination process, in the case of the first type jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (odd-numbered main symbols) is established on one active line L1 to L5 is determined in this game. Determined as the result of the stoppage. In addition, in the case of a Type 2 jackpot result, the stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) on one active line L1 to L5 is established is the stop result of this game round. Decide as a result.

The type of main symbol and active lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result is achieved are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 243 stores each effective line L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined by the above process is the final stop line table stored in the RAM 244. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. Also, at this time, processing is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. In addition, in the following explanation, the address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244.

After executing step S1503, a jackpot effect setting process is executed at step S1504.

In the performance setting process for the jackpot, the variable display mode of the jackpot symbols is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, if there is a jackpot result, the result is notified through the reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for displaying the reach, the variable display pattern table for displaying the reach stored in the various table areas of the ROM 243 is acquired, and the variable display time and type of command of the variable command received this time are determined. A performance pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. It also executes a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244. In addition, also in the variable display mode determination process described below, a corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 243, and a performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244. In addition, in this step, processing is also performed to determine whether or not to execute the first type preview performance and the second type preview performance.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the result is not a jackpot, the process advances to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the process advances to step S1506, and a reach stop result determination process is executed. Since this process corresponds to a missed reach, the stop result (symbol combination) is determined so as not to result in a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot result. That is, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on one active line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of out-of-reach symbols and active lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this determination, ensure that the same combination of symbols does not occur on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and that the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 that are the same as the symbols forming the reach line are placed on the reach line. The stopping result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at a stopping position shifted forward or backward. Thereafter, a process is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area.

After step S1506 is executed, in step S1507, an effect setting process for generating a reach is executed. This process is similar to the process in step S1504 above, so the description will be used here.

If it is determined in step S1505 that a reach has not occurred, the process advances to step S1508. In step S1508, a stop result determination process for normal deviation (complete deviation) is executed. In this process, the stopping symbols are determined so that symbol combinations corresponding to jackpot results are not formed. In the subsequent step S1509, effect setting processing for a complete miss is executed.

After executing any one of steps S1504, S1507, and S1509, the process advances to step S1510. In step S1510, a process is executed to output commands including information on the stop result and effect pattern determined in steps S1503, S1504, and S1506 to S1509 to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 in order to execute the performance in the current game round. As a result, on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the variable display area ME and the display section KP in the special display area OE is started.

After executing the process in step S1510, in the subsequent step S1511, the process for starting the effect for the game round is executed, and then the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, drive control of the speaker unit 64 and lamp unit 63 is started based on the performance pattern determined in steps S1504, S1507, and S1509, and the performance for the game round is started.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display control process (FIG. 26), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process advances to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether the first stop display command from the main controller 81 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1405, the fluctuating display control process is finished after executing the fluctuating process in step S1406. The process for during fluctuation is a process for executing various performances and changing the determined performance in the game round started by the process for starting fluctuation. Furthermore, in the fluctuating process, as described above, a command is sent to the display control device 212 to temporarily stop the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the end of the fluctuating display time. Note that the temporary stop process may be independently performed by the display control device 212.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process advances to step S1407, and a stop/start process is executed to start confirmation display. Here, the stop/start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

<Processing for stopping and starting>
In the stop start process, first, in step S1601, the length of the first confirmed display time is determined based on the first stop display command from the main controller 81. In the following step S1602, it is determined whether the first confirmed display time that has been grasped is 1.5 seconds, that is, a special time for a pending notice. If the first confirmed display time is a special time, the process advances to step S1603, and processing for setting a pending notice effect is executed. When this setting process is executed, a preview display effect (see FIG. 18) in which a bubble image appears is set to be executed on the display screen 41a.

After executing step S1603, or if a negative determination is made in step S1602, a final display start process is executed in step S1604, and then the main stop start process is ended. In step S1604, a process of outputting a first confirmed display command including information regarding the length of the first confirmed display time to the display control device 212 is executed. Based on the received first confirmed display command, the MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start displaying the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP in the special display area OE. do. Furthermore, if the setting process for the pending preview performance in step S1603 is being executed, information indicating that the pending preview should be executed is included in the first confirmed display command. In this case, the MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to execute the pending notice at the first confirmed display time.

When executing a pending notice, the bubble image is not displayed immediately after the transition to the confirmed display state, but the bubble image is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed after the transition to the confirmed display state. controlled so that Since the bubble image is displayed on the front side of the symbols, the above configuration makes it possible to suitably secure time for the player to understand the symbols that have been confirmed and displayed.

Further, the bubble image is configured such that the process from the appearance of the first bubble image to the erasure of the last bubble image is completed in a time shorter than the remaining time of the first confirmed display time (for example, 1.0 sec). This prevents the suspension notice from being carried out over the second confirmed display time or the next game round. As a result, the appearance of the performance may deteriorate, such as not being able to display the pending preview until the end, or displaying it overlapping with the performance that will be performed in the next game round (for example, the first type preview performance). suppressed. In addition, before the start of the next game round (before the start of the variable display), it is possible to secure a period in which production images other than the symbols are not displayed, and the boundary between the current game round and the next game round can be This makes it easier for players to understand.

Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 26), after executing the stop/start process in step S1407, a final display flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 in step S1408, and then the main variable display Control processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if the confirmed display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, the process advances to step S1409, and a second stop display command is received from the main controller 81. Determine whether or not. If the second stop display command has been received, a final display end process is executed in step S1410. In the final display termination process, the length of the second final display time (0.5 sec) is determined based on the second stop display command, and a second final display command including information regarding the length is sent to the display control device 212. Perform processing to output to. As a result, the MPU of the display control device 212 is configured to end the final display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP in the special display area OE after 0.5 seconds based on the received second final display command. , controls the symbol display device 41.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game when the suspension notice is executed will be explained with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. In this embodiment, the flow of the game differs depending on the common reservation number CRN when the confirmation display starts. In the following, a case where the common reservation number CRN is less than or equal to the set number AN of reservation notices and a case where the common reservation number CRN is larger than the set number AN will be explained separately. In the following explanation, it is assumed that all pending information other than the pending information corresponding to the jackpot or the occurrence of a reach correspond to a completely missed result (a missed result where the reach does not occur).

<When the common hold number CRN is less than the set number of hold notices AN>
Referring to the timing chart of FIG. 29, a case will be described in which the common reservation number CRN is less than or equal to the set number of reservation notices AN. Here, an example will be explained in which the common reservation number CRN and the set number of times AN are the same.

At timing t1, if it is not previously determined that the pending information corresponds to a jackpot or a reach occurrence, and the stop display timing in the variable display of the main display section 43 has arrived, the main controller 81 displays the first confirmed display time. is set to normal time (0.2 sec) (see FIG. 29(c)). As a result, the final display time (timings t1 to t2), which is the sum of the normal time as the first final display time and the second final display time, is 0.7 seconds. In this case, the pending preview effect is not executed during the final display time.

Thereafter, at timing t3, when a game ball enters the upper operating port 33a or the lower operating port 33b during the fluctuating display that started from timing t2 (see FIG. 29(a)), a new reservation is made for the winning. The information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 (see FIG. 8) (see FIG. 29(b)). Then, in the main control device 81, confirmation processing for a reservation notice (step S305 in FIG. 11) is executed for the reservation information. Here, it is assumed that the pending information corresponds to the occurrence of reach, and that this has been identified in the above confirmation process. In addition, in the following explanation, in order to distinguish the hold information in which the occurrence of reach is identified first from other hold information, the hold information will be referred to as special hold information. At timing t4, which is the timing at which the variable display started from timing t2 ends, that is, the start timing for fixed display, the main controller 81 executes a process for determining whether or not special hold information has been previously identified.

The set number of pending notices AN is 2, but in this case, the common pending number CRN when the confirmed display starts (when the first stop display time is set) is 2 ( (See FIG. 29(b)). In other words, under the premise that the hold notice should be executed over two game rounds, the game round for which the confirmed display time is set (the game round in progress) is the specific game corresponding to the previously specified hold information. Looking at the game, it is the previous game game. In such a case, the first confirmed display time is set so that the game session in progress is subject to execution of the pending notice. That is, the execution number counter DC is set to 2 (see FIG. 29(e)), and the waiting number counter WC is set to 0 (not shown). As a result, the first confirmed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) (see FIG. 29(c)). At this time, a special setting flag is stored in the RAM 204 (see FIG. 29(d)).

At timing t4, when the first fixed display time is set by the main control device 81, a first stop display command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82. As a result, the main display section 43 and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a manner corresponding to the miss, while the display color switching is completed on the display section KP. At timing t5 when a predetermined period (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the start of the confirmation display, a preview display performance (a display in which a bubble image appears) as a pending preview performance is displayed on the display screen 41a. This preview display performance is displayed within the remaining time (1.0 sec) of the first confirmed display time (see FIG. 29(f)).

When the first fixed display time elapses at timing t6, the second fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec by the main controller 81 (see FIG. 29(c)), and a second stop display command to that effect is issued. It is transmitted to the production control device 82. As a result, the confirmation display being executed on the main display section 43 and the like continues for 0.5 seconds. Note that when the first confirmed display time is set to the special time, the total confirmed display time is 2.0 sec, which is the sum of the special time and the second confirmed display time.

Then, when the second confirmation display time elapses at timing t7, the main control device 81 ends the confirmation display on the main display section 43, and the notification/performance control device 82 or the display control device 212 displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and The confirmation display on the display section KP is ended. Incidentally, counting (period measurement) of 0.5 sec, which is the second confirmed display time, is performed separately by the main control device 81 and the notification/effect control device 82 or display control device 212, which are the sub-side control devices. . That is, the sub-side control device independently measures the elapsed period after receiving the second stop display command (step S1107 in FIG. 21), and changes the time on the display screen 41a according to the elapse of 0.5 seconds. The final display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and display section KP is ended.

In addition, if you want to accurately synchronize the end timing of each final display on the main display section 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 41a, and the display section KP, it is necessary to synchronize the end timing of each final display on the main display section 43, the display screen 41a, and the display section KP when 0.5 sec has elapsed from the start of the final display time. , a configuration may be adopted in which the main controller 81 outputs a command to end the final display. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which each final display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP is ended in response to receiving the command.

On the other hand, counting (period measurement) of 1.5 seconds, which is the first confirmed display time, does not necessarily need to be performed independently by the sub-side control device, and even if the sub-side control device does not perform period measurement. good. On the display screen 41a, in addition to simply maintaining the display form of the display screen 41a even after the first fixed display time elapses, the sub-side control device also controls the second stop display from the main control device 81. This is because the progress of 1.5 seconds can be grasped by receiving the command. In this case, the first stop display command may include information indicating whether or not a suspended notice is to be executed, instead of the information regarding the length of the first confirmed display time.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 29, at timing t7 when the second confirmation display ends, the variable display of the next game round starts as the second confirmation display ends (see FIG. 29(c)). Then, when the variable display ends at timing t9, the first fixed display time for the next game is set. In this case, the game round is the immediately preceding game round when viewed from the specific game round. Therefore, at timing t9, the first confirmed display time is set to a special period (1.5 sec) so that the relevant game round is subject to execution of the suspension notice (see FIG. 29(c)). Specifically, based on the fact that the value of the execution number counter DC is 1, the first confirmed display time is set to the special time (see FIG. 29(e)). Then, as in the case of the two previous game rounds, at timing t10, a preview display effect is displayed on the display screen 41a (see FIG. 29(f)).

Here, in this case, apart from the special reservation information that occurred at timing t3, at timing t8 during the variable display of the previous game, the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 33a or the lower operating port 33b occurs. are doing. Then, as a result of executing the confirmation process for pending notice on the pending information corresponding to the winning, it is specified that the pending information corresponds to the occurrence of a jackpot or reach.

In this way, even if new special suspension information is specified after execution settings for a suspension notice have been made, in this embodiment, various settings that have already been made (execution count counter DC, etc.) are not affected. (See Figure 29(e)). This is because, when the special setting flag is stored in the RAM 204, the determination process (step S1203 in FIG. 22) regarding the result of the confirmation process for pending notice is restricted. As a result, duplication of settings is avoided, and as a result, the number of executions of the pending notice is suppressed from changing during the execution of the pending notice, and player confusion is suitably suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the above-described determination process is provided separately from the confirmation process for pending notices, and the restriction target is limited to the determination process, and the confirmation process for pending notices is not restricted. ing. This makes it possible to continue to perform the confirmation process for pending notices while avoiding duplicate settings. As a result, other effects that utilize the special hold information (for example, effects that change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the hold display area NE from the normal mode to a special mode different from the normal mode, etc.) are also inconveniently restricted. can be suppressed, and can be configured to be suitable for diversifying and compounding performances.

When the second fixed display time elapses at timing t11, each fixed display on the main display section 43 and the like ends, and variable display of the next game round (specific game round) is started. In a specific game round, after a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in a combination that does not result in a jackpot.

Then, at timing t12 when the confirmation display starts, the first confirmation display time is set to the normal time (0.2 sec) based on the fact that the value of the execution number counter DC is 0 (FIG. 29(c) )reference). For this reason, in the confirmation display in a specific game round, the first confirmation display time is not set as the time for pending notice. This prevents the inconvenience that the pending notice is continuously executed even though the variable display of a specific game round has ended, causing confusion among players. Furthermore, at timing t12, based on the fact that the value of the execution count counter DC is 0, the special setting flag stored in the RAM 204 is erased (see FIG. 29(d)), and restrictions are placed on the above determination process. is released.

<When the common reservation number CRN is larger than the set number AN>
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 30, a case will be described in which the common reservation number CRN is greater than the preset number of reservation notices AN. Note that in the following description, the description of the same parts as in the case of FIG. 29 will be omitted or simplified.

In the middle of the variable display that started at timing t21, a win to the upper operating port 33a or lower operating port 33b occurs at timings t22 and t23, respectively, and the pending information stored at the time of winning at timing t23 is If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, at the timing when the winning occurs, the confirmation process for reservation notice in the main control device 81 specifies that it is special reservation information. Note that since the common pending number CRN at timing t21 is 2 (the updated pending number), the variable display time of the variable display started at this timing is set to 8 seconds. Then, when the variable display time has elapsed at timing t24, the main control device 81 executes a process of determining whether or not special hold information has been previously identified.

Although the set number of pending notices AN is 2, in this case, the common pending number CRN when the confirmation display starts is 4 (see FIG. 30(b)). In other words, under the premise that the hold notice should be executed over two game rounds, the game round for which the confirmed display time is set (the game round in progress) is the specific game corresponding to the previously specified hold information. Looking at the game, it is the fourth previous game. In such a case, the first confirmed display time is set so that the game session in progress is not subject to the pending notice. That is, the waiting number counter WC is set to 2 (see FIG. 30(e)), and the process of setting the first confirmed display time as a special time is put on standby. At timing t24, the common reservation number CRN is 4, which is greater than or equal to the time saving setting number K (K=3), so the first confirmed display time is set to the time saving time (0 sec). Furthermore, at timing t24, the special setting flag is stored in the RAM 204, and the execution number counter DC is set to 2 (see FIGS. 30(d) and 30(f)).

If the first confirmation display time is 0 seconds, the second confirmation display is immediately performed. Since the second confirmation display time is 0.5 seconds, the total time for confirmation display is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 30(c)). When the second final display time is set in this manner, the main display section 43 and the symbol display device 41 are controlled so that the final display is performed at the set second final display time.

In addition, each specific time length of the special time (1.5 sec), normal time (0.2 sec), and time saving time (0 sec) related to the first confirmed display time, and the second confirmed display time (0.5 sec) are examples, and are not limited to these. That is, it is sufficient that the special time is longer than the normal time, and the time saving time is shorter than the normal time, and the length of each time is arbitrary. In this case, it is preferable that each of the above-mentioned times is configured such that the first fixed display time or the total fixed display time, which is the sum of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time, is shorter than the variable display time. If these times are longer than the variable display time, it is easy to give the impression that the game is delayed to the player during the game, but with the above configuration, this can be suitably suppressed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the first confirmed display time or the total time to be shorter than the variable display time of the game round corresponding to the normal out-of-reach result in which the reach does not occur. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the special time and the normal time are shorter than the variable display time (8 sec) during non-time saving, and the time saving time is shorter than the variable display time (4 sec) during time saving.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30, when the second confirmation display time elapses at timing t25, each confirmation display on the main display section 43 and the like ends, and the variable display of the next game round is started. Since the common reservation number CRN at timing t25 is 3 (see FIG. 30(b)), the variable display time in the relevant game round is set to 4 seconds, and the variable display time is shortened. At timing t26 when the variable display time has elapsed, the first fixed display time of the fixed display in that game round is set. In this case, the game time is three game times before the specific game time, and the common reservation number CRN at this time is 3, which is the same as the time saving setting number K. Therefore, it is excluded from the reservation notice and the time is shortened, and the first confirmed display time is set to 0 sec. As a result, the total time for confirmed display becomes 0.5 sec, which is the second confirmed display time (see FIG. 30(c)).

At timing t27 when the second confirmation display time has elapsed, the confirmation display on the main display section 43 and the like ends, and the variable display of the next game round is started. Then, when the variable display time elapses at timing t28, the first fixed display time for the fixed display in that game round is set. Since the game round in this case is two game rounds before the specific game round, the main control device 81 controls the game round to make the game round the target of execution of the pending notice. Specifically, the first confirmed display time is set to a special time (1.5 sec) based on the fact that the waiting number counter WC is updated to 0 at the previous timing t26 (FIG. 30 (c), (e)). Thereafter, as in the case of FIG. 29, a special time is also set for the first confirmed display time of the immediately preceding game session, and a pending notice is executed in each confirmed display of the two previous game sessions and the immediately preceding game session. .

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The configuration is such that the first confirmed display time for the confirmed display is set based on the result specified by the confirmation process for the pending notice. In this case, the length of time for confirmation display can be varied depending on the content of the pending information that has not yet been subject to determination. As a result, it becomes possible to correlate the judgment result of the validity judgment for the pending information that is subject to the confirmation process (previous identification) for the pending notice with the confirmed display time of the gaming session. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a player is specified during a game round, the final display time for that game round is set based on the result of the game round, so the contents of the pending information can be quickly updated to the game round. It can be reflected. For example, in a configuration in which if a player is specified while a game session is in progress, the result is reflected in the next game session, the specific game session for which the destination is specified is the next game after the game session in progress. If it is a game session in which the first confirmed display time is changed, it becomes difficult to secure an opportunity to change the first confirmed display time. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the first confirmed display time can be changed including the game session in progress, it is possible to stably secure change opportunities.

By the way, when executing a pending notice, instead of extending the fixed display time to secure the opportunity, consider shifting the execution timing of the pending notice to the start of the change in the next game round or during the change display. It will be done. However, at the start of the fluctuation or during the fluctuation display, it is assumed that another performance display, such as a first type preview performance or a second type preview performance, is being performed. For this reason, there is a risk that the effect displays may overlap, which may cause problems such as a decrease in the distinguishability of each effect or the need to adjust priorities such as which one to display on the front side. Not only that, but like the relationship between the first type preview performance and the suspended notice in this embodiment, one corresponds to the validity determination result of the game round, and the other corresponds to the validity determination result of the subsequent game round. In cases where the meanings of the effects are different, as in the case of matching, the player is likely to be confused if they are displayed together, and the effect of the effect may be significantly reduced. In this regard, in this embodiment, the confirmed display time is lengthened to ensure an opportunity to execute the pending notice, so duplication with other effect displays is suppressed, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. become.

Furthermore, the following effects can be expected in a configuration that secures an opportunity to execute a pending notice by lengthening the confirmation display time. In general, recent pachinko machines are configured to display symbols and patterns in a variable manner based on a predetermined variable display time, and once the variable display starts, the period cannot be changed. For this reason, for example, if there is a request to extend the playing time of a game session in the middle of a game session in order to allow for the sudden addition of game effects, if you try to respond by changing the variable display, The design of pachinko machines will have to be completely redesigned. Even if such a change were to be realized, while the variable display is in progress, it is normal for other game effects to be performed in line with the variable display time, in addition to the variable display of symbols and symbols, and in some cases, they may be In some cases, multiple game presentations are performed. For this reason, in case the variable display time is changed during a variable display, various effects adjustments should be made based on the length adjustment between the variable display time and the presentation time, the replacement of presentations, consistency between each presentation, etc. It is necessary to have a configuration that can be executed in the middle of the variable display, which is disadvantageous in that it causes a significant increase in the burden of production design. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, it becomes possible to change the gaming time related to one gaming session while keeping the variable display time as a predetermined period. Furthermore, since the original purpose of the confirmation display is to show the result of the validity judgment, there are many cases where no game performance is performed during the execution period, or even if it is performed, it is a simple one. For this reason, even if the fixed display time is changed, the burden of adjustment in performance is light, and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

The configuration is such that the first final display time is set in correspondence with the start timing of the final display. In this case, it is possible to reflect the destination specific result that occurs up to the start timing of the final display on the length of the stop display period. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with the destination identification that occurs at the end of the fluctuating display and winnings in the actuating ports 33a and 33b, making it possible to provide an optimal configuration when changing the playing time related to one gaming session midway through. .

During the final display, a preview display performance (a preview display performance in which a bubble image appears) is displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. Although the final display time of the game in progress can be changed depending on the result of specifying the previous game, according to this configuration, the addition or reduction of preview display performance according to the result of specifying the previous game can be done during the final display. becomes possible. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize the fixed display time as a period for adjusting the effect, compared to the case where additions or deletions are made in a fluctuating display where the effect display is likely to appear frequently on the display screen 41a. This makes it possible to easily adjust the performance.

The preview display effect performed during the final display is ended by the end of the final display. For example, if the preview display effect continues even after the confirmation display ends (after the game round ends), there is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to recognize the boundary between the game round and the subsequent game round. Furthermore, since the display overlaps with other effects displayed in the next game round, there is a risk that the distinguishability between the effects may be reduced or that the player's understanding of the effects may be hindered. According to this configuration, these inconveniences can be suitably suppressed, and the ease of play can be improved.

The length of the special time (1.5 sec) of the first fixed display time is the total time (2.0 sec) obtained by adding the second fixed display time (0.5 sec) to the special time. The length was set to be shorter than .0sec). If the fixed display time is unnecessarily extended, the waiting time from the end of one variable display to the start of the next variable display may give the impression of being long, which may cause a feeling of lag.However, in this configuration, the first fixed display time is Even when the display time is set as a special time on the longer side, the total time is configured to be shorter than the variable display time. As a result, the game can be played at a good tempo even when the fixed display time becomes long, and it is possible to ensure ease of play.

The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the previously specified result is a predetermined result, and the first confirmed display time is set based on the result. For example, if the configuration is such that each time the destination is specified, it is directly reflected in the setting of the first confirmed display time, if the destination is specified multiple times in one game, the first confirmed display time This may force the display time setting to be redone, leading to an increase in processing load. In this regard, in the present configuration, the process of specifying the first part and the process of determining the result thereof are performed separately, and the first confirmed display time is set based on the latter result. Therefore, by executing the determination process in accordance with the setting timing of the first confirmed display time, it is possible to set the first confirmed display time all at once, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In a case where it has been determined that the result of the earlier identification is a predetermined result, execution of the determination process for determining the result of the earlier identification is restricted. In a configuration in which a pending notice is given over a plurality of game sessions, the pending notice that was started from a previous game session may be subject to execution of a game session in progress. In such a case, if the first confirmed display time is set based on a specific result that occurred during the game, there is a risk that the settings will be changed or overlapped. In this regard, in this configuration, since the configuration is such that execution of the determination process for determining the first specified result is restricted, it is possible to suppress changes in settings and occurrence of duplication.

When hold information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence is specified first, what number of game times is the game time for which the first confirmed display time is set, counting back from the specific game time to which the above-mentioned hold information corresponds? Taking this into consideration, we adopted a configuration in which the first confirmed display time is set.

Due to the fact that a plurality of pieces of pending information can be stored, in a situation where a large number of pieces of pending information are stored, pending information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence may be identified first. In such a case, the specific game round will be executed with a large delay from the previously specified timing. In such a case, if the configuration is such that the previously specified result is immediately reflected in the first confirmed display time of the game session, the number of other game sessions that intervene up to the specific game session will increase, resulting in the first confirmed result being reflected in the first confirmed display time of the game session. It becomes difficult for the player to understand which game round the suspension notice given at the display time is a suggestive effect, which may cause confusion for the player. In addition, in a configuration in which the pending notice is repeated multiple times until just before a specific game, the number of times the pending notice is executed increases depending on the number of stored pending information, and it is possible that the player may misunderstand the intention of the performance. Ru. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, in addition to being able to adjust the number of intervening gaming sessions between the execution of the suspension notice and the execution of the specific gaming session, it is possible to This also suppresses the occurrence of inconveniences such as an increase in the number of times the pending notice is repeated. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform a function as a suggestive effect that suggests the content of a specific game round, and it is possible to improve interest.

When grasping the number of game times for which the first confirmed display time is set, counting back from the specific game time, the common reservation number CRN when the reservation information corresponding to the previous specification is stored. The structure was designed to be understood based on the following. For example, if another pending information that follows the previously identified pending information is stored (see Figure 23(b)), that subsequent pending information is also included in the calculation, and the number of games can be calculated appropriately. There is a possibility that it cannot be understood. According to this configuration, such inconveniences are suitably suppressed, and it becomes possible to appropriately grasp the number of games played.

Set the number of times to wait for the process to set the first confirmed display time to a special time (wait count counter WC), and if the number of waits is set, uniquely set the first confirmed display time to the normal time. The structure is as follows. According to the above configuration, once the number of times of waiting is set, the first final display time can be set by managing the number of times of waiting. Therefore, each time the first confirmed display time is set, the common pending number CRN and the number of pending notices are compared, and based on the comparison, it is determined which first confirmed display time should be set. This eliminates the need for processing, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

When the destination is specified, the actual number of executions (the number of executions DN) is set based on the grasped common reservation number CRN and the set number of reservation notices AN. Although the common reservation number CRN varies from case to case, in this configuration, the number of executions is set based on the magnitude relationship between the common reservation number CRN and the set number of times AN. For this reason, the first confirmed display time can be set as a special time within the range of the common reservation number CRN each time, and it becomes possible to appropriately give advance notice of reservation.

The configuration is such that the first confirmed display time is set based on the number of stored pieces of pending information. This makes it possible to correlate the number of stored pieces of pending information with the length of the confirmed display time. As a result, when a large number of pending information is stored, by shortening the confirmation display time, the start timing of the next game round can be brought forward, making it possible to promote efficient game progress. Moreover, in the present embodiment, when pending information is stored, the final display time of the game in progress can be set based on the number of stored pending information. Therefore, it is possible to promptly reflect a change in the number of stored hold information on the final display time. As a result, when the final display time is shortened, the responsiveness can be improved compared to a configuration in which the time is adjusted after waiting for the next game round. In particular, it becomes possible to shorten the fixed display time before the variable display time is shortened, and more efficient game progress can be promoted.

<Modification 1 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, the manner in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed when the reservation notice is executed is different from that of the first embodiment. The reservation notice according to this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

The reservation notice is made by using the stop result (combination of stopped symbols) in a game round before the start of the game round (specific game round) of the reservation information that is the object of the reservation notice. Specifically, without forming a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result on the active line as a stop result of a game round earlier than the game round related to the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice, and By displaying the same symbol in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the content of the reservation information that is the subject of the reservation notice is suggested.

For example, if the pending information that is the subject of the pending notice is any probability/variable jackpot result, as shown in Figure 31 (a), the pending information that is the subject of the pending notice will be played earlier than the previous game. In a game round, the same particular symbol is stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without stopping the combination of specific symbols on the active line, and the game round is ended. In addition, in the following explanation, this stopping mode is also referred to as the stopping mode of a pending notice.

This suspension notice is executed over a plurality of game times in the game times before the specific game time. That is, in the game round next to the game round shown in FIG. 31(a), as shown in FIG. 31(b), the game round is ended in a manner in which the reservation notice is stopped due to a specific symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(c), in the specific game round that is subject to the pending notice, the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line and the game round is ended, so that a probability-variable jackpot result will not occur. be made explicit.

Although explanations using diagrams are omitted, if the reservation information that is the subject of the reservation notice is a normal jackpot result, in a game session earlier than the specific game session that is the subject of the reservation notice, a non-specific symbol The game round is ended in the suspension mode of the notice of suspension. Thereafter, in a specific game round, the combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line to end the game round, and the occurrence of a normal jackpot result is clearly indicated. By doing so, the player can grasp which jackpot result will be obtained in a particular game round from the content of the pending notice (stop result).

This reservation notice is executed with a predetermined probability for reservation information that results in any jackpot result, and is also performed with a predetermined probability for reservation information that normally results in a loss. In this case, since the pending information that is subject to the pending notice is usually a negative result, when it comes to the specific game round that is subject to the pending notice, the combination of specific symbols (non-specific symbols) will be stopped on the active line. The game round is ended without causing the same specific symbol (non-specific symbol) to be stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Furthermore, in this modification, a re-variation effect is set for this pending notice. In the re-fluctuation performance, first, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped in a stopping manner different from the stopping manner of the pending notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(a), the same symbol (3 symbol) exists in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, but it does not exist in the middle symbol row Z2. It will stop and be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(b), each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner again, and thereafter, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stopping manner of the reservation notice. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the stop display mode of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is set so that the same specific symbol (symbol 7) exists in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. be done. In addition, the re-fluctuation performance in the pending notice can be displayed fluctuating in different directions for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82 in this modification will be explained.

<Fluctuating display control processing>
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a variable display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/effect control device 82 in this modification. Note that this process is performed in place of the variable display control process in FIG. 26 according to the first embodiment, and the process contents of the stop/start process in step S2007 are changed, and This differs from the fluctuating display control process of FIG. 26 in that the process for the stopped display in S2009 is added.

In the variable display control process, first in step S2001, it is determined whether a fixed display flag is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown) provided in the RAM 244. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not a game is in progress. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S2003, and it is determined whether or not a variation command from the main controller 81 has been received.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the present fluctuation display control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, a fluctuation start process is executed in step S2004, and then the present fluctuation display control process is ended.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process advances to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether the first stop display command from the main controller 81 has been received.

Here, in this modification, the structure of the first stop display command from the main controller 81 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration of the first stop table command of this modification will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 34.

In the first stop display command of this modification, the type of information included in the command differs depending on the length of the first confirmed display time. Specifically, when a special time (1.5 sec) is set as the first confirmed display time in the stop start processing (FIG. 22) by the main controller 81, at least the relevant time is set in the first stop display command. Information regarding the length of the first confirmed display time (information indicating that it is 1.5 seconds) is included.

On the other hand, if the normal time (0.2 sec) or time saving time (0 sec) is set as the first confirmed display time, the first stop display command includes information regarding the length of the first confirmed display time. In addition, it includes at least information regarding whether or not the suspended notice will be executed, and information regarding the start timing of the suspended notice.

Information regarding whether or not to execute a suspension notice is information indicating whether or not the suspension notice should be executed; however, if the information indicates that the suspension notice should be executed, it does not actually mean that the suspension notice will be executed immediately. This indicates that the game should be executed in one of the next and subsequent game rounds. That is, even if the main control device 81 decides to execute a pending notice, the recognized common pending number CRN is greater than the number of executions of the pending notice, and the process of setting the first confirmed display time to a special period is waited. In this case, the first confirmed display time is set to the normal time or the time-saving time, and information indicating that the pending notice should be executed is included in the first stop display command and output.

On the other hand, the information regarding the start timing of the pending notice is information indicating how many game rounds later the pending notice should be started, or in other words, information on the number of times of waiting. This information is set in the first stop display command together with the information to the effect that the pending notice should be executed.

Returning to the description of the fluctuating display control process (FIG. 33), if a negative determination is made in step S2005, the fluctuating process is executed in step S2006, and then the fluctuating display control process is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process advances to step S2007, and a stop/start process is executed to start confirmation display. Here, the stop/start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

<Processing for stopping and starting>
In the stop start process, first, in step S2101, the length of the first confirmed display time is determined based on the first stop display command from the main controller 81. In the subsequent step S2102, it is determined whether the first confirmed display time that has been grasped is 1.5 seconds, that is, a special time for a pending notice. If the first confirmed display time is a special time, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not a pending notice flag is stored in the RAM 244. The suspension notice flag indicates that information to the effect that a suspension notice should be executed has been received from the main control device 81.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if information indicating that the first confirmed display time is a special period for pending notices is received while information indicating that a pending notice should be executed has not been received. means that an instruction to execute the hold notice is received from the main controller 81 for the first time at the start timing of the stop display. In this case, in step S2104, a process for re-fluctuation is executed to re-fluctuation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Here, the revariation process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

In the re-variation process, first in step S2201, the result of specifying the destination for the pending information is determined based on the pending command from the main controller 81 (step S306 in FIG. 11). Specifically, it refers to the pending command received from the main control device 81 and determines whether the pending command corresponds to a jackpot, a reach occurrence, or a jackpot. If so, figure out whether it corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot.

In the following step S2202, as a result of the grasping process in step S2201, it is determined whether or not there is a pending command that corresponds to a probability-variable jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, then in step S2203, a process for determining the stop result of the advance notice symbol corresponding to the variable probability jackpot result is executed. In this process, a specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) is grasped as a symbol for advance notice as a symbol for advance notice corresponding to a probability-variable jackpot result. Thereafter, the manner in which the grasped advance notice symbols are arranged on the display screen 41a, that is, the stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, is determined based on the stop result table for pending advance notice.

Here, the suspension result table for pending notice will be explained with reference to FIG. 37. Note that FIG. 37(a) shows an example of a stop result table on the middle line L2 when the number attached to the symbol corresponding to the advance notice is "7". In this table, the sub-symbols placed between the main symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are conveniently indicated using numbers between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. Further, FIG. 37(b) shows a simplified view of the stop result of address information D(1) as a specific example of the stop result on the display screen 41a.

In the stop result table for pending notice, multiple stop results are set in which the same main symbol is stopped in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 depending on the symbol combination to be stopped on active lines L1 to L5, and each stop result is Information is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbols will not stop all together in any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the same main symbols will not stop in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 in any of the active lines L1 to L5. The setting is such that a reach line will not be formed due to For example, if address information D(1) is selected and the symbol corresponding to the notice (7) is to be stopped at the upper row of the middle line L2 and the middle and lower rows of the right line L3, "7" will be placed on the middle line L2 from above. A symbol combination is set in which the symbols are stopped in the order of the main symbol with "," the sub-symbol between "6" and "7," and the sub-symbol between "6" and "7."

The types of stop results for the suspension notice include all types (3 x 3 x 3 = 27) where the same main symbol is stopped on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the same main symbol is aligned on active lines L1 to L5. The number excludes the symbol combination (5) that corresponds to the jackpot result that stops at the end of the line, and the symbol combination (5 lines x 2 types) that is out of reach, and specifically, 27-5-10 = 12 There are different types.

Returning to the explanation of the re-variation process (FIG. 36), if a negative determination is made in step S2202, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not there is a pending command that corresponds to a normal jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step SS2204, then in step S2205, a process for determining the stop result of the advance notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed. In this process, after recognizing a non-specific symbol (main symbol with an even number) as a notice symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot result, each symbol row is determined based on the stop result table for pending notice. Determine the stopping results of Z1 to Z3.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2206, and a process for determining the stop result of the advance notice symbol corresponding to the out-of-reach result is executed. In this process, first, based on the received unreachable hold command, a reach line is formed when displaying the reach in the game round (specific game round) of the hold information that triggered the hold command. Identify the pattern. Then, if the symbol forming this reach line is a specific symbol, a notice symbol corresponding to a missed reach is determined as the specific symbol, and if the symbol forming the reach line is a non-specific symbol, a notice symbol corresponding to a missed reach is determined as the specific symbol. The design is determined as a non-specific design. Thereafter, the stop results for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are determined based on the above-mentioned stop result table for reservation notice.

After executing steps S2203, S2205, and S2206, in step S2207, the address information of the stop result determined in each of these processes is stored in a stop result address storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 244. Thereafter, in steps S2208 and S2209, a re-variation flag and a notice execution flag are set in the RAM 244, and the present re-variation process is ended. The re-variation flag is a flag indicating that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 should be varied again during the first confirmation display, and the notice execution flag is a flag indicating that the pending notice is being executed.

Returning to the description of the stop/start process (FIG. 35), after the re-variation process is executed in step S2104, a suspension notice flag is stored in the RAM 244 in step S2105. As described above, this suspension notice flag indicates that information to the effect that a suspension notice should be executed has been received from the main control device 81. Note that if the first confirmed display time is a special time, the first stop display command may not include information to the effect that a pending notice should be executed, but even in this case, the first confirmed display time is a special time. It is possible to grasp that the suspension notice should be executed based on the time.

In the following step S2106, a process for setting a hold notice installation effect is executed. When this setting process is executed, a preview display effect (see FIG. 18) in which a bubble image appears is set to be executed on the display screen 41a.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if the first confirmed display time grasped based on the first stop display command is the normal time (0.2 sec) or the time saving time (0 sec), step In S2107, it is determined whether the first stop display command from the main controller 81 includes information indicating that a pending notice should be executed (see FIG. 34). If the information is included, a pending notice flag is stored in the RAM 244 in step S2108.

After executing steps S2106 and S2108, or if a negative determination is made in step S2107, a final display start process is executed in step S2109, and then the main stop start process is ended. In step S2109, a process of outputting a first confirmed display command including information regarding the length of the first confirmed display time to the display control device 212 is executed. Based on the received first confirmed display command, the MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start displaying the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP in the special display area OE. do. In addition, if the process for re-variation in step S2104 is being executed, the re-variation will be executed after the final display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 based on step S2109.

Further, if the setting process for the pending preview effect in step S2106 is being executed, the first confirmation display command includes information indicating that the pending preview performance should be executed. In this case, the MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to execute the pending notice at the first confirmed display time.

Returning to the explanation of the variation display control process (FIG. 33), after executing the stop/start process in step S2007, a final display flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 in the subsequent step S2008, and then the main variation display flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. End display control processing.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if the confirmed display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, the process advances to step S2009, and the display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the first confirmed display is determined. Executes the process for stopping display to control the display. Here, the stopped display processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

<Processing during stopped display>
In the stop display process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether a re-variation flag is stored in the RAM 244. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not it is time to start re-variation. The start timing of this re-variation is predetermined, and is set to start the re-variation after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 sec) has elapsed from the start of the first confirmation display.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, a process of outputting a re-variation command to start re-variation to the display control device 212 is executed in step S2303. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start re-variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 based on receiving the re-variation command.

Here, the re-variation execution period is predetermined, and in this modification, is set to, for example, 0.8 seconds. Therefore, including the temporary stop period before the start of the first confirmed display, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a, and this state lasts for 0.2 seconds + α (α is the first confirmed display). After the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are maintained for a period of temporary stop (before the start of the temporary stop period), the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to fluctuate again, and 0.8 seconds later, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed again. . At this time, when restarting the display, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are controlled to be stopped and displayed at the same time.

After executing step S2303, the re-variation flag stored in the RAM 244 is erased in step S2304, and then the present stop display processing is ended. Further, if a negative determination is made in steps S2301 and S2302, the present stopped display processing is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display control process (FIG. 33), after executing the stop display process in step S2009, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the second stop display command has been received from the main controller 81. Determine whether If the second stop display command has been received, a final display end process is executed in step S2011. In the final display termination process, the length of the second final display time (0.5 sec) is determined based on the second stop display command, and a second final display command including information regarding the length is sent to the display control device 212. Perform output processing. As a result, the MPU of the display control device 212 is configured to end the final display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP in the special display area OE after 0.5 seconds based on the received second final display command. , controls the symbol display device 41.

<Stop result determination process for complete disconnection>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39, the stop result determination process for complete disconnection will be described. This process is executed at the time of starting the variation, and specifically, in step S1508 of the variation start process (FIG. 27).

In the stop result determination process for complete failure, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether a suspension notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. This suspension notice flag is stored in steps S2105 and S2108 of the stop/start process (FIG. 35). In other words, this modification is configured to uniformly receive an instruction from the main controller 81 to execute a pending notice at the start of the confirmation display.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not a notice execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. As already explained, this notice execution flag indicates that the pending notice is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not it is the start timing of the pending notice, more specifically, whether it is the start timing of the game round in which the pending notice starts to be executed. This determination process is performed based on information regarding the start timing of the pending notice included in the first stop display command from the main controller 81 (see FIG. 34). If it is the start timing of the game round in which the pending notice is to be executed, a notice execution flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 in the subsequent step S2404.

After execution of step S2404 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, a process for determining the stop result of the notice symbol is executed in step S2405. The stop result determination process is similar to steps S2201 to S2206 in the revariation process (FIG. 36). That is, based on the hold command from the main controller 81, it is determined whether or not the previously specified hold information corresponds to a jackpot result or a missed reach result, and if it corresponds to a jackpot result. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to a probability-variable jackpot, and the symbol for advance notice is grasped based on the determination result. Then, the stopping result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is determined so that the display mode of the grasped advance notice symbol on the display screen 41a becomes the stop mode of the pending notice.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in steps S2401 and S2403, a stop result determination process in step S2406 is executed. The stop result determination process of this step is to set the stop mode of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 so that it does not become a stop mode of a pending notice, and to a mode that indicates a missed result. Specifically, so that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result or a missed reach result is not formed on any active line, and the same symbol is not displayed in a stopped state in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The stopping result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is determined.

After executing steps S2405 and S2406, in step S2407, the address information of the stop result determined in each process is stored in the stop result address storage area provided in the RAM 244, and then the stop result for the complete disconnection is stored. End the determination process.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game when a pending notice is executed will be explained with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In this modification, as in the case of the first embodiment, the flow of the game differs depending on the common reservation number CRN when the confirmation display starts. In the following, a case where the common reservation number CRN is less than or equal to the set number AN of reservation notices and a case where the common reservation number CRN is larger than the set number AN will be explained separately. In the following explanation, it is assumed that all pending information other than the special pending information corresponds to a normal result (an unsuccessful result where reach does not occur).

<When the common hold number CRN is less than the set number of hold notices AN>
With reference to the timing chart of FIG. 40, a case will be described in which the common reservation number CRN is less than or equal to the preset number of reservation notices AN. Here, an example will be explained in which the common reservation number CRN and the set number of times AN are the same. Note that in the following description, the description of the same parts as in FIGS. 29 and 30 according to the first embodiment will be omitted or simplified.

When a variable display is started on the main display section 43 at timing t31, variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP on the display screen 41a is also started at the same time. Then, if a winning occurs in the upper operating port 33a or lower operating port 33b at timing t32, which is just before the end of the fluctuation display, and the pending information corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, at the timing when the winning occurs, , the confirmation process for reservation notice in the main control device 81 specifies that the information is special reservation information. Immediately after that, at timing t33, the variable display time has elapsed and when the final display start timing is reached, the main controller 81 executes a process of determining whether or not the special hold information has been previously specified.

While the set number of pending notices AN is 2, in this case, the common pending number CRN when the confirmation display starts is 2 (see FIG. 40(b)). In this case, the main controller 81 sets the first confirmed display time to a special period (1.5 sec) in order to immediately execute the pending notice. Then, a first stop display command to that effect is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82, and the picture on the main display section 43 is stopped and displayed.

Upon receiving the first stop display command, the notification/effect control device 82 recognizes that a pending notice should be executed, and sets a pending notice flag in the RAM 244 (see FIG. 40(d)). At this time, without receiving any prior instructions from the main controller 81, it is understood for the first time by the first stop display command that the pending notice should be executed, so the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again. It is determined that the pending notice should be executed immediately, and the re-change flag and the notice execution flag are set in the RAM 244 (see FIGS. 40(e) and 40(f)). At this time, the stop mode of the pending notice is set as the stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the re-fluctuation.

In this way, in this modification, the main control device 81 determines whether or not to execute the reservation notice, and the notification/performance control device 82 determines whether or not to execute the re-variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The structure is determined by This eliminates the need for the main controller 81 to make a judgment based on the presence or absence of re-fluctuation, making it possible to simplify the control program and reduce the processing load on the main controller 81 side. Note that the display control device 212 may decide whether or not to change again.

Further, at timing t33, a first confirmed display command is transmitted from the notification/performance control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP are stopped and displayed. The stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at this time will be a mode that does not take into account the execution of the pending notice, that is, a completely missed stop mode as usual that was set at the start of the fluctuation at timing t31 (see Fig. 40 (g2) ).

At timing t34 when a predetermined time (0.2 sec) has elapsed from timing t33, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 start changing again (see FIG. 40 (g3)). Further, with the start of re-variation, the re-variation flag stored in the RAM 244 is erased (see FIG. 40(e)). At this time, the main display section 43 and the display section KP of the display screen 41a are maintained in a stopped display state. Then, at timing t35 when the execution period (0.8 sec) has elapsed from the start of the re-fluctuation, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed again in the suspension mode of the pending notice (see FIG. 40 (g4)). The stop display mode at this time is the one that was set when the final display was opened at timing t33.

At timing t36 after the re-variation is completed, a preview display effect that causes a bubble image to appear is executed in the remaining time (0.5 sec) of the first confirmed display time (see FIG. 40 (g5)). After the end of the suspension notice, when the first confirmed display time elapses at timing t37, the second confirmed display time is set to 0.5 sec in the main controller 81 (see FIG. 40(c)), and the second confirmed display time to that effect is set. A stop display command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82. As a result, the confirmation display being executed on the main display section 43 and the like continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when the second confirmation display time elapses at timing t38, each confirmation display on the main display section 43 and the like ends.

Further, at timing t38, the variable display of the next game round starts as the fixed display ends (see FIG. 40(c)). At this time, the notification/performance control device 82 executes the above-mentioned stop result determination process for completely missing (FIG. 39), and since the pending notice flag and the notice execution flag are stored in the RAM 244, the symbol string The stop display modes Z1 to Z3 are set to be stop modes for pending notices (see steps S2401, S2402, and S2405 in FIG. 39).

Then, at timing t39 when the variable display ends, the first fixed display time for that game round is set. In this case, the game time is the previous game time as viewed from the specific game time, so at timing t39, the first confirmed display time is set to a special time (1.5 seconds) in order to make the game time the target of execution of the pending notice. (see FIG. 40(c)).

Further, at timing t39, the main display section 43 is definitively displayed by the main control device 81, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP are definitively displayed by the notification/performance control device 82 or the display control device 212. The stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at this time becomes the stop mode for pending notice that was set at the start of the fluctuation of the previous game round at timing t38 (see FIG. 40 (g7)). That is, in the confirmation display of the previous game round, the re-fluctuation performance of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not performed.

Thereafter, as in the case of FIG. 29 in the first embodiment, after the suspension notice that causes the bubble image to appear (see FIG. 40 (g8)), the specific game round that is the target of the suspension notice is executed. is executed (see FIG. 40(c)).

<When the common reservation number CRN is larger than the set number AN>
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 41, a case will be described in which the common reservation number CRN is larger than the set number of reservation notices AN. Note that in the following description, the description of the same parts as in the case of FIG. 40 will be omitted or simplified.

If a winning occurs in the upper operating port 33a or lower operating port 33b at timing t42, which is just before the end of the variable display that started at timing t41, and the pending information corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, then the winning is At the timing when the information is generated, the main control device 81 performs a confirmation process for notice of suspension to identify that it is special suspension information. Then, at timing t43, when the variable display time has elapsed, the main controller 81 executes a process of determining whether or not the special reservation information has been identified first.

Furthermore, at timing t43, the main controller 81 sets the first confirmed display time. In this case, the common pending number CRN when the final display starts is 3 (see FIG. 41(b)), and the game session (game session in progress) for which the final display time is set is This is the game game three games earlier than the specific game game corresponding to the previously specified pending information. Therefore, the first confirmed display time is set to a time saving time (0 sec) so that the game session in progress is not subject to the pending notice.

Furthermore, at timing t43, based on the above determination process and the setting result of the first confirmed display time, information that the first confirmed display time is to be used as a time saving time, information that a pending notice should be executed, information that the next game round The main control device 81 outputs a first stop display command that includes information indicating that the pending notice should be started from. As a result, the notification/performance control device 82 or the display control device 212 definitively displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP, and the notification/performance control device 82 sets a pending notice flag in the RAM 244 (FIG. 41(d) )reference). The stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at this time is the stop mode set at the start of the fluctuation at timing t41, and specifically, the stop mode is completely different from the stop mode of the pending notice.

When the second confirmation display time (0.5 sec) elapses at timing t44, each confirmation display on the main display section 43 and the like ends, and the variable display of the next game round is started. At this time, in the notification/performance control device 82, based on the fact that the suspension notice flag is stored in the RAM 244 and the fact that this game round is designated as the game round in which the suspension notice should start, the symbol row Z1 The stop display mode of ~Z3 is set to the stop mode of the pending notice. Further, in the notification/effect control device 82, a notice execution flag is set in the RAM 244 (see FIG. 41(e)).

Then, when the variable display time elapses at timing t45, the main controller 81 sets the first fixed display time. In this case, the game time is two game times before the specific game time, so the first confirmed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) for pending notice (Fig. 41(c) )reference). Then, the main controller 81 outputs a first stop display command that includes information indicating that the first confirmed display time is a special time. As a result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP are displayed definitively by the notification/performance control device 82 or the display control device 212. The stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at this time becomes the stop mode of the pending notice set at the start of the fluctuation at timing t44 (see FIG. 41 (f1)). In other words, if the notification/performance control device 82 or the display control device 212 knows that the pending notice should be executed at the time of starting the fluctuating display, the pending notice will be executed without re-fluctuation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. executed.

Thereafter, as in the case of FIG. 40, the first confirmed display time of the previous game round is set to a special time (1.5 sec), and the pending notice is executed using the first confirmed display time. (See FIGS. 41(c), (f4), and (f5)). After that, the specific game round that is the subject of the pending notice is executed (see FIG. 41(c)).

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

It is configured to give a reservation notice using the stopping results (combinations of stopped symbols) of symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Since the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the result of the validity determination, it is assumed that the player is watching with high interest. Therefore, with the above configuration, it becomes easier for the player to notice the pending notice, and it becomes possible to suitably increase expectations for the subsequent game round. Moreover, the stopping results of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be changed based on the result of specifying a destination performed during a game round, and the result of specifying the destination can be quickly reflected. Therefore, even if the game round to be specified earlier is the next game round after the game round in progress, it is possible to execute a pending notice based on symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and to execute the relevant effect. Opportunities can be expanded.

In addition, according to this modification, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are once stopped and displayed based on the setting result at the start of variation (step S1508 in FIG. 27), and then the stop result is changed. For this reason, even though the stop result is suddenly changed based on a specific result during a game round, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful. For example, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in low-speed fluctuations (see FIG. 25(c)) or when at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a stopped state, the player can identify the symbols on the display screen 41a. I am in a situation. If the configuration is such that the symbol change process is performed immediately when the target is identified in such a situation, it will be necessary to replace the symbols that are being displayed with slow fluctuations or the symbols that have been stopped and displayed, leading to a feeling of discomfort and distrust among the players. It's possible. In this regard, in this modification, after waiting for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be stopped and displayed according to the setting result at the start of variation, the stop result is changed by changing again. In this case, the fluctuation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 before changing the stop result is prevented from becoming unnatural, and the stop result can be changed in a natural flow.

However, since unscheduled re-fluctuations are added mid-way after the fluctuating display at the start of the game, the final stop display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is postponed, and securing time for this becomes a problem. . In this regard, in this modified example, the first confirmed display time is lengthened when a suspension notice is given, and this period is utilized to perform re-variation. This makes it possible to secure an appropriate amount of time for re-variation, and effectively suppresses inconveniences such as ending a game round in the middle of re-variation or not being able to secure a display period for stopped results after change. Ru. Moreover, the setting timing of the first fixed display time is set separately from the setting timing of the variable display time, and the first fixed display time is set in accordance with the start timing of the fixed display. This makes it possible to flexibly change the fixed display time for specifying the destination after the start of the variable display, and provides an optimal configuration for additionally performing re-variation midway through.

In addition, the following effects can be expected by adopting a configuration in which the stop result is changed after the stopped display symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again. For example, if the stop result is changed instantaneously, there is a risk of causing a sense of discomfort or distrust as described above, and there is also a possibility that the player will not notice the change. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the interposition of the re-variation display makes it easier to notice the change in the stop result, and the significance of the reservation notice due to the change in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be suitably ensured. Furthermore, it is possible to add the fun of guessing which stop result will be changed, which improves the level of interest.

After a predetermined time (0.2 sec) has elapsed from the start of the final display, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed again in a variable manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily confirm the stop result before displaying the re-variation. In addition, it becomes easier to recognize that the re-variation display has been made, and it becomes possible to promote the player's understanding of the performance. In addition, by providing a time period before the re-fluctuation display, it is possible to arouse expectations for the re-fluctuation, thereby making it possible to improve interest.

In addition, in the above modification, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stop mode of a pending notice, and a notice display effect is performed in which a bubble image appears, but it is also possible to perform a structure in which such a notice display effect is not performed good.

<Modification 2 of the first embodiment>
This modified example differs from the first embodiment in the manner in which the suspension notice is executed, and specifically, in that both the variable display time and the fixed display time are set based on the previous specified result. This is different from the first embodiment. The reservation notice according to this modification will be described below with reference to FIG. 42.

In the reservation notice according to this modification, as shown in FIG. The variable display time of the variable display on the display section 43, symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and display section KP is set to a special time (1.0 sec) for the pending notice, which is shorter than normal. Further, as for the final display time of the final display, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first final display time is set as a special time (1.5 seconds) for pending notice, so that the final display time is longer than usual. It is said to be a long 2.0 sec. Then, as shown in FIG. 42(c), when a reservation notice is given, the stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is the stop display mode of the reservation notice, as in the case of modification 1, and furthermore, During the display, a preview display effect that causes a bubble image to appear on the display screen 41a is displayed.

According to the above configuration, in order to shorten the variable display time and lengthen the fixed display time when executing the pending notice, the proportion of the fixed display in one game round is set higher than in the normal time when the pending notice is not executed. can be increased. As a result, it is possible to strengthen the presence of the confirmed display and increase the attention to the pending notice (the stop display result of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the notice display effect using bubble images) that is performed using the confirmed display time. become.

Further, in the above configuration, when executing a pending notice, the fixed display time is made longer than the variable display time. As shown in FIG. 42(a), the fixed display time is usually extremely short compared to the variable display time, but an extreme change is made to reverse the length relationship between the fixed display time and the variable display time. This can give a great sense of discomfort to the player. This makes it easier for the player to notice the pending notice, making it possible to suitably heighten expectations for the subsequent game round.

In addition, in a configuration in which the variable display time is made shorter than the fixed display time, the number and types of performance displays that can be executed during the variable display time are greatly limited compared to normal times. As a result, the performance display performed during the variable display becomes limited, and it becomes possible to enhance the pending notice performed during the fixed display accordingly.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the playing time (total time that is the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time) for one game when the suspension notice is executed is made shorter than when the suspension notice is not executed. ing. When a pending notice is executed, it is assumed that the player's interest will be more likely to be focused on the specific game round that is the subject of the pending notice. The period can be shortened. This makes it possible for the player to quickly play a specific game round, making it possible to create a configuration that meets the needs of the player.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this modification will be described.

In this modification, both the variable display time and the fixed display time are set based on the previously specified result, and there are at least two timings at which each of these times can be set. ing. Specifically, these are the start time of variation for setting the variable display time and the start time of fixed display for setting the fixed display time. In view of this, in this modification, the process for determining whether or not special hold information has been identified by the check process for hold notice (step S305 in FIG. It is also configured to execute. If it is determined that special hold information has been specified in any of the judgment processes, the settings for each hold notice regarding the variable display and fixed display (the number of times the special time is executed and the wait time until the special time is set) are changed. (setting of the number of times) is configured to be performed all at once. Hereinafter, specific control processing for realizing the above configuration will be described in detail.

<Processing at start of stop>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the stop start process executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. This process is executed in place of the stop start process shown in FIG.

In the stop start process of this modification, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether the stop side special setting flag F2 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The stop-side special setting flag F2 is set when the first confirmed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) for pending notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the variable side special setting flag F3 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The variable side special setting flag F3 is set when the variable display time should be set to a special time (1.0 sec).

If a negative determination is made in step S2502, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the stop side special setting flag F1 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The stop-side special setting flag F1 is set when the first confirmed display time should be set to a special time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, in step S2504, a confirmation process is performed to determine whether or not the subsequent reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 232 corresponds to a jackpot or a reach occurrence, that is, a confirmation process for reservation notice. It is determined whether special reservation information has been identified. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the process advances to step S2505, and a process of determining the number of execution times DN1 of the stop-side special period setting is executed. The number of executions DN1 indicates the number of times the first confirmed display time is set to the special time. Here, the process of determining the number of executions DN1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44(a).

<Processing to understand the number of executions DN1 of the stop side special period setting>
In the process of determining the number of executions DN1, first in step S2601, the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE is read out, and the common reservation number CRN is determined. In the following step S2602, the common reservation number CRN is compared with a set number of times AN (2 times) which is preset as the number of times the reservation notice is executed, and it is determined whether the common reservation number CRN is greater than or equal to the set number of times AN. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the set number of times AN is directly set as the number of executions DN1 in step S2603. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2602, the common reservation number CRN is set as the execution number DN1 in step S2604. After executing steps S2603 and S2604, the process of determining the number of executions DN1 ends.

Returning to the description of the stop start processing (FIG. 43), after step S2505 is executed, steps S2506 to S2508 are executed. These processes are similar to steps S1205 to S1209 of the stop start process in FIG. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, that is, if the lottery for whether or not a pending notice is possible is won, in step S2509, a setting process for a suspended notice on the stop side and a variable side is executed. This process is for setting each pending notice for variable display and fixed display. Here, the above-mentioned suspension notice setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44(b).

<Setting process for suspension notice on stop side and change side>
In the suspension notice setting process on the stop side and the fluctuation side, first, in step S2701, the execution count DN1 grasped in the execution count DN1 grasping process (FIG. 44(a)) is set in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The execution number counter DC1 is set in the execution number counter area. The execution number counter DC1 is a counter for counting the number of executions when the first confirmed display time is set to the special time.

In the following step S2702, a standby count counter WC1 is set in the standby count counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this step, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the execution number DN1 from the common reservation number CRN is set as the value of the waiting number counter WC1. The waiting number counter WC1 is a counter for counting the number of gaming times in which the game waits for the process of setting the first confirmed display time to the special time.

After executing step S2702, a setting process for variable display is performed in steps S2703 to S2707. In the setting process, first in step S2703, it is determined whether the subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common reservation number CRN is equal to or greater than the set number of times AN (2 times). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, the set number of times AN is directly set as the number of executions DN2 in step S2704. The number of executions DN2 indicates the number of times the variable display time is set to the special time. on the other hand. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the subtracted value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common reservation number CRN is set as the number of executions DN2 in step S2705.

After executing steps S2704 and S2705, in step S2706, the execution number DN2 set in steps S2704 and S2705 is set as an execution number counter DC2 in the execution number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The execution number counter DC2 is a counter for counting the number of executions when the variable display time is set to a special time.

In the subsequent step S2707, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the number of executions DN2 from the common pending number CRN-1 is set as the waiting number counter WC2 in the waiting number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and is set as the waiting number counter WC2. Finish the setting process. The waiting number counter WC2 is a counter for counting the number of gaming times in which the process of setting the variable display time to the special time is waited.

Here, in steps S2703 to S2707, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common reservation number CRN is used as the reference value when setting the number of executions and the number of waiting times. This is because, as shown in (a), it is assumed that new pending information corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot or reach is stored during the variable display.

That is, when new pending information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence is stored at timing t51, the first confirmed display time can be set to the special time at the start timing of the confirmed display 321 immediately after that. This starts from timing t52, but it becomes possible to set the variable display time to the special time from timing t53 when the next variable display 322 starts. In this case, since the common reservation number CRN at timing t53 is smaller by 1 than that at timing t52, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common reservation number CRN is used as the reference value.

For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 45(b), when the common reservation number CRN at timing t52 is 1 and the specific game round corresponding to the reservation information previously identified at timing t51 is executed from timing t53. The number of executions DN1 for the first fixed display time is set to one time, and the number of executions DN2 for the variable display time is set to zero.

For example, as shown in FIG. 45(c), the common reservation number CRN at timing t52 is 4, and at timing t54 after the specific game time corresponding to the reservation information previously identified at timing t51 has passed through the waiting period. When executed from 1 to 2, the number of times of waiting WC1 for the first fixed display time is set to three times, and the number of times of waiting WC2 for the variable display time is set to two times. In this case, the number of executions DN1 and DN2 are each set to two because both the common reservation number CRN and the common reservation number CRN-1 at timing t52 are larger than the set number of times AN(2). .

Returning to the description of the stop start processing (FIG. 43), after step S2509 is executed, the stop side special setting flag F1 is set in the various flag determination areas of the RAM 204 in step S2510. In the following step S2511, it is determined whether the value of the waiting number counter WC1 is 0 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2511, a stop side special setting flag F2 is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S2512.

In the subsequent step S2513, the first confirmed display time is set to 1.5 seconds as a special time, and then, in step S2514, the execution counter DC1 is updated by decrementing by one. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2511, the wait count counter WC1 is decremented by 1 in step S2515 and updated, and then the processes of steps S2516 to S2518 are executed. These steps S2516 to S2518 are similar to steps S1216 to S1218 of the stop start process in FIG. 22. After executing steps S2514, S2517, and S2518, in step S2519, the final display of the picture (first final display) is started on the actuating port display section of the main display section 43, and the main stop start process is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in steps S2502 and S2503, the process advances to step S2511, where it is determined whether the value of the waiting number counter WC1 is 0 or not. Execute the following processing.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the process advances to step S2520, and it is determined whether the value of the execution number counter DC1 is 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2520, the process advances to step S2513, and the first confirmed display time is set to 1.5 sec. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2520, the stop-side special setting flag F1 and the stop-side special setting flag F2 stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 are erased in step S2521. Thereafter, the processing from step S2516 onwards is executed.

<Variable display time setting process>
Next, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 46. This process is executed in place of the variable display time setting process in FIG. 17.

The process of setting the variable display time according to this modification has the following points: instead of the process of step S907 in FIG. 17, the process of setting the variable display time for complete failure in step S2807 is performed, and that This is the same as the variable display time setting process in FIG. 17, except that the variable display time setting process ends. The process of setting the variable display time for complete failure in step S2807 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

<Setting process of variable display time for complete disconnection>
In the process of setting the variable display time for complete failure according to this modification, first in step S2901, it is determined whether the variable side special setting flag F4 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The variable-side special setting flag F4 is set when the variable display time is set to the special time (1.0 sec) for pending notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, it is determined in step S2902 whether or not the stop side special setting flag F1 (see step S2510 in FIG. 43) is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If a negative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the variable side special setting flag F3 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The variable side special setting flag F3 is set when the variable display time should be set to a special time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2903, in step S2904, a confirmation process is performed to determine whether the subsequent reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 232 corresponds to a jackpot or a reach occurrence, that is, a confirmation process for reservation notice. It is determined whether special reservation information has been identified. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the process advances to step S2905, and a process is executed to determine the number of times DN2 of execution of the variable-side special period setting is executed. Here, the process of determining the number of executions DN2 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48(a).

<Processing to understand the number of executions DN2 of variable side special period setting>
In the process of determining the number of executions DN2, first in step S3001, the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE is read out, and the common reservation number CRN is determined. The common reservation number CRN in this case is determined by the process of updating the common reservation number CRN at the start of the variable display (see the data setting process in step S505 in FIG. 13 and the process in step S601 in FIG. 14) as shown in FIG. Since this is performed before the variable display time setting process is executed, this is the updated common pending number CRN.

In the following step S3002, the common reservation number CRN is compared with a set number of times AN (2 times) which is preset as the number of times the reservation notice is executed, and it is determined whether the common reservation number CRN is greater than or equal to the set number of times AN. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the set number of times AN is directly set as the number of executions DN2 in step S3003. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3002, the common reservation number CRN is set as the execution number DN1 in step S3004. After executing steps S3003 and S3004, the process of determining the number of executions DN2 ends.

Returning to the explanation of the process for setting the variable display time for complete failure (FIG. 47), after executing step S2905, processes from steps S2906 to S2908 are executed. These processes are similar to steps S1205 to S1209 of the stop start process in FIG. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2908, that is, if the lottery for whether or not a pending notice is possible is won, in step S2909, a setting process for the pending notice on the fluctuation side and the stoppage side is executed. This process is for setting each pending notice for variable display and fixed display. Here, the above-mentioned suspension notice setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48(b).

<Setting process for pending notice on the fluctuation side and stop side>
In the suspension notice setting process on the fluctuation side and the stop side, first, in step S3101, the execution count DN2 grasped in the execution count DN2 grasping process (FIG. 48(a)) is set in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The execution number counter DC2 is set in the execution number counter area. In the following step S3102, a standby count counter WC2 is set in the standby count counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this step, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the execution number DN2 from the common reservation number CRN is set as the value of the waiting number counter WC2.

After execution of step S3102, a setting process for the first confirmation display is performed in steps S3103 to S3107. In the setting process, first, in step S3103, it is determined whether the common reservation number CRN is equal to or greater than the set number of times AN (two times). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, the set number of times AN is set as the number of execution times DN1 (indicating the number of times the first confirmed display time is set as the special time) in step S3104. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3103, the common reservation number CRN is set as the execution number DN1 in step S3105.

After executing steps S3104 and S3105, in step S3106, the execution number DN1 set in steps S3104 and S3105 is set as an execution number counter DC1 in the execution number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In the subsequent step S3107, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the number of executions DN1 from the common pending number CRN is set as a waiting frequency counter WC2 in the waiting frequency counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the main pending notice setting process is performed. end.

Here, in steps S3103 to S3107 shown in FIG. 48(b), unlike the case of steps S2703 to S2707 in FIG. The reason why the values are the same in steps S2904 and S2905 in FIG. 47 is that, as shown in FIG. 49(a), new pending information corresponding to the jackpot or reach occurrence is stored during the final display This is because it is assumed that the

That is, when new pending information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence is stored at timing t61, the variable display time can be set to a special time at timing t62, which is the start timing of the variable display 323 immediately after that. Therefore, the first confirmed display time can be set to the special time from timing t63, which is the start timing of the confirmed display 324 immediately after the variable display 323. Since the variable display 323 and the fixed display 324 belong to the same game round, there is no difference in the common reservation number CRN at timings t62 and t63, so the same reference value is used.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the common reservation number CRN at timing t62 is 1, and at timing t61, the specific game round corresponding to the previously identified reservation information has passed through one game round. When executed from a later timing t64, the number of executions DN2 for the variable display time and the number of executions DN1 for the first fixed display time are both set to one.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49(c), the common reservation number CRN at timing t62 is 3, and at timing t65 after the specific game time corresponding to the reservation information previously identified at timing t61 has passed through the waiting period. When the process is executed from 1 to 2, the number of times of waiting WC2 for the variable display time and the number of waiting WC1 for the first fixed display time are both set to once. Note that in this case, the number of executions DN1 and DN2 are each set to two because the common reservation number CRN at timing t62 is larger than the set number of times AN(2).

Returning to the explanation of the process for setting the variable display time for complete deviation (FIG. 47), after executing step S2909, the variable side special setting flag F3 is set in the various flag determination areas of the RAM 204 in step S2910. In the following step S2911, it is determined whether the value of the waiting number counter WC2 is 0 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2911, a variable side special setting flag F4 is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S2912.

In the subsequent step S2913, the variable display time is set to 1.0 sec as a special period, and then, in step S2914, the execution counter DC2 is decremented by 1 and updated. Thereafter, the main variable display time setting process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2911, the waiting number counter WC2 is decremented by 1 in step S2915 and updated, and then the process proceeds to step S2916, where the normal game stored in the display time table storage area 223 is updated. The variable display time corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the state. In the subsequent step S2917, the variable display time acquired in step S2916 is set in the variable display time counter area, and then the process for setting the variable display time is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, that is, if the stop side special setting flag F1 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, before the main variable display time setting process is executed. This means that the decision to execute the suspension notice has already been made in the stop start processing (FIG. 43), and various settings for this purpose have also been executed. In this case, the process advances to step S2911 to determine whether the value of the waiting number counter WC2 is 0 or not, and depending on the determination result, the processing after step S2912 or the processing after step S2915 is executed.

In this way, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, by skipping the processing in steps S2904 to S2910, the decision to execute the pending notice by the stop start processing can be made prior to the main variable display time setting processing. If so, execution of the holding destination specification result determination process in step S2904 is restricted. As a result, even if new pending information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence occurs after a decision is made to execute a pending notice through the stop start process, the influence of the new pending information is suppressed.

This is the same in the stop start process shown in FIG. If so, the processing of steps S2504 to S2510 is skipped. Therefore, if it is determined to execute a hold notice through the variable display time setting process for complete failure (FIG. 47) prior to the stop start process, the hold destination specification result determination process in step S2504 Execution is restricted.

In this way, in this modification, the process performed in advance (execution of pending notice) between the stop start process shown in FIG. 43 and the variable display time setting process for complete failure shown in FIG. The configuration is such that priority is given to the decision to do so and various setting processes for pending notice based on the decision. Therefore, even though there are two judgment timings: when a fixed display is disclosed and when a variable display is started, inconveniences such as conflicting judgment results, duplication of settings, or changes during the process can be suitably suppressed. becomes possible.

Returning to the explanation of the process for setting the variable display time for complete deviation (FIG. 47), if an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, steps S2904 to S2910 are skipped and step Proceed to S2911.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, the process advances to step S2918, and it is determined whether the value of the execution number counter DC2 is 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2918, the process advances to step S2913, and the variable display time is set to 1.0 sec. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2918, the variable side special setting flag F3 and the variable side special setting flag F4 stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 are erased in step S2919. Thereafter, the process from step S2916 onwards is executed, and the main variable display time setting process ends.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In addition to the fixed display time, the variable display time is also set based on the previously specified results. In this case, it is possible to change the playing time for one game (the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the next variable display) by utilizing both the fixed display and the variable display. For example, in a configuration where the playing time for one game is changed only by the confirmation display, if the confirmation display time is made unnecessarily long, the player is likely to get the impression that it has been delayed, so the time difference in the playing time is limited. easy. In this regard, in this modification, the playing time for one game is changed by cooperation between the variable display and the fixed display, so the time difference between the case where the special reservation information is identified first and the case where it is not is increased. Can be done. This makes it possible to realize dynamic changes and make it easier to give a special impression.

At each of the start timing of the confirmed display and the start timing of the variable display, it is determined whether the pending information of jackpot or reach occurrence has been identified first, and the variable display time and the first confirmed display time are determined based on each determination result. The configuration is as follows. This makes it possible to suitably perform special settings for pending notices regarding the variable display time and fixed display time.

For example, in a configuration in which the above-mentioned determination process is performed only at the start timing of the confirmation display, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), the result of specifying the destination of the special reservation information is determined for the first time at timing t73 when the confirmation display 332 is started. As a result, the variable display time of the variable display 331 becomes the normal time, and from the subsequent final display 332 onwards, it is set to the special time for the pending notice.

On the other hand, in this modification, the above-mentioned determination process is also performed at the start timing of the variable display, so that the result of specifying the destination of the special reservation information can be determined at the timing t72 when the variable display 331 starts. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(c), a special time for hold notice can be set from the variable display time of the change display 331, and the hold notice can be started earlier than in the case of FIG. 50(b). becomes possible.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the above-mentioned determination process is performed only at the start timing of the variable display, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 51(b), the result of specifying the special hold information is determined for the first time at timing t83, which is the start timing of the variable display 334. As a result, the final display time of the final display 333 becomes the normal time, and the subsequent variable display 334 is set to the special time for the pending notice.

On the other hand, in this modification, the above-mentioned determination process is also performed at the start timing of the confirmation display, so that the result of specifying the special pending information can be determined at the timing t82 when the confirmation display 333 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51(c), the special time for the pending notice can be set from the confirmed display time of the confirmed display 333, and the pending notice can be started earlier than in the case of FIG. 51(b). becomes possible.

In other words, according to this modification, the special settings for the suspension notice can be set regardless of whether the special suspension information is specified first during the fixed display or when the special suspension information is first specified during the variable display. It is possible to start early, and it is possible to expand production opportunities.

On the other hand, in a configuration where determination processing is performed at two timings, if the first determination is performed after one determination is performed and the other is performed, the determination results will conflict and the period settings will overlap. This may lead to changes in the process. In this regard, the present modification is configured to give priority to the determination result of the determination process that first determines that the special reservation information has been identified. This makes it possible to standardize the determination results, and to suitably suppress overlapping period settings and mid-way changes.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modification, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stop mode of a pending notice, and a notice display effect is performed in which a bubble image appears. Good too.

<Modification 3 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, the information form of the variation command sent from the main controller 81 is devised, and specifically, the variation command includes information regarding the first confirmed display time, which is different from the first one. This is different from the embodiment. The variation command according to this modification will be described below with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram for explaining the information form of the variation command. In this modification, the first fixed display time is set at the start of the variable display, and the first fixed display time that can be set is the normal time (0.2 sec) and the special time (1.5 sec). It is assumed that there are two types.

As already explained, the variation command is a command that corresponds to the manner in which the symbols on the main display section 43 and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 are displayed in a variable manner. This is sent from the main control device 81 to the notification/effect control device 82 when the change is started (see the variation start process etc. in FIG. 15). This variation command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and for example, as shown in FIG. The second information area 342 is configured as 2-byte information.

The first information area 341 includes information regarding the presence or absence of a jackpot. For example, as data values that can be set in the first information area 341, multiple types of 1-byte data such as "C0H", "C1H", etc. starting from "C" in hexadecimal notation are prepared. These data values (command data) are stored in the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203. In this modification, when the data value of the first information area 341 is "C0H", it indicates a jackpot result, and when it is "C1H", it indicates a miss result. Therefore, by referring to the data value of the first information area 341 of the variation command, the notification/performance control device 82 can grasp the result of the lottery of the game round corresponding to the received variation command. .

In addition, each data value in the first information area 341 is set so that the value (array pattern of 0 and 1) does not match with other commands such as the payout command, and is a unique value used only in the fluctuation command. ing. That is, the data value in the first information area 341 also functions as information indicating that the command itself is a variation command. Therefore, the notification/effect control device 82 can understand that the received command is a variation command by referring to the data value of the first information area 341 of the variation command.

The second information area 342 includes information regarding the varying display time of the picture on the main display section 43. The information regarding the variable display time is composed of 7-bit data consisting of a bit string from the second bit LB2 to the most significant bit LB8, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(b). Since the value of the most significant bit LB8 is fixed to 0, the 7-bit data value can take on a maximum of 63 different values. These data values are also stored in the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203.

Here, the information regarding the variable display time is constructed not in the second information area 342 alone but in combination with the first information area 341. For example, even if the 7-bit data value in the second information area 342 is the same "0000001" (binary notation), if the data value in the first information area 341 is "C0H", the variable display time will be If the data value of the first information area 341 is "C01H", the variable display time is 8 seconds (when no reach occurs). (variable display time when completely off results are stopped and displayed). In other words, the second information area 342 is configured to share a data value when the data value of the first information area 341 is "C0H" and when it is "C01H". With this configuration, the number of types of data values used in the second information area 342 is reduced, and the usage amount of the ROM 203 is saved. The notification/performance control device 82 grasps the time of the variable display based on each data value of the first information area 341 and the second information area 342 of the variation command, and changes the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 based on the grasped result. Configure fluctuation modes, display effects, etc.

Incidentally, the value of the most significant bit HB8 in the data value of the first information area 341 is set to 1, and the value of the most significant bit LB8 of the data value of the second information area 342 is set to 0. With such a configuration, when the notification/production control device 82 receives a command, it is possible to check whether the received data corresponds to the first information area 341 (upper byte or preceding command) or not. It is possible to identify whether it corresponds to the information area 342 (lower byte or subsequent command). Such identification does not necessarily need to be configured using the most significant bit, but may be any configuration that uses a predetermined specific bit.

In this modification, the least significant bit LB1 of the second information area 342 is assigned to information regarding the first confirmed display time. For example, if the value of the least significant bit LB1 is 0, it indicates that the first confirmed display time is the normal time (0.2 sec), and if the value of the least significant bit LB1 is 1, it indicates that the first confirmed display time is the normal time (0.2 sec). This indicates that is a special time (1.5 sec).

In this way, by including information indicating the length of the first fixed display time in the variation command, the first stop display command can be omitted. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands and save the amount of ROM 203 used. In addition, since the variation command is also used as a notification command for the first confirmed display time, it is possible to reduce the number of times commands are exchanged between the main control device 81 and the notification/effect control device 82, and both control devices It becomes possible to reduce the loads on both 81 and 82.

Further, in this modification, information regarding the first confirmed display time is included in the second information area 342. In a configuration in which information regarding the first confirmed display time is included in the first information area 341, if a situation occurs where the data value of the first information area 341 matches another command depending on the data value of the first confirmed display time, for example, , malfunctions may occur, such as an abnormality notification being issued even though no abnormality has actually occurred. For this reason, it becomes necessary to adjust the data value settings between all commands so that no matter what the data value of the first confirmed display time is, there will be no misjudgment of the command type, which increases the burden on gaming machine design. This may lead to In order to avoid this, it is conceivable to reduce the information indicating the command type to 7 bits for all commands, but in this case, the remaining 1 bit in commands other than the fluctuation command may become a surplus bit. In this regard, according to the present modification, since the second information area 342 is configured to include information regarding the first confirmed display time, it is possible to easily harmonize with other commands while suppressing the generation of surplus bits. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Furthermore, in this modification, since the least significant bit LB1 is assigned to the information regarding the first confirmed display time, it is possible to include the information regarding the first confirmed display time while keeping the information related to the variable display time in a lumped state. Thereby, when the notification/production control device 82 receives the command for variation, it becomes possible to easily take out the information regarding the variable display time and the information regarding the first confirmed display time.

Note that, for example, the information regarding the first determined display time may be included in a form in which the information regarding the variable display time is divided, such as by allocating the information regarding the first determined display time to bit LB4 of the second information area 342. In this case, if the output command from the main control device 81 is read for fraudulent purposes, it can be made difficult to determine the information content, which can contribute to suppressing fraudulent acts.

Note that the data value of the variation command in the above configuration is only an example, and for example, the data value of the first information area 341 may be "80H" or the like. Further, the number of bytes and number of bits of the variation command can be changed arbitrarily. For example, the variation command may have a 1-byte data structure, or may have a 3-byte or more data structure. Further, the number of bits in the second information area 342 is not limited to 8 bits (1 byte), and may be, for example, 7 bits or less, or 9 bits or more. Furthermore, the number of bits allocated to the information regarding the first confirmed display time in the second information area 342 is not limited to 1 bit, but may be 2 bits or more depending on the number of types of the first confirmed display time. In this case, a predetermined bit area including the least significant bit LB1 can be assigned to information regarding the first confirmed display time.

<Second embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the fixed display time of the symbols that are variably displayed on the accessory display section 44 is set as a special time. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to distinguish between the pattern displayed on the main display section 43 and the pattern displayed on the accessory display section 44, the former is called a special pattern or a special pattern, and the latter is called a normal pattern. Or called Fuzu. Further, the special symbol game time played on the main display section 43 is called a special symbol game time, and the normal symbol game time played on the accessory display section 44 is called a regular symbol game time.

In this embodiment, a plurality of opening patterns are set as opening patterns for the electric accessory 34. When a winning result is obtained in the lottery of common figures, one of the plurality of opening patterns is selected based on the opening type counter C5, and the electric accessory 34 is switched and controlled so as to be opened and closed according to the selected opening pattern. will be held.

Here, the release type counter C5 will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery. Note that the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The open type counter C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter C5 is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 as appropriate. In the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the open type counter C5 is stored in the electric prize holding area 350 when a winning is made to the through gate 35. It should be noted that an electric accessory release counter C4 is also stored in the electric accessory holding area 350.

The electric role holding area 350 includes an electric role holding area Rc and a second execution area AE2 for ordinary figures. The reservation area Rc includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 according to the winning history in the through gate 35. Each numerical value information of the electric accessory opening counter C4 and the opening type counter C5 is stored in one of the areas as pending information.

In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, if winnings to the through gate 35 occur multiple times in succession, the first area Rc1 → second area Rc2 → third area Rc3 → fourth area Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Rc4. By providing each of the four areas in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the through gate 35 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four.

The second execution area AE2 for ordinary figures is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the reservation area Rc when starting the variable display of the accessory display section 44, At the start of the normal figure game round, an open determination and the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

The value of the random number that results in a support state winning in the general lottery is stored as a standard winning/failure table in the winning/failure table storage area 221 as a winning/failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. In the general drawing lottery, the probability of being in the support state (probability of winning the support state) is the same regardless of the level of support mode, and the common table is used for the winning/failing table for general drawings stored in the ROM 203. are doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), in the common figure propriety table, if the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 99, the electric accessory 34 is shifted to the support state to be controlled in the open state. , C4 is set to 100 to 199, the electric accessory 34 is set not to be controlled to be in the open state and not to shift to the support state.

Here, the mode of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34 in the support state is such that the frequency of winnings to the electric accessory 34 from the start to the end of the support state is relatively high or low. A high prize support state and a low prize support state are set. Further, two types of high winning support states are set: a first high winning winning support state and a second high winning winning support state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), in the first high winning support state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the support state. The first opening is performed until 3 seconds have elapsed, and the second opening is performed until 2 seconds have elapsed. On the other hand, in the second high prize support state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the support state. The first opening is performed until 2 seconds have elapsed, and the second opening is performed until 1 sec has elapsed. In addition, in both the first high prize support state and the second high prize support state, if the number of prizes entered into the lower operation port 33b from the start of the support state reaches 10, the support state will stop at that point. finish. In addition, in each support state, the opening period until the start of the first opening, the closing period (waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening, and the ending period after the second opening are all It is set to 0.2 sec.

In the low winning support state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed once from the start to the end of the support state, and it is not opened until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings entered into the lower operating port 33b is 3. It will continue until .

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 53 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds. . On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 34 once is 0.2 seconds as described above. That is, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 34 is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the support state corresponding to the low winning support state, winning of game balls does not substantially occur.

In addition, in the high winning support state and the low winning support state, the number of times the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the winning limit number to the lower operating port 33b are as follows: the high winning support state is higher than the low winning support state. The value is not limited to the above value and may be any value as long as the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the lower operation port 33b from the start to the end of the support state is higher than that of the support state. Specifically, in the high winning support state, the number of openings and closings is greater than in the low winning support state, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the winning limit number of winnings to the lower operation port 33b is set to be larger. Bye.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high winning support state and the low winning support state, in the support state related to the low winning support state, it is necessary to adopt a configuration in which winnings to the lower operating port 33b do not substantially occur. It is good to say. For example, in the high winning support state, for one opening, the product of the game ball firing cycle and the maximum number of openings is set to be shorter than the opening limit time, while in the low winning support state, for one opening, The product of the game ball firing cycle and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. In addition, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of the electric accessory 34 are not as described above, in the low winning support state, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which winnings to the lower operating port 33b do not substantially occur.

The open type counter C5 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The open type counter C5 is updated regularly and is stored in the power reserve area 350 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. The distribution destinations of game results for the open type counter C5 are stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 222 in the ROM 203. Here, the distribution table for ordinary figures is the distribution table for ordinary figures in the low-frequency support mode shown in FIG. 54(c), and the distribution table for ordinary figures in the high-frequency support mode in FIG. 54(d). is set.

As shown in FIG. 54(c), in the distribution table for regular figures in the low-frequency support mode, opening results A and opening results B are set as distribution destinations for winning ordinary figures. The opening result A is an allocation result that results in a low winning support state, and the opening result B is an allocation result that results in a first high winning support state. In the distribution table for regular figures in the low-frequency support mode, the release type counter C5 = 0 to 89 corresponds to release result A, and C5 = 90 to 99 corresponds to release result B. As shown in (d), in the distribution table for ordinary figures in the high-frequency support mode, opening results C and opening results D are set as the distribution destinations for winning ordinary figures. The release result C is a distribution result that results in a second high prize winning support state, and the release result D is a distribution result that results in a first high prize winning support state. In the general figure distribution table in the high-frequency support mode, the release type counter C5=0 to 94 corresponds to the release result C, and C5=95 to 99 corresponds to the release result D.

By the way, in the low-frequency support mode, in order to keep the frequency that the result of the lottery of common symbols becomes a winning result (open result) to a low level, the fluctuating display time of common symbols is lengthened to lengthen the playing time for one game. However, in some cases, measures have been taken to reduce the number of times the normal drawing lottery is executed per unit time. Although the regular game game time and the special game game time are played simultaneously, they are asynchronous, and the variable display times of the regular game game time and the special game game time are independent of each other. It is set. For this reason, even if the special figure game round ends, a situation may occur where the regular figure game round is still continuing.

Under this premise, for example, if a player wants to round up the game due to the end of a special game round, but if the regular game round continues, the result of the lottery on the regular game side will change. Inconveniences may occur, such as the player being unable to finish the game due to this concern, or the player finishing the game without leaving the opportunity to transition to the support state. Particularly, as in the present embodiment, when the opening pattern of the electric accessory 34 includes the first high winning support state in which a game ball can be expected to enter the lower operation opening 33b, it is even more difficult to finish the game. Problems tend to occur, such as making it difficult to play or feeling a greater sense of loss if you miss. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned problem is solved by utilizing the confirmation display of the regular game game. The configuration of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67.

(a) of FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and fixed display time of the regular game game when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the regular display time of the regular game game when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. It is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and fixed display time of times.

As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the length of the fixed display time of the regular game game is different depending on whether the support mode is the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. The confirmation display time in low frequency support mode is longer than that in high frequency support mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the confirmed display time in the high-frequency support mode is such that if the result of the lottery is a winning result, the result of the lottery is a winning result, and the When the release type of the accessory 34 is release result C (second high prize support state), the result of the winning lottery is the winning result, and the release type of the electric accessory 34 is release result D (first high prize support state) ) is uniformly 0.5 sec.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the confirmed display time in the low-frequency support mode is such that if the result of the lottery is a winning result, the result of the lottery is a winning result, and the electric accessory 34 When the release type is release result A (low winning support state), the time is 16.0 seconds in both cases. In addition, if the result of the lottery is a winning result and the release type of the electric accessory 34 is release result B (first high prize support state), the settable confirmation display time is 4.0 sec, 10.0 sec. There are three types, 16.0 sec and 16.0 sec, and one selected from them is set.

The variable display time of the regular game game in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode is a common 4.0 sec, regardless of the result of the regular lottery or the opening type of the electric accessory 34. Therefore, the total playing time for one game, which is the variable display time and fixed display time, is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode.

Note that the variable time does not necessarily have to be the common time; if the playing time for one game in the low-frequency support mode is longer than that in the high-frequency support mode, The length may be varied, or the length may be varied depending on the result of the normal drawing lottery or the type of release of the electric accessory 34. The same applies to the confirmed display time, and if the confirmed display time in low-frequency support mode is longer than that of high-frequency support, the confirmed display time will be It is also possible to have different lengths. Moreover, the various specific time lengths mentioned above are just examples, and are not limited to the respective numerical values described above.

Here, in this embodiment, the result of the winning/failure drawing of common symbols and the opening type of the electric accessory 34 are notified on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the state of the display screen 41a during the regular game game.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), in the display screen 41a, a general figure display area PE is set above the variable display area ME. A plurality of (two) display sections PP1 and PP2 are provided in the general figure display area PE, and variable display is possible by switching the display colors in the display sections PP1 and PP2. The ordinary figure display area PE is smaller than the variable display area in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the display parts PP1 and PP2 in the ordinary figure display area PE are smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

The ordinary figure display area PE corresponds to the accessory display section 44, and when a variable display is performed in the accessory display section 44, a variable display is also performed in the ordinary figure display area PE. Specifically, the variable display on the display sections PP1 and PP2 is performed so that the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display section 44 matches the variable display start timing and the variable display time. Furthermore, regarding the stop display of the display parts PP1 and PP2 (the state in which the display color is fixed without switching the display color), the stop display of the pattern on the accessory display part 44, the stop display start timing, and the stop display This is done to match the times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 56(b1), the regular game game is started in a situation where the display colors of the two display parts PP1 and PP2 are the same or approximately the same first display color (for example, white). Then, as shown in FIG. 56(b2), the display color of one display section PP2 is switched to a second display color (for example, blue) that is different from the previous color (in the figure, the display color of the display section is (Differences are shown differently depending on the hatch). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(b3), the color of the display part PP2 on the side switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display part PP1 is changed to the first display color. The display color is switched to the second display color, and as shown in FIG. 56(b4), the colors of the respective display sections are switched again.

The fluctuating display of the normal game game is basically the repetition of switching the display color of these two display sections (Figure 56 (b2) → Figure 56 (b3) → Figure 56 (b4) → Figure 56 (b2)) repeated). This display color switching is set to complete one rotation every approximately 0.5 seconds, making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the display before and after the switch.

When the variable display time of the normal figure game time has elapsed, the game result of the normal figure game cycle is notified of whether it is an open result or a missed result that shifts to a support state. In the case of an open result, the display parts PP1 and PP2 display the same color and the variable display ends. At this time, if the release type of the electric accessory 34 is in the low winning support state, the display parts PP1 and PP2 both become the second display color and the variable display ends, as shown in FIG. 56 (b5). , when the release type of the electric accessory 34 is the first high prize support state, as shown in FIG. The display color becomes red (for example, red) and the variable display ends. In addition, when the release type of the electric accessory 34 is in the second high prize support state, the display parts PP1 and PP2 both display a fourth display color (for example, yellow) that is different from the first to third display colors. The variable display ends. On the other hand, in the case of a negative result, as shown in FIG. 56(b1), both of the two display sections become the first display color and the variable display ends.

Note that the display mode of the display section in the ordinary figure display area PE is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be one in which the number of display sections is one, or one in which numbers or symbols are used. That is, the configuration is arbitrary as long as it is possible to identify the opening type of the electric accessory 34 in addition to identifying the opening result and the miss result.

With the above configuration, in this embodiment, by making the confirmation display time of the regular pattern game round during the low-frequency support mode longer than before, it is possible that the regular game round is not completed at the end of the special pattern game round. Even if it is, the probability that the normal symbol is in the stopped display state can be increased. When the normal symbol is in a stopped display state, the probability of this is increased because the result of the common symbol lottery and the opening type of the electric accessory 34 can be immediately grasped by visually checking the common symbol display area PE on the display screen 41a. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of waiting for the result of the common figure, and it becomes easier to quickly notify the result of the drawing lottery and the type of opening of the electric accessory 34.

Further, while securing the playing time of the regular figure game suitable for the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to shorten the variable display time by increasing the fixed display time. By shortening the variable display time, it is possible to shorten the waiting time until the game is stopped and displayed even if the regular figure game is being displayed in a variable manner at the end of the special figure game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the playing time (total time of variable display time and fixed display time) for one game when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode is longer than that when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. It's getting longer. As a result, even if the variable display time is shortened in the case of low-frequency support mode, the number of executions of the winning/failure lottery per unit time can be kept low, and the functionality of low-frequency support mode is maintained. becomes possible.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to quickly notify the result of the lottery of success or failure of common symbols while suppressing the impairment of the function of the low-frequency support mode. This allows the player to quickly end the game after the special figure game round ends, improving the ease of play.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 55, although the fixed display time in the high-frequency support mode is short, it is difficult to imagine that the player will end the game during the high-frequency support mode. There is no practical problem, or even if it occurs, it is considered to be minor. Rather, the short fixed display time contributes to shortening the playing time for one game, which is preferable in ensuring the functionality of the high-frequency support mode.

Incidentally, the fixed display time of the special figure game round in the low frequency support mode is, for example, 0.7 sec, which is shorter than the fixed display time of the regular figure game round in the low frequency support mode. As a result, the feeling of prolongation during the special figure game round is suppressed, and smooth game progress is promoted. It should be noted that, as long as the fixed display time is within a shorter range than the fixed display time of the general figure game round, the fixed display time may be diversified as in the first embodiment.

By the way, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration in which the confirmation display time is long, the opening control of the electric accessory 34 is performed after the player grasps the result of the winning/falsifying lottery and the opening type of the electric accessory 34. The grace period will tend to be longer. As a result, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34 will be controlled to open when there is no intention to end the game, there is a concern that it may lead to so-called stop-hitting, in which the game ball is fired at the right time to release the electric accessory 34. Ru.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55(a), in the low-frequency support mode, the result of the winning lottery is the opening result, and if the opening type of the electric accessory 34 is in the first high prize support state, the winning lottery result is the winning result. It is configured to diversify the fixed display time in a game round. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the release timing of the electric accessory 34, and it becomes possible to suppress a stop hit.

As already explained, there are three specific fixed display times: 4.0 sec, 10.0 sec, and 16.0 sec. Of these, the shortest 4.0 sec is set to be longer than at least the required period (for example, 1.0 sec) from when the game ball is launched until it reaches the electric accessory 34 (lower operating port 33b). ing. By doing this, even if you are informed that the electric accessory 34 will be released in the first winning support state while waiting for the result of the general game game round on the premise that the game is over, you can immediately start the game. If the ball is hit, it will arrive in time for the first release, allowing the player to properly enjoy profits.

The selection of the confirmed display time is performed using the distribution table for the regular figure confirmed display time stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 203. Here, with reference to FIG. 57, the distribution table for the normal figure fixed display time will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the allocation table for the regular figure fixed display time, the destinations to which the fixed display time is allocated are defined in accordance with the value of the open type counter C5. As the final display time allocation destinations, final display time A (4.0 sec), final display time B (10.0 ssec), and final display time C (16.0 sec) are set. In the distribution table for the fixed display time of ordinary drawings, the open type counter C5=90 to 93 corresponds to the fixed display time A, C5=94 to 96 corresponds to the fixed display time B, and C5=97 to 99 corresponds to the fixed display time. It corresponds to display time C. In addition, as a random value for allocating the confirmed display time, the release type counter C5 for allocating the release type of the electric accessory 34 is also used, but a dedicated counter (random value) is used separately from the release type counter C5. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which

Next, each control process executed by MPU 202 of main control device 81 in this embodiment will be explained.

<Processing for electric support>
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the power support process in this embodiment. Note that this process is performed in step S405 of the normal process in FIG. 12 according to the first embodiment.

In the electric role support process, first, in step S3401, a normal figure game time control process is executed, and in the subsequent step S3402, a normal figure game state transition process is executed, and this support process is ended. In other words, the power support process basically has the same configuration as the special figure side game time control process (FIG. 13) and game state transition process (FIG. 16). That is, the normal figure game times control process in step S3401 corresponds to the special figure side game control process in FIG. 13, and the normal figure game state transition process in step S3402 corresponds to the special figure side game state transition process in FIG. are doing. Hereinafter, the processing of the game time control process (step S3401) and the game state transition process (step S3402) on the normal figure side will be explained in detail.

<Public figure game times control process>
First, the normal figure game times control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

In the normal figure game times control process, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the support state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support state flag is stored in the support state flag storage area in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . The support state flag is stored when transitioning to a support state in which opening and closing of the electric accessory 34 is controlled in the general figure game state transition process to be described later, and when ending the support state in the same standard figure game state transition process. will be deleted.

If it is in the support state, the process after step S3502, that is, the process for starting the regular game game round of steps S3503 to step S3505 and the process for advancing the regular game game round of steps S3506 to step S3510, is not executed. , this normal map game time control process ends. In other words, when the game is in the support state, regardless of whether or not a prize has been won in the through gate 35, the general game game round will not be started.

If it is not in the support state, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the accessory display section 44 is in a variable display state. This determination is made by determining whether or not the ordinary figure fluctuation display flag is stored in the ordinary figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The common figure fluctuation display flag is stored when a fluctuating display is started on the accessory display section 44, and is deleted when the fluctuating display ends.

If the accessory display section 44 is not in the fluctuating display, the process advances to steps S3503 to S3505 for starting the regular game round. In the process for starting a regular game game round, first in step S3503, it is determined whether the regular regular game pending storage number FN is 0 or not. When the number FN of general drawings pending memory is 0, the process for electric support support is directly terminated.

If the general figure reservation storage number FN is not 0, a general figure data setting process is executed in step S3504 to set the data stored in the electric service holding area Rc for variable display. In the ordinary figure data setting process, the ordinary figure pending storage number FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric service holding area Rc is moved to the second execution area AE2. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each storage area of the power reserve area Rc. That is, it is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 to the lower area side. , the data in each area is shifted in the following order: third area Rc3→second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4→third area Rc3, and so on. Then, a general figure shift command is set, which is information for making the notification/performance control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that the data in the holding area on the ordinary figure side has been shifted. In this case, the general pattern shift command is read from the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203, and the general pattern shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification/performance control device 82.

After executing the normal pattern data setting process in step S3504, the normal pattern fluctuation start process is executed in step S3505, and then the present normal pattern game time control process is ended. Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60.

In the regular pattern fluctuation start process, first in step S3601, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether a high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204 or not. As mentioned above, the high frequency support flag is stored in the game state transition process on the special figure side, and is then erased when the transition condition is satisfied (when the special figure game continues 100 times).

If the mode is not the high-frequency support mode, in step S3602, a judgment of success or failure (support lottery) is performed with reference to the propriety table for the low-frequency support mode, and if the mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is selected in step S3603. The validity determination is made by referring to the validity table for the frequency support mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, a common validity table is used for normal figures regardless of the level of the support mode, and the validity table referred to in step S3602 and the validity table in step S3603 are The validity table referred to is the same (see FIG. 54(a)). Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the process of determining whether the support mode is high or low in step S3601 is omitted.

After executing step S3602 or step S3603, in steps S3604 to S3614, a process for setting the game result of the current general game game is executed, and the accessory display section The processing for setting the stop result when ending the variable display executed in step 44 is executed. When setting a stop result, among the various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area as a stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203, the stop result table for ordinary figures is selected. Referenced.

Specifically, first, in step S3604, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S3602 or step S3603 is a support state win. If the support state is won, in steps S3605 to S3613, processing for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of support state winning is executed.

In step S3605, it is determined whether a high frequency support mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. If a negative determination is made in step S3605, a distribution determination is made in step S3606 with reference to the regular pattern type table for low frequency support mode (FIG. 54(c)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the release type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is included in the numerical range of release result A or release result B.

In the following step S3607, it is determined whether the game results distributed in step S3606 are results that result in a low winning support state (opening result A). If the result is a low winning support state, in step S3608, it is displayed that the low winning support state will occur as a result of the stoppage of the accessory display section 44 in this general game game round. A stop result setting process for a low win support state is executed to set the variable display to end in the state. In addition, in step S3608, various flags are stored in the RAM 204 for the MPU 202 to specify information (low winning support flag) that the winning/failure determination result of the current round of the common drawing game is an opening result that is in a low winning support state. It is stored in area 235.

On the other hand, if the game results distributed in step S3607 do not result in a low winning support state, that is, if the game results distributed are open results B and result in the first high winning support state, in step S3609, the first A stop result setting process for the first high winning prize support is executed to set the variable display to end in a state where it is displayed that the high winning prize support state will occur. In addition, in step S3609, the MPU 202 stores information (first high prize support flag) in the RAM 204 for specifying that the validity determination result of the current Fuzu game round is an open result that will be in the first high prize support state. The flags are stored in the various flag storage area 235.

In contrast, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3605, a distribution determination is made in step S3610 with reference to the regular pattern type table for high-frequency support mode (FIG. 54(d)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the release type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is included in the numerical range of the release result C or the numerical value range of the release result D.

In the following step S3611, it is determined whether the game results distributed in step S3610 are the results that result in the second high prize winning support state (opening result C). If the result is the second high prize winning support state, in step S3612, the second high prize winning support state will occur as a result of the stoppage of the accessory display section 44 in this general game game round. A stop result setting process for the second high prize winning support state is executed in order to set that the variable display is to be ended in a state where this is displayed. In addition, in step S3612, the MPU 202 stores information (second high prize support flag) in the RAM 204 for specifying that the validity determination result of the current Fuzu game round is an open result that will be in the second high prize support state. The flags are stored in the various flag storage area 235.

On the other hand, if the game results distributed in step S3607 do not result in the second high prize support state, that is, if the distributed game results are the open result D and become the first high prize support state, in step S3613, A stop result setting process for the first high prize winning support is executed in order to set the variable display to end in a state where it is displayed that the first high winning prize support state will occur. In addition, in step S3613, the MPU 202 stores information (first high prize support flag) in the RAM 204 for specifying that the validity determination result of the current Fuzu game round is an open result that will be in the first high prize support state. The flags are stored in the various flag storage area 235.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S3604, in step S3614, the first high prize winning support state, the second high prize winning support state, and the low A stop result setting process for losing is executed in order to set the variable display to end in a state where it is displayed that none of the winning support states occur.

After executing any of the processes in steps S3608, S3609, S3612, and S3613, in step S3615, the normal figure fluctuation display for setting the variable display time of the current normal figure game time on the accessory display section 44 is performed. Executes time setting processing. In this embodiment, as already explained, since the ordinary figure fluctuation display time is uniformly 4.0 seconds, in step S3615, the ordinary figure fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 Set 800 (equivalent to 4.0 seconds) to . The value of the general figure fluctuation display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated.

Note that a variable display time table in which multiple types of variable display times are set for each of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode is stored in the display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203, and each variable display time table is stored in the display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. A configuration may be adopted in which the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter for ordinary figures is selected from. In this case, a portion of the variable display time that may be selected during the high-frequency support mode may be set to be longer than a portion of the variable display time that may be selected during the low-frequency support mode, and any variable display time may be set to be longer than a portion of the variable display time that may be selected during the low-frequency support mode. Even if the time is selected, it may be set to be shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. In addition, the fluctuation display time may be set to differ not only according to the value of the fluctuation type counter for ordinary figures, but also according to the number of ordinary figures pending memory number FN, and the larger the number of ordinary figures pending memory number FN, the more The variable display time may be set to be short, or vice versa.

After executing the setting process of the ordinary figure fluctuation display time in step S3615, the setting process of the ordinary figure fixed display time for setting the fixed display time is executed in step S3616. Here, the setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61.

<Setting process of general map confirmation display time>
In the process of setting the regular map confirmation display time, first in step S3701 it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether a high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the validity determination result of the current common map game round is an opening result (opening result B) that will result in the first high winning support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first high prize support flag is stored in the RAM 204.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, a distribution determination is made in step S3703 with reference to the distribution table (FIG. 57) for regular map final display time. Specifically, the values of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 are determined display time A (4.0 sec), determined display time B (10.0 sec), and determined display time C (16.0 sec). 0sec) is included in the numerical range. In the subsequent step S3704, in order to set the result of the distribution in step S3703 as the fixed display time for the current round of the game, the value corresponding to the allocation result is set as the fixed display time of the set of the set of numbers in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. This is set in the time counter area, and the process for setting the regular map final display time is completed. The value of the regular figure confirmation display time information set in step S3704 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3702, it means that the validity determination result of the current regular game game is an open result (open result A) that results in a low winning support state or a missed result. In this case, the process advances to step S3705, sets 8000 (equivalent to 16.0 sec) in the general pattern fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and ends the process for setting the final general pattern display time. do.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S3701, that is, if the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, the process advances to step S3706, and 250 (0. (equivalent to 5 seconds), and the process for setting the official map finalization display time is completed.

Returning to the description of the ordinary figure variation start process (FIG. 60), after execution of step S3616, the ordinary figure variation command and the ordinary figure type command are set in step S3617. The ordinary figure variation command includes information on the ordinary figure variation display time. Further, the common figure type command includes information on game results. Note that the information on the fixed display time of the regular map is included in the command for changing the regular map.

The ordinary figure variation command and ordinary figure type command set in step S3617 are transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The notification/performance control device 82 determines the contents of the performance in the general pattern game round based on the received general pattern variation command and general pattern type command, and performs various operations so that the determined performance contents are executed. Control equipment. The content of this production includes a variable display mode and a fixed display mode of display sections PP1 and PP2 (see FIG. 56) on the symbol display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of display sections PP1 and PP2. is output from the notification/effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 82 so that a variable display and a fixed display corresponding to each regular game game are performed.

Thereafter, in step S3618, the changing display of the pattern is started on the accessory display section 44, and the process of starting the change of the normal pattern is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the normal figure game round control process (FIG. 59), when the accessory display section 44 is in the variable display mode, the normal figure game round progress process of steps S3506 to S3510 is executed. In the process for progressing the regular figure game, first in step S3506, it is determined whether the variable display time of the current regular figure game has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information for ordinary figures stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become 0.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, variable display processing is executed in step S3509. In the variable display process, display control is performed on the accessory display section 44 so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order (light emission control of each display segment). , this normal map game time control process ends.

If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S3510, and then the present normal pattern game time control process is ended. In the variation end process of step S3510, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any of the processes of steps S3608, S3609, S3612, S3613, and S3614 is specified, and a symbol corresponding to the information is displayed on the accessory display section 44. The accessory display section 44 is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed.

<Fuji game state transition process>
Next, the normal figure game state transition process in step S3402 in the electric winning support process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 62 to 64.

First, in step S3801, it is determined whether the device is in a support state. If it is not in the support state, the process advances to step S3802, and it is determined whether or not the timing has come to the end of the fluctuating display of the symbols of the first regular game game. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

If it is the timing at which the variable display for common figures has ended, it is determined in step S3803 whether or not the game result of the current common figure game round corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 stores any one of the first high prize support flag, the second high prize support flag, and the low prize support flag. If none of the above-mentioned flags are stored, the main game state transition process is ended as is.

If any of the above flags is stored, support state start processing is executed in step S3804. In the start process, a waiting time for the opening of the regular map is set. The waiting time for the common figure opening is set to 0.2 sec in any of the first high winning support state, the second high winning winning support state, and the low winning support state (see FIG. 54(b)).

In the following step S3805, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3805, it means that the current support state is the first high prize winning support state or the low winning winning support state, so the process advances to step S3806, and the support state of the electric accessory 34 is the first high prize winning support state. Determine whether it is in a supported state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3806, 2 is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S3807. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34 is released. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3806, 1 is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S3808.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, it means that the current support state is the first high prize winning support state or the second high prize winning support state, so in step S3809, 2 is set in the second round counter area RC2. set.

After executing the processing in steps S3807, S3808, or S3809, a general figure opening command is set in step S3810. This set standard map opening command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The notification/performance control device 82 determines the contents of the opening performance corresponding to the support state based on the received standard opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

In the following step S3811, after executing the external signal setting process, the main game state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the accessory release signal provided on the external output terminal board 99 is set to the release signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the accessory release signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the accessory release signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device outputs the accessory release signal to the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to understand that a support state has occurred.

In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether the first high prize support flag or the second high prize support flag is stored in the RAM 204, and if either flag is stored, the external output terminal The signal output state of the output terminal for the high win support state signal provided on the board 99 is set to the high win support state signal output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the high winnings support status signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the high winnings support status signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine is connected to the management control device. 10, it can be understood that the high prize support state has occurred.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3801 that the device is in a supported state, the process advances to step S3812. In step S3812, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, accessory opening/closing processing is executed in step S3813. Here, the accessory opening/closing process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

<Accessories opening/closing process>
In the accessory opening/closing process, it is determined in step S3901 whether the electric accessory 34 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the electric accessory drive unit 34b. If the electric accessory 34 is not being released, it is determined in step S3902 whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0, and in step S3903, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is determined to be 0. It is determined whether the value of the second timer area T2 is 0 or not.

When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0 or when the value of the second timer area T2 is not 0, the opening/closing process of the official accessory is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not 0 and the value of the second timer area T2 is 0, the process advances to step S3904, and the electric accessory drive unit 34b is activated to release the electric accessory 34. Set to driving state (accessory object release processing). In the following step S3905, setting processing for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 64.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is not the high-frequency support mode, it is determined in step S4102 whether the support state is the first high-winning support state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, the process advances to step S4103, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 2, that is, whether or not this is the first opening.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4103, in step S4104, "1500" is set in the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and 3.0 sec is set as the upper limit period for the first release. . In the subsequent step S4105, 10 is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the setting process for each round is ended. The second winning counter area PC2 is for counting the number of winnings entered into the lower operation opening 33b, and is used when the electric accessory 34 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state by the process of step S4105. The upper limit of the number of prizes entered into the lower operating port 33b is set to ten. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4103, it means that this is the second opening. In this case, in step S4106, "1000" is set in the second timer area T2, and 2.0 sec is set as the upper limit of the open period. Thereafter, the setting process for each round ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4102, it means that the support state is a low win support state. In this case, in step S4107, the second timer area T2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds), and in step S4108, the second winning counter area PC2 is set to 3, and this setting process is ended. .

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, that is, if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined in step S4109 whether or not the support state is the first high prize winning support state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4109, the process advances to steps S4103 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4109, it means that the support state is the second high prize winning support state. In this case, the process advances to step S4110, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 2, that is, whether this is the first opening.

If the determination in step S4110 is affirmative, in step S4111, "1500" is set in the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and 2.0 sec is set as the upper limit period for the first release. . In the subsequent step S4112, 10 is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the setting process for each round is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4110, "500" is set in the second timer area T2 and 1.0 sec is set as the upper limit of the open period in step S4113. Thereafter, the setting process for each round ends.

Returning to the explanation of the accessory opening/closing process (FIG. 64), after executing the setting process for each round in step S3905, a common map opening command is set in step S3906, and the main accessory opening/closing process ends. This set common map release command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The notification/performance control device 82 determines the content of the production corresponding to the support state based on the received standard map opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the production is executed.

Further, if the electric accessory 34 is in the open state in step S3901, the process advances to step S3907, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer area T2 is 0 or not. If the value of the second timer area T2 is not 0, it is determined in step S3908 whether or not a game ball has entered the lower operating port 33b. If a negative determination is made in step S3908, the main accessory opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3908, the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is decremented by 1 in step S3909, and then it is determined whether the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is 0 or not in step S3910. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S3910, the main accessory opening/closing process is directly ended.

If the value of the second timer area T2 is 0 in step S3907, or if the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is 0 in step S3910, it means that the accessory closing condition is satisfied. In such a case, in step S3911, the electric accessory drive section 34b is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the electric accessory 34 (accessory object closing process).

In the following step S3912, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and in step S3913 it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0. If a negative determination is made in step S3913, it means that the first opening process of the electric accessory 34 has ended, so in step S3914, a second timer is set as a waiting period until the second opening process is executed. Set "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds) in area T2.

In the following step S3915, a general figure closing command is set, and the main accessory opening/closing process is ended. This set normal map closing command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The notification/performance control device 82 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the support state based on the received general map closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3913, that is, if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0, a support state termination process is executed in step S3916. In this process, a waiting time for the Fuzu ending is set. The waiting time for the general drawing ending is set to 0.2 sec in any of the first high winning support state, the second high winning winning support state, and the low winning support state (see FIG. 54(b)). After that, in step S3917, after setting the general figure ending command, the main accessory opening/closing process is ended. This set general drawing ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process.

Returning to the explanation of the ordinary figure game state transition process (FIG. 62), after executing the accessory opening/closing process in step S3813, the process advances to step S3814. In step S3814, it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3814, the process advances to step S3815, and it is determined whether or not the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3815, support state termination processing is executed in step S3816. In the support state termination process, various flags for the support state, such as the first high winning support flag, the second high winning support flag, and the low winning support flag, are deleted. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In contrast, if a negative determination is made in step S3812, S3814, or S3815, the main gaming state transition process is directly ended.

Next, a description will be given of processing related to various effects on the general map side, which is executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/effect control device 82 in this embodiment. As the processing related to various effects on the normal pattern side, a normal pattern fluctuation display control process related to performance control of the normal pattern game time is set. This process is activated at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

<General figure fluctuation display control process>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern fluctuation display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82.

In the normal pattern fluctuation display control process, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern game is in progress, that is, whether or not the pattern display device 41 is performing the variable display of the normal pattern symbols for one game. do. If a negative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the general figure variation command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, the present general pattern fluctuation display control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4203, that is, if the command for general pattern fluctuation has been received, then in step S4203, a process for starting general pattern fluctuation to start the production for the general pattern game cycle is executed. Execute. Here, the normal pattern fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66.

<Process for starting general figure fluctuation>
In the ordinary figure variation start process, first in step S4301, the currently received ordinary figure variation command is read out, and information on the variation display time is specified from the command. Moreover, as already explained, when the main control device 81 transmits the ordinary figure variation command, it also transmits the ordinary figure type command. Therefore, in step S4301, the received standard pattern type command is read together with the currently received standard pattern variation command, and information on the game result is specified from the command. In step S4301, information as to whether or not it is an opening result, and if it is an opening result, information on the opening type, information on the variable display time, and information on the fixed display time are grasped.

Next, in step S4302, based on the information grasped in step S4301, a process is executed to set the stop result for the regular game game to be started this time. That is, if the information specified in step S4301 is the release result, the display parts PP1 and PP2 (see FIG. 56) are displayed in the display color corresponding to the release type at the end of the variable display in the current regular game game. The stop result is set so that the stop result is displayed, and if the information specified in step S4301 is a wrong result, the display parts PP1 and PP2 are set to the first Set the stop result to display the stop result in the display color.

In the following step S4303, a special display performance setting process is executed to execute a special display performance when the electric accessory 34 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state. Here, the special display effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67(a) is a schematic diagram showing a special display effect, and FIG. 67(b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the execution start timing of the special display effect and the final display time.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), in this embodiment, a special display effect is performed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. This special display performance is for notifying the player that the electric accessory 34 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state, that is, that the game ball is likely to enter the lower operation opening 33b. It is something. For example, the special display effects include displaying a character display 401 such as "Aim for the electric chew!!" at the bottom center of the display screen 41a, or changing the background color of the display screen 41a to a special color different from the previous background color. Possible configurations include changing to

Note that "electronic chew" is an abbreviation for electric tulip, and in other words, it is a common name referring to the electric accessory 34 and the lower operating port 33b. Moreover, the display 401 is displayed at the center of the lower part of the display screen 41a because the electric accessory 34 and the lower operating port 33b are located below the center of the display screen 41a. It is displayed in an area near the electric accessory 34 and the lower operating port 33b.

The above special display performance is a dedicated performance for the low-frequency support mode, and is only performed when the electric accessory 34 is controlled to open or close in the first high winning support state under the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. be exposed. In the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34 is switched to the open state less frequently, so it is assumed that the player's interest in the electric accessory 34 is waning. For this reason, if only the electric accessory 34 is opened, the player may not notice and the support state may end without experiencing the fun of aiming to win the electric accessory 34 (lower operation opening 33b). By performing the effect display as described above, it is possible to encourage the player's attention, and it is possible to suitably provide the above-mentioned entertainment. In addition, even a player who is about to end the game can recognize the release of the electric accessory 34 by visually checking the effect display, The burden of constantly staring at 34 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the special display performance is configured to be executed before the electric accessory 34 is released in order to notify the player in advance that the electric accessory 34 will be released. . The execution period of the special display performance before the electric accessory 34 is released is randomized and can be changed within the range of 2.0 seconds to 5.0 seconds, for example. That is, three types of execution periods of the special display effect, 2.0 sec, 4.0 sec, and 5.0 sec, are prepared, and one of them is randomly selected each time the special display effect is executed. The shortest time, 2.0 sec, is at least the period required from launching the game ball until it reaches the electric accessory 34 (lower operating port 33b) (for example, 1.0 sec), as in the case of the confirmed display time. It is set so that it is longer than .

With the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the so-called stop shot while notifying the occurrence of the first high winning support state in advance. In other words, if the execution period of the special display performance is fixed to a predetermined period, it becomes possible to predict the start timing of the electric accessory 34 from the start timing of the special display performance, which is the significance of randomizing the fixed display time. may be lost. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the execution period of the special display performance is diversified, so that the start timing of the electric accessory 34 can be made difficult or impossible to predict.

The display mode of the special display effect in each execution period is common, and is difficult or impossible to visually identify. This makes it difficult to predict the execution period from the content of the special display effect, and it is possible to strengthen the suppression of stop shots. In this case, it is not necessarily necessary to standardize the display mode of the special display effect. For example, when a part of a 2.0 sec special display effect and a part of a 4.0 sec special display effect are common, display modes are overlapped between each special display effect. It may also be a configuration. In short, any special display effect is sufficient as long as the execution period cannot be uniquely identified from the contents (appearance) of the special display effect.

The selection of the execution period of the special display effect is executed by the notification/effect control device 82, and is executed regardless of the selection result of the final display time by the main control device 81. Therefore, even if the shortest finalized display time A (4.0 sec) is selected as the finalized display time in the main control device 81, the longest 5.0 sec is selected in the notification/effect control device 82. is possible. As described above, in this embodiment, a case may arise in which the special display effect cannot be executed only during the final display.

Therefore, the notification/performance control device 82 is configured to determine the type and time length of the final display time selected by the main control device 81, and adjust the start timing of the special display performance based on the results. That is, as shown in FIG. 67(b), if the final display time selected by the main controller 81 is shorter than the execution period of the special display performance selected by the user, the final display is started prior to the start of the final display. The special display effect will start. Conversely, as shown in FIG. 67(c), if the final display time selected by the main controller 81 is longer than the execution period of the special display effect selected by the user, the special display is displayed during the final display. Start the performance. With such a configuration, even when the final display time is irregularly changed, it is possible to appropriately secure the time for the special display performance.

Returning to the explanation of the normal figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 66), in the setting process for the special display effect in step S4303, the process for selecting the execution period of the special display effect, and the final display time selected by the main controller 81 are performed. Processing for understanding the type and length of time, processing for determining whether the confirmed display time is longer than the execution period of the special display effect, and processing for setting the start timing of the special display effect based on the result of the determination process. Among these, the process of grasping the type and length of the fixed display time is performed based on the information of the fixed display time included in the general figure variation command from the main controller 81. After setting the start timing of the special display effect, a command for starting the special display effect is output to the display control device 212 based on the arrival of the start timing. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so that a special display effect is started on the display screen 41a based on the command. Note that the various processes in step S4303 may be performed by the display control device 212.

In the following step S4304, a process is executed to output a command to the display control device 212 so as to start the performance for the normal pattern game round, and then the present normal pattern fluctuation start process is ended. Based on the received command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 41 to execute the performance in the current round of the regular game. In addition, as mentioned above, since the display color of the display parts PP1 and PP2 in the above-mentioned normal figure display area PE is simply switched in the normal figure game round, the display control device 212 does not recognize that the above command has been received. Based on this, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the display color of the display section is periodically switched and displayed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, the confirmation display time of a regular game game is made longer than when it is a high-frequency support mode. This makes it possible to quickly notify the results of the winning/failure lottery while suppressing the loss of the function of the low-frequency support mode. As a result, after the special figure game round ends, the player can quickly end the game.

When the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, the fixed display time of the regular figure game round is made longer than the fixed display time of the special figure game round. With such a configuration, the following effects are expected. In this embodiment, the display parts PP1 and PP2 corresponding to the regular figure game round are smaller than the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the special figure game round, and the accessory display part 44 is smaller than the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the special figure game round. Since they are provided at positions away from the center of the front surface of the board 24, they are all less noticeable. In addition, the winning result of the regular drawing lottery tends to give the player a smaller advantage than the winning result of the special drawing drawing. For this reason, during the game, the player's attention tends to be focused on the special figure game round, and it is thought that the player visually recognizes the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the effect displays related to the special figure game round during most of the game. Under such circumstances, it is possible that the user suddenly becomes concerned about the fate of the winning/failure lottery and shifts his/her line of sight to the display sections PP1, PP2, etc.

In such a case, the fixed display time of the common figure game round is longer, which increases the probability that the display parts PP1, PP2, etc. will be in a stopped display state when the player shifts his/her line of sight. When the display parts PP1, PP2, etc. are in a stopped display state, you can immediately grasp the result of the lottery of common figures and the type of opening of the electric accessory 34. Opportunities to quickly understand information will increase. As a result, the frequency of being able to quickly return the line of sight to the side of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from missing the stop result or effect display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

In this case, it is conceivable that the fixed display time of the special figure game round is also made longer to match the regular figure game round. However, if the final display time of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is increased while the degree of attention to them is high, it tends to give the impression of being delayed to the player, and there is a possibility that the player's desire to play may be inhibited. In this regard, in this embodiment, since the confirmation display time of the special figure game round is shortened, this can be suitably suppressed. That is, according to the present embodiment, the confirmed display time for the regular pattern game is relatively long, and the confirmed display time for the special pattern game is relatively short, so that the results of the general pattern lottery, etc. It becomes possible to suppress stagnation of game progress while making it easier to quickly understand the game progress.

<Modification of second embodiment>
This modification differs from the second embodiment in that it is determined whether or not the player is pausing the game, and based on the result, the fixed display time of the regular game game is set. The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72.

As described in the second embodiment above, by increasing the confirmation display time of the general figure game round, the result of the normal figure lottery and the type of opening of the electric accessory 34 can be informed to the player as soon as possible. However, for example, if the pending information of the general pattern game is stored at the end of the special pattern game period, even if the results of the ongoing general pattern game period are known early, the results of those general pattern game periods will be You will have to wait until you know the results. As a countermeasure, it may be possible to shorten the playing time for one game round and bring forward the start timing of the next round of the normal game, but in this case, the frequency of execution of the winning/failure lottery per unit time will increase, A problem arises in that the functionality of the infrequent support mode is impaired.

In view of this, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 68, even if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, if the game is paused, the confirmation display time of the regular game game is shortened. It is said to be composed of The reason why the execution frequency of the winning/failure drawing of common figures per unit time increases is because the playing time of the common figure game rounds becomes shorter, and at the same time, the stored pending information continues to be digested in a short period of time, and at the same time, the game ball is passed through the gate. This is thought to be due to the fact that new pending information is successively replenished by passing through 35. In this regard, in this modification, when a game is in progress, the confirmation display time is lengthened as in the second embodiment, but when the game is paused, it is shortened. As a result, it is possible to shorten the playing time of the regular game game session while suppressing the loss of the function of the low-frequency support mode, and if the hold information of the regular game game is stored at the end of the special game game session. As a result, waiting time can be reduced.

Note that the specific time length when the confirmed display time is shortened may be 0.5 sec, which is the same as the time length when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. It may be something different. In short, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it is sufficient that the fixed display time during gaming suspension is shorter than the fixed display time during gaming, and the specific length of time is arbitrary.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this modification will be described.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing normal processing in this modification. This process is performed in place of the normal process shown in FIG. 12 according to the first embodiment, and differs from the normal process shown in FIG. ing. Note that the processing in steps S4502 to S4510 is the same as the processing in steps S401 to S409 in the normal processing in FIG. 12, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal process, first, in step S4501, a game suspension determination process is executed to determine whether or not the player has suspended the game. Here, the game suspension determination process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.

In the gaming suspension determination process, first in step S4601, it is determined whether or not a gaming suspension flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The gaming suspension flag is set when it is determined that the player is suspending gaming. If a negative determination is made in step S4601, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not a pause timer flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The pause timer flag is set to determine whether or not the firing stop state has continued for a predetermined period of time when determining whether to pause the game, and indicates that the elapsed period during the firing stop is being measured. This shows that.

If a negative determination is made in step S4602, it is determined in step S4603 whether or not the firing of game balls has been stopped. Specifically, by referring to the status of the player's firing operation on the firing handle 54 or the firing status of the game ball in the game ball firing mechanism 53, it is determined whether the firing operation is being performed or whether the game ball is being fired. Determine whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4603, it is determined in step S4604 whether or not variable display is being performed in the special figure game round. If a negative determination is made in step S4604, it is determined in step S4605 whether or not the common reserve number CRN of special symbols is 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4605, a pause timer flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 in order to measure the firing stop period in step S4606, and in subsequent step S4607, the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 are set. Set "5000" (equivalent to 10.0 sec) in the provided third timer area T3. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in steps S4603 and S4605, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S4604, the main game suspension determination process is directly ended. After executing step S4607, it is determined in step S4608 whether the value of the third timer area T3 is 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S4608, the main game suspension determination process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4602, that is, if the pause timer flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined in step S4609 whether or not a game ball is being shot. That is, in step S4609, after determining in step S4603 that the firing of the game ball has been stopped, it is determined whether the firing operation of the game ball has been restarted. Note that this process is performed in the same manner as step S4603 above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4609, the pause timer flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is erased in step S4610, and then the game pause determination process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4609, the process advances to step S4608, and it is determined whether the value of the third timer area T3 is 0 or not.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4608, that is, if the firing stop state continues for 10.0 seconds, it is determined that the game is paused. In this case, a game suspension flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S4611. Furthermore, in step S4611, the pause timer flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is erased. After executing step S4611, the main game suspension determination process ends.

In this way, in this modification, it is determined that the game is paused when the firing stop state continues for 10.0 seconds. Since the firing of game balls is essential to the progress of the game, this configuration makes it easier to appropriately determine whether to stop the game. At that time, it is configured to determine whether to suspend the game by taking into account the fluctuation status of special figure game times and the storage status of special figure pending information. This makes it easier to determine whether to suspend the game more appropriately.

In other words, when a reach effect, etc. is performed in a special figure game round, the player may be absorbed in it and take his hand off the firing handle 54, and if there is special figure hold information, the player may not be able to do so in the future. This means that the game will continue, and depending on the number of pendants, it may simply mean that the firing operation is being held back. In this modified example, if the special figure game time is being displayed in a variable manner or if special figure hold information is stored, it is assumed that the game is being played even if the firing of game balls has been stopped. Compared to the case where only whether or not a game ball is being shot is used as a judgment material, the judgment accuracy can be improved and erroneous judgments can be suppressed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4601, that is, if a game suspension flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined in step S4613 whether or not a game ball is being shot. That is, in step S4613, after determining that the game is paused in step S4608, it is determined whether or not the game ball firing operation has been restarted. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4613, the game suspension flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is erased, and the determined state that the game is suspended is canceled.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4613, it is determined in step S4615 whether or not the regular game game round has ended (the confirmation display of the regular game game round has ended) and the pending number FN of regular game games is 0. Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4615, the process proceeds to step S4614, where the game suspension flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is erased, and the determined state that the game is suspended is canceled. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4615, the main game suspension determination process is immediately terminated, and the determination state that the game is suspended continues.

<Setting process of general map confirmation display time>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a general figure final display time in this modification. This process is performed in place of the process for setting the normal pattern display time shown in FIG. 61 according to the second embodiment, and is executed at the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern game time. The process for setting the regular map finalized display time in this modification differs from the regular standard map final display time setting process in the second embodiment in that the process of step S4702 is added.

In the process of setting the regular map confirmation display time, first in step S4701 it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not a game suspension flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4702, the process advances to step S4703, where 250 (equivalent to 0.5 sec) is set in the general pattern fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the final normal pattern display time is Finish the setting process. As a result, the final display time when it is determined that the game is paused is set to 0.5 seconds.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4702, the process advances to step S4704, and it is determined whether or not the result of the validity determination for the current round of general drawing games is an opening result (opening result B) that will result in the first high winning support state. do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, the processes in steps S4705 and S4706 are executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S4704, the process in step S4707 is executed. The processing in steps S4705 to S4707 is similar to the processing in steps S3703 to S3705 in FIG. 61. After executing steps S4706 and S4707, the process for setting the final regular map display time is ended. In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S4701, that is, if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S4703, where the confirmed display time is set to 0.5 sec, and then the regular map confirmed display time is set to 0.5 seconds. Finish the setting process.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game when the support mode is the low frequency support mode (mainly the transition state of the fixed display time of the regular game game) will be explained with reference to FIG. Here, it is assumed that all the results of the winning/failing lottery in the regular game game are losing results.

At timing t91, if the fluctuating display of the regular game round A is started in a state where the game suspension flag is off, that is, when it is determined that the game is in progress, the final display of the game round A is started. The time is set to 16.0 seconds. After the start of the confirmation display, at timing t92, when it is determined that the game suspension flag is on, that is, the game is in a suspended state, at timing t93, which is the start of fluctuation of game round B, which is the next regular figure game round. , the final display time for game round B is set to 0.5 sec. That is, the confirmation display time is shortened, and the start timing (timing t95) of the game round C, which is the next regular figure game round, is further advanced. As a result, when the game is paused, it is possible to know the result of the winning/falsifying drawing (losing result) in the game round C earlier than when the game is in progress.

At timing t94 during the variable display of game round B, if the player fires a game ball and restarts the game, the game suspension flag is turned off and the determination state that the game is suspended is canceled. Accordingly, at the time of disclosing the variation of the game time C (timing t95), the final display time of the game time C is set to 16.0 seconds. In other words, the fixed display time returns to the longer time and is changed to the fixed display time suitable for the low-frequency support mode. This makes it possible to suppress the act of intentionally trying to shorten the playing time of a regular game game even when the player has no intention of ending the game.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

It is determined whether or not the player is pausing the game, and when it is determined that the game is pausing, the fixed display time of the regular game game is shortened. As a result, even if the reservation information of the general figure is stored at the end of the special figure game round, it is possible to promptly notify the player of the result of the lottery of success or failure of the general figure and the type of release of the electric accessory 34.

Further, with the above configuration, the following effects can be expected. For example, if the regular symbol game round continues for a long time after the game ends, when the next player tries to play the pachinko machine 10, the pending information of the regular symbols generated by the previous player remains. It may happen that there is a game being played or a game session is being played. In this case, it becomes difficult for the next player to determine whether the previous player who had been playing until then has finished playing or is still playing, leading to a situation where the next player is confused as to whether it is okay to start playing. obtain. In this regard, according to the present modification, after the player who has been playing the game until then finishes the game and leaves, the remaining reservation information is quickly digested. For this reason, when the next player attempts to start a game, it is suppressed that pending information remains or that a regular game game session is played. This makes it easier for the next player to start playing the game, improving the ease of play.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the length of the confirmed display time is changed. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing error handling processing in this embodiment. This process is activated by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle).

In step S4801, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open. Note that the inner frame 13 is provided with a front door open switch that detects that the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. The front door open switch is connected to the main controller 81, and the main controller 81 can determine that the front door frame 14 has been opened by determining the detection signal from the front door open switch. (For example, if the detection signal is a HI signal, it is determined that the front door frame 14 is open; if the detection signal is a LOW signal, it is determined that the front door frame 14 is closed.) If it is determined that the front door frame 14 is open, door open notification processing is executed in step S4802. In the notification processing, processing is performed to display on the display screen 41a that the front door frame 14 has been opened, and to emit a warning sound from the speaker section 64. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the front door frame 14 is opened, the game is not stopped and the game can be continued.

After performing the process in step S4802, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the current process timing is during the game round and before the confirmation display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, a value obtained by adding 1 to the current common reservation number CRN is set in the error counter EK provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4804. The error counter EK is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the number of pieces of pending information that are held and stored at the time when a predetermined abnormality occurs during a game. For example, if the current common reservation number CRN is "3", "4" is input to the error counter EK, and if the common reservation number CRN is "8", "9" is input to the error counter EK.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4803, then in step S4805, a process is executed to set the value of the current common reservation number CRN in the error counter EK. For example, if the common reservation number CRN is "3", "3" is input to the error counter EK, and if the common reservation number CRN is "0" and no game is being played, the error counter EK is "0". ”.

If it is determined in step S4801 that the front door frame 14 is not opened, the process advances to step S4806. In step S4806, it is determined whether the lower tray 72 is full. In addition, a lower tray full switch is provided at a downstream position of the path for discharging game balls to the lower tray 72, which detects when the game balls discharged to the lower tray 72 are full (full). . The lower tray full switch is connected to the main controller 81, and the main controller 81 determines whether or not the lower tray 72 is full by determining the detection signal from the lower tray full switch. It is possible to determine (for example, if the detection signal is a HI signal, it is determined that the lower tray is full, and if the detection signal is a LOW signal, it is determined that the lower tray is not full). If it is determined that the lower tray is full, a lower tray full notification process is executed in step S4807. In the notification processing, processing is performed to display on the display screen 41a that the lower tray is full, to emit a warning sound from the speaker unit 64, and to place the game balls in the lower tray 72 in a so-called dollar box. Instruct them to move. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the lower tray becomes full, the game is not stopped and the game can be continued.

Thereafter, in steps S4803 to S4805, a process is performed to set a value in the error counter EK.

If it is determined in step S4806 that the lower tray is not full, it is determined in step S4808 whether or not ball clogging has occurred. Ball clogging is a phenomenon in which game balls become clogged in passages or mechanical parts through which game balls pass, such as the payout motor of the payout device 96, the payout passage, or the discharge passage from the gaming area PE. The determination of whether or not there is a ball jam can be made, for example, if the payout motor malfunctions or if the number of payouts (the number of game balls paid out from the payout device 96) is different from the number of payout instructions (number of prize balls, etc.). The determination is made by detection using various detection switches connected to the main controller 81. If a ball jam has occurred, a ball jam notification process is executed in step S4809. In the notification processing, processing is performed to display on the display screen 41a that the bulb is clogged, and to emit a warning sound from the speaker unit 64. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a ball jam occurs, the game is not stopped and the game can be continued.

Thereafter, in steps S4803 to S4805, a process is performed to set a value in the error counter EK.

After executing the process in step S4804 or S4805, or if a negative determination is made in step S4808, other handling processes are performed in step S4810, and then the error handling process is ended. In step S4810, for example, if an error (abnormality) that requires the game to be stopped occurs, processing for forcibly stopping the game or notification processing corresponding to the forced stop is performed. An example of an error that should stop the game is when an abnormality detecting switch connected to the main control device 81 such as magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc. detects an abnormality.

In the stop start process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 74, it is determined in step S4901 whether or not a value is set in the error counter EK (whether it is a value greater than 0). judge. If the value of the error counter EK is 0, the process advances to step S1201, and the first confirmed display time is set in accordance with the pending notice.

If the error counter EK is not 0 but greater than or equal to 1, a process of decrementing the error counter EK by 1 is executed in step S4902. In the following step S4903, the first confirmed display time of the game round currently being executed is set to a time longer than the first confirmed display time (0.2 sec or 1.5 sec) set in the process from step S1201 onwards. Processing is performed to set it as a certain 5 seconds. Then, in step S4904, the process of starting the first confirmation display is performed, and then the main stop start process is ended.

In the stop/start process on the notification/performance control device 82 side, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. , it is determined whether the first confirmed display time of the current game round is 1.5 seconds. If it is 1.5 sec, in step S5003, a setting process for a pending notice effect is executed. The processing from step S5001 to step S5003 is similar to the processing from step S1601 to step S1603 described above. If the first confirmed display time is not 1.5 seconds in step S5002, the process advances to step S5004, and it is determined whether the first confirmed display time of the current game round is 5.0 seconds. The case of 5.0 sec is a case where it is determined in the stop start processing on the side of the main control device 81 that the value of the error counter EK is not 0 in a game round. In this case, in step S5005, a delay effect setting process is executed. In the delay effect setting process, the display control device 101 and the like are controlled so that a delay effect is performed to notify that the first confirmed display time of the current game round is longer than usual.

For example, as shown in FIG. 76(a), it is assumed that the error counter EK is set in a situation where a variable display of game times is being performed. In this case, when the variable display of the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 76(b), each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is simply stopped and displayed to notify the result, as shown in FIG. 76(c). In addition, a delay telop UP indicating "Slowly digesting" is displayed at a position (for example, above or below) that does not overlap with the variable display area ME on the display screen 41a to indicate that the start of the next game round is delayed. .

After executing the processing in step S5003 or step S5005, or if it is determined in step S5004 that the time is not 5.0 sec (in the case of 0.2 sec), a final display start process is performed in step S5006. The processing in step S5006 is similar to the processing in step S1604. After executing the process of step S5006, the main stop start process ends.

The flow of the game when a value is set in the error counter EK will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 77.

The variable display of game times started at timing t1 ends at timing t2, and a fixed display time of 0.7 seconds (a first fixed display time of 0.2 seconds and a second fixed display time of 0.5 seconds) is set. In this case, at timing t3, the final display time has elapsed and the next game round is started. It is assumed that, for example, the front door frame 14 is opened and the error counter EK is set at timing t4, which is the timing during the variable display of the game round started at timing t3 (timing before final display). In this case, since the common reservation number CRN is 1 (see FIG. 77(c)), 2 is set in the error counter EK. Then, when the variable display for the current game round ends at timing t5 and the fixed display time is set, the first fixed display time is set as 5.0 seconds, and then the second fixed display time is set to 0 seconds. It is set as .5sec. In this case, since the error counter EK is decremented by 1, it is updated from 2 set at the timing t4 to 1. Further, the front door frame 14 is closed at timing t6, which is during the confirmed display time of the current game round.

When the next game round starts at timing t7, the common reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1 and becomes 0. Then, when the variable display of the game round ends at timing t8, the first fixed display time is set to 5.0 seconds. In this case, the error counter EK is decremented by 1 and becomes 0.

For example, if the hold information is acquired during the first confirmed display time set at timing t8, a new game round is started at timing t9, which is the end timing of the current confirmed display time. However, since the error counter EK is 0 in this game round, when the first confirmed display time is set at timing t10, the normal 0.2 sec is set.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Since the length of the confirmed display time is extended based on the occurrence of a predetermined error, for example, the result of a gaming session may be missed due to the error being dealt with by the administrator of the gaming hall, etc. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of events such as storage.

While the predetermined error target is an event that causes the game to continue, for example, the front door frame 14 is opened, the lower tray is full, or a ball is jammed. For example, if an error occurs in which magnetism, radio waves, vibrations, etc. are detected, the game is stopped. As a result, compared to a configuration in which the game is uniformly stopped based on the occurrence of an error, the game can proceed smoothly.

The configuration is such that the confirmation display time is extended for unreported hold information that remains when an error occurs. Although it is conceivable to extend the confirmation display time by a predetermined number of times based on the occurrence of an error, if this is done, for example, even though no game is being played when the error occurs, When you play a game afterwards, the confirmed display time may be extended, or for example, even though a large amount of pending information is stored when an error occurs, only a portion of it may be extended. can occur. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it becomes possible to take measures in accordance with the actual situation when an error occurs.

In the above embodiment as well, the setting of the final display time is performed after the start of the game round and at the start of the final display time, so that it is expected to have the effect of suppressing missed notifications of the results of the game round that is being executed when an error occurs. be able to.

For example, a configuration in which the variable display time is extended may be considered as a configuration to reduce the speed of progress of the game when an error occurs. However, in this case, in accordance with the extension of the variable display time, it is also necessary to change the performance of the game repetition (variable display pattern of symbols) carried out on the display screen 41a etc. In this case, even though we would like to reduce the processing load of other processes as much as possible in order to carry out processing to resolve the error in the event of an error, we end up with a configuration in which the processing load increases. . On that point, if the fixed display time is extended as described above, the fluctuating display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 has stopped, and the stopped time is only extended, so the game rotation It becomes possible to reduce the speed of progress of the game without changing the performance (fluctuation display pattern of symbols).

<Modification of third embodiment>
In this modification, the timing at which the extension of the confirmed display time based on the occurrence of an error is canceled is different. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing error handling processing in this modification.

In this modification, it is determined in step S5101 whether the front door frame 14 is opened. This process is similar to step S4801 above. If the front door frame 14 is open, in step S5102, door open notification processing similar to step S4802 is executed. Then, in step S5103, a process of setting an error flag in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is executed. The error flag is a flag used by the MPU 202 to determine whether or not to extend the first confirmed display time, and is set based on the occurrence of an error and erased based on the cancellation of the error.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, it is determined in step S5104 whether or not the lower tray is full, as in step S4806. If the lower tray is full, in step S5105, the lower tray full notification process is executed in the same manner as in step S4809. Thereafter, an error flag is set in step S5103.

If a negative determination is made in step S5104, it is determined in step S5106 whether or not ball clogging has occurred, as in step S4808. If a ball jam has occurred, in step S5107, ball jam notification processing is executed in the same manner as step S4809. Thereafter, an error flag is set in step S5103.

After executing the process in step S5103, or if a negative determination is made in step S5106, other handling processes are executed in step S5108, and then this error handling process is ended. The process in step S5108 is similar to the process in step S4810 above.

In the stop start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, it is determined in step S5201 whether the error flag is set. If the error flag is not set, the process advances to step S1201, and a first confirmed display time is set in accordance with the pending notice.

If the error flag is set, in step S5202, the first confirmed display time of the currently executed game round is set to the first confirmed display time (0. 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds) is set as 5 seconds. Then, in step S5203, the process of starting the first confirmation display is performed, and then the main stop start process is ended.

In this case, in the stop/start process on the notification/effect control device 82 side, the process for setting the delay effect is performed on the condition that 5 seconds is set as the first confirmed display time. As a result, after the variable display in the game round ends, the delayed telop UP (FIG. 76(c)) is displayed as a delayed effect in the final display.

The error resolution process for erasing the error flag will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80.

In step S5301, it is determined whether an error flag is set. If it has not been set, the main resolution process is immediately terminated. If set, the process advances to step S5302. Steps S5302 to S5304 are processes for determining whether the error has been resolved. That is, in step S5302, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. If it is open, it is determined that the error has not been resolved, and the main resolution process is ended. Further, in step S5303, it is determined whether the lower tray is full or not, and if the lower tray is full, it is determined that the error has not been resolved and the main resolution process is ended. Then, in step S5304, it is determined whether or not a ball jam has occurred, and if a ball jam has occurred, it is determined that the error has not been resolved and the main clearing process is ended.

If it is determined that the error has been resolved in each process from step S5302 to step S5304, the process advances to step S5305. In step S5305, whether or not the firing handle 54 is being operated is determined by a touch sensor or the like installed on the firing handle 54. If no operation has been performed, it is assumed that the player is not ready to start playing, and the main cancellation process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the firing handle 54 is being operated, the error flag is erased in step S5306, and then the present resolution process is ended.

As in this modification, if the confirmed display time is not extended based on the occurrence of an error on the condition that the player is ready to start playing, even if the player restarts the game after an error occurs, However, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the fixed display time is extended for a while.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the fixed display time is extended based on the player's operation. FIG. 81(a) is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, an operation button 77 serving as an operation section operated by a player is provided on the front side of the gaming machine. When the operation button 77 is operated, an operation detection switch (not shown) built into the operation button 77 detects the operation, and a detection signal is output to the main controller 81. The main controller 81 determines whether or not the operation button 77 has been operated based on the detection signal from the operation detection switch.

FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing operation corresponding processing for determining the operation of the operation button 77. The operation corresponding process is activated by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 at a predetermined period (eg, 4 msec period).

In step S5401, it is determined whether the operation button 77 has been operated. If no operation has been performed, the operation corresponding processing is immediately terminated. If it has been operated, the process advances to step S5402, and it is determined whether the operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If the operation flag is not set, the operation flag is set in step S5403, and then the operation corresponding processing ends. If the operation flag is set, the operation flag is cleared in step S5404, and then the operation corresponding processing ends. That is, each time the operation button 77 is operated, the operation flag is switched between a set state and an unset state.

FIG. 82(a) is a flowchart showing the stop start process in this embodiment.

In step S5501, it is determined whether the above operation flag is set, and if it is not set, the process advances to step S1201. If it has been set, the process advances to step S5502, and the current first confirmed display time is set as the time longer than the shortest variable display time of one game round and within the longest variable display time of 30. Processing to set it as 0sec is performed. Then, in step S5503, the process of starting the first confirmation display is performed, and then the main stop start process is ended.

In the stop start process in this embodiment, it is determined in step S5004 in FIG. 75 whether the first confirmed display time is 30.0 seconds. If it is 30.0 sec, that is, if the variable display of game times ends in a situation where the operation button 77 is operated, a delay effect is set in step S5005. In the delayed effect in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the start of the next game round is delayed at positions (for example, above and below) that do not overlap with the variable display area ME on the display screen 41a. To indicate this, a break caption QP that says "Toilet break in progress" is displayed.

By doing the above, the speed of game progress can be changed based on the player's decision-making. In this case, by configuring the fixed display time to be changed instead of the variable display time, the speed of game progress can be changed without changing the performance pattern. Therefore, convenience can be improved with a simple configuration.

Here, if the player wants to stop the game progress, conventionally, it is necessary to wait for the stored pending information to be used up. There was an inconvenience that it took a long time. In particular, this pachinko machine 10 is configured such that in the normal gaming state, the hold information for the first ball entry section 33d and the hold information for the second ball entry section 33e can be acquired up to the upper limit number (4 pieces). , a large number of pending information is stored compared to a configuration in which it is easy to obtain up to the maximum number of pending information for one entering section, but it is difficult to obtain the pending information for the other entering section (difficult to enter the ball). There may be many situations where this happens. Therefore, even if the player wants to stop the game progress, there are many situations where he or she cannot stop the game immediately. On that point, if it is possible to delay the game progress based on the player's operation as in the above configuration, even if a large amount of pending information is stored, it will be possible to delay the game progress by using the longer fixed display time. It becomes possible to finish errands.

In addition, for example, if a player learns in advance that a performance with high expectations for a jackpot will occur due to a pre-read notification (pending notice) based on stored pending information, the player's In terms of feelings, it is thought that the player wants to prepare a drink or invite a friend over in order to fully enjoy the game round in which the performance with high expectations for a jackpot is performed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, in such a situation, if the digestion speed is slowed down, the player can fully enjoy the game round in which the performance with high expectations for a jackpot will occur. This makes it possible to make preparations for

Although the speed of digestion is slowed down, the game progress is not stopped. As a result, for example, even if a player intentionally leaves unused pending information and then performs an operation to slow down the processing speed when he/she finishes playing and leaves his/her seat, the unused pending information may be left unused for a while after leaving the player's seat. Information pending for digestion will be digested. Therefore, the inconvenience that subsequent players are unable to play due to unconsumed pending information remaining forever after the player leaves the player's seat does not occur.

<Modification of the fourth embodiment>
In this modification, the performance pattern of the jackpot game round is reproduced during the confirmed display time based on the player's operation. FIG. 83(a) is a flowchart showing processing at the start of stopping in this modification.

In step S5601, it is determined whether the operation flag is set. If the operation flag is not set, the process advances to step S1201. If the operation flag is set, the process advances to step S5602, and it is determined whether the current game round is a game round that will result in a jackpot. If it is a game round that does not result in a jackpot, the process advances to step S5603, and the current first confirmed display time is set to 0.2 sec, which is the same as the normal time. If it is a game round that results in a jackpot, the process advances to step S5604 to specify the length of the variable display time of the current game round, and to set the specified variable display time as the first confirmed display time of this time. conduct. For example, if the current game round is a game round where 30 seconds is set as the variable display time, the current first confirmed display time is set as 30 seconds, and if the current game time is set at 90 seconds as the variable display time. , the current first confirmed display time is set as 90 seconds. After executing the process of step S5603 or step S5604, the process of starting the first confirmation display is performed in step S5605, and then the main stop start process is ended.

On the notification/performance control device 82 side, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 84, in the stop start process, the same processes as the above steps S5001 to S5003 are executed in steps S5701 to S5703. If a negative determination is made in step S5703 and it is determined that the current first confirmed display time is not 1.5 seconds, in step S5704, the variable display time of the current game round is set as the current first confirmed display time. Determine whether or not. If the variable display time is set, in step S5705, a process is executed to set the performance pattern of the current game round as the performance pattern during the current first fixed display time.

After executing the process in step S5703 or step S5705, or after making a negative determination in step S5704, the process for starting the final display is executed in step S5706, and then the process for starting the stop is ended.

By doing this, as shown in FIG. 83(b), when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 41a and the jackpot result is announced through the reach effect, the subsequent Using one fixed display time, the performance pattern from the start of variation to the stop of the current game round is reproduced. As a result, even if, for example, you miss a premium pattern effect that occurs only in the game round where the jackpot result is announced, you will be given the opportunity to take a closer look at the effect, so you can enjoy the effect to its fullest. It becomes possible to have fun.

In this case, since the game rounds in which the production pattern is reproduced are limited to the game rounds that result in a jackpot result, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of reproducing the performance of a game cycle even though the result is a loss. It has become.

Moreover, by doing as described above, after the jackpot result is announced, the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result will be delayed compared to normal. Thereby, for example, after the jackpot result is announced, it is also possible to secure a period for preparations for the opening/closing execution mode, such as preparing a dollar box to receive the game balls.

On the other hand, if the reproduction of the above-mentioned performance occurs, for example, during a series of games, or for a player who has limited playing time, the reproduction of the above-mentioned performance may feel troublesome. Therefore, based on the player's operation, it is possible to reproduce the effect (by setting the operation flag) or prevent the effect from being reproduced (by deleting the operation flag). It becomes possible to respond flexibly to diverse needs.

In the above modification, the performance pattern of the game round that results in a jackpot is reproduced during the first confirmed display time, but the game time in which the performance pattern is reproduced is not limited to this. For example, a performance pattern of a game round in which a variable display time corresponding to a predetermined reach occurrence is set may be reproduced during the first fixed display time.

Further, in the above modification, the performance pattern of the current game round is reproduced during the first confirmed display time, but the game round to be reproduced is not limited to the current game round. For example, based on a pre-read notification (pending notice) specifying a game session that will result in a predetermined result (jackpot result), during the first confirmed display time of the game session that precedes the game session that will result in the predetermined result, It may be configured to reproduce the performance pattern of the game round that results in the predetermined result. For example, when a game round that results in a jackpot is specified, during the first confirmed display time of the game round that is completed one game round before that game round, the game that will be executed during the game round that will result in the jackpot result will be executed. It has a configuration that reproduces the likely production pattern. As a result, the effect pattern executed in the game round that results in a jackpot is repeatedly executed, and as a result, it is possible to cause the same phenomenon as in the above modification.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a jackpot result is notified earlier than usual. FIG. 85 is a front view of the game board 124 in this embodiment. Note that the same components as the game board 24 in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the position and configuration of the operating port, which is the trigger for determining whether or not to execute the opening/closing execution mode, are different. Therefore, first, the game area PE on the game board 124 in this embodiment will be explained.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, a plurality of regions are divided into areas into which the game balls can flow.

Specifically, in the gaming area PE, there is an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and an area that is continuous below the upper area PE1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left side area PE2 which is a left side area, a right side area PE3 which is continuous below the upper area PE1 and is an area to the right of the variable display unit 36, and each of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower region PE4 that is continuous below the variable display unit 36 and is below the variable display unit 36.

When the player performs a rotation operation of the firing handle 54 as a first firing operation with a rotation operation amount in a first range that is greater than or equal to a predetermined rotation amount and less than a reference rotation amount, a horizontal movement is made in the upper region PE1. The game ball begins to flow down to the left of the center position. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PE1 → left area PE2 → lower area PE4. On the other hand, when the player performs a rotational operation of the firing handle 54 as a second firing operation with a rotational operation amount in a second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotational amount, the player can rotate the firing handle 54 to the right of the horizontal center position in the upper region PE1. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PE1 → right area PE3 → lower area PE4. In other words, by adjusting the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 54, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, and also allows the player to play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3. You can play the game as the game ball flows down.

The reference amount of rotation is the amount of rotation at which the rate at which the game ball flows down the left area PE2 and the rate at which the game ball flows down the right side area PE3 are the same, and the rotation operation in the first range In the amount, the rate at which the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 becomes high, and at the amount of rotation operation in the second range, the rate at which the game ball flows down the right side area PE3 increases. Therefore, in the rotational operation amount in the first range, there is a possibility that the game ball will flow down the right area PE3 when the rotational operation amount is close to the reference rotational amount, and in the second range of rotational operation amount, it is close to the reference rotational amount. With the amount of rotation operation, there is a possibility that the game ball will flow down the left side area PE2.

In this embodiment, a first operating port 133 corresponding to the first ball entry portion 33d is provided in the lower region PE4 as an operating port. The first operating port 133 is a ball entry section that is open upward, and when a game ball flowing down the gaming area PE enters the first operating port 133, the reservation information for the first ball entry section 33d is stored. The information is acquired and judged as appropriate.

The first operating port 133 is not provided with a member for opening and closing. In a situation where the game balls are fired in the same manner, the winning probability at the first operating port 133 is constant regardless of the game state. In addition, the first operating port 133 is arranged directly below the stage formed in the variable display unit 36, and the game balls that flowed onto the stage through the guide path formed in the variable display unit 36 are placed on the stage. The game balls discharged from the center to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily enter the first operating port 133.

Here, since the first operating port 133 is provided in the lower area PE4 as described above, when the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, and when the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, A prize can be won through the first operating port 133 in any case where the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down. However, since the entrance of the guide passage to the stage is provided for the left side area PE2 and not for the right side area PE3, when flowing down the left side area PE2 and flowing down the right side area PE3, In comparison, it is easier for the first operating port 133 to win a prize. Furthermore, the arrangement of the game parts and nails 38 in the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 is such that winnings to the first operating port 133 are more likely to occur when flowing down the left side area PE2 than when flowing down the right side area PE3. is set to . The game ball that has flown down the right side area PE3 hardly ever enters the first operating port 133.

Further, in the present embodiment, a second operating port 134 corresponding to the second ball entry portion 33e is provided in the right region PE3 as an operating port. In other words, if the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, winning is not possible, and the firing handle 54 operates so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. If the is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

The configuration of the second operating port 134 will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the second operating port 134. The second operating port 134 is provided with an electric accessory 134a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 134a corresponds to the electric accessory 34 in each of the embodiments described above.

That is, the electric accessory 134a is connected to a drive section 134b mounted on the back side of the game board 124, and is driven by the drive section 34b to be in the closed state shown in FIG. 86(a) and in the closed state shown in FIG. 86(b). placed in either of the open states shown. When the electric accessory 134a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 134, and when the electric accessory 134a is in the open state, it becomes possible to enter the second operating port 134. Incidentally, when it is in the open state, the electric accessory 134a protrudes toward the gaming area PE side and guides winning into the second operating opening 134.

In addition, the electric accessory 134a switches between a state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second operating port 134 to occur, and a state in which winning is more difficult than the above-mentioned state in which winning is more likely to occur, although winning is not impossible. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the Alternatively, the electric accessory 134a may be configured to move or rotate in the front-rear direction to switch between a state in which winnings are more likely to occur and a state in which winnings are more difficult to occur. Further, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 134a is disabled and switching between a state in which winnings are likely to occur and a state in which winnings are less likely to occur is performed by displacement of the second operating port 134 itself.

In this embodiment as well, a plurality of support modes are provided in which the modes of support by the electric accessory 134a are different, and specifically, the frequency with which the electric accessory 134a is in the open state per unit time is relatively A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set to be high and low.

Here, since the second operating port 134 is provided in the right side area PE3, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. In this case, the frequency of winnings in the first operating port 133 or the second operating port 134 is higher than in the case where the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, and the winning/non-winning determination is made. The frequency of That is, in the high-frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to let the right side area PE3 flow down than to let the left side area PE2 flow down. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, since it is almost impossible to expect a prize to enter the second operating port 134, the firing handle 54 is operated so that the technique ball flows down the right area PE3. When the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the area PE2, the frequency of winnings to the first operating port 133 or the second operating port 134 increases, and the frequency of determination of success or failure increases. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to move down the left side area PE2 than to move down the right side area PE3.

The opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment is executed by the variable prize winning device 132 provided in the lower area PE4. In this embodiment, based on the game ball passing through a predetermined area within the variable prize winning device 132 during the opening/closing execution mode, the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. When the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, the high probability mode is continued until a predetermined number of games (for example, 50) are played.

The variable winning device 132 will be explained with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87(a) is a vertical sectional view of the variable winning device 132 seen from the side, and FIG. 87(b) is a vertical sectional view of the variable winning device 132 seen from the back side.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), the variable winning device 132 is formed with a sorting entrance 371 that is open in the front and back direction and is large enough for game balls to pass through, and the game balls pass through the sorting entrance 371. It is equipped with a distribution member 352 that switches between a closed state in which the ball cannot pass through and an open state in which the game ball can pass through. The distribution member 352 is brought into an open state by being driven by a distribution entrance drive unit 353 through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance 371 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 354, and the game balls that flowed in from the distribution entrance 371 flow down the guide passage 354 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), the guide passage 354 branches into two from a midway position, with an upstream area 355 forming an upstream side of the branching position, and one forming an upstream area 355 downstream of the branching position. It includes a V-winning area (or usable area) 356, and a discharge area (or unused area) 357, which constitutes the other downstream of the branching position. Further, at the branch position, a shutter 358 is provided as a distribution means for distributing game balls that have arrived at the branch position from the upstream area 355 to either the V winning area 356 or the ejection area 357. When the shutter 358 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 359, the game balls that have reached the branching position will flow into the discharge area 357, and when the shutter 358 is driven by the shutter drive unit 359, the game balls will flow into the discharge area 357. The game ball that has reached the branch position will flow into the V winning area 356.

A detection sensor 372 for counting is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where game balls flowing into the upstream area 355 always pass. Based on the detection of game balls by the counting detection sensor 372, payout of prize balls corresponding to winnings to the variable winning device 132 is executed. Further, the detection sensor 373 for V winning is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game ball flowing into the V winning area 356 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 373, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a predetermined lottery mode. More specifically, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 373 during the opening/closing execution mode, the win/fail lottery mode is set to a high probability mode in which the probability of winning is higher than usual after the opening/closing execution mode.

Moreover, the detection sensor 374 for ejection is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game balls flowing into the ejection area 357 always pass. Based on the detection results from the ejection detection sensor 374 and the V-winning detection sensor 373, it is determined whether or not game balls remain in the variable winning device 132.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the probability that a winning game ball in variable winning device 132 will be guided to V winning area 356 differs depending on the type of jackpot result (depending on the type of opening/closing execution mode). . However, the drive timing of the shutter drive unit 359 is constant regardless of the type of jackpot result (regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode). The probability of being guided to the V winning area 356 is varied depending on the opening/closing timing of the distribution member 352, so that the game ball wins in the variable winning device 132 at a timing when it is easy to be guided to the V winning area 356. The distributing member 352 is opened in the V high expectation opening/closing execution mode, and the V distributing member 352 is opened so that the game ball enters the variable winning device 132 at a timing when it is difficult to be guided to the V winning area 356. An opening/closing execution mode with low expectations is set.

As mentioned above, in each opening/closing execution mode, the drive timing of the shutter drive unit 359 is uniform. Specifically, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the shutter 358 moves to the V winning area. 356, and then to a mode of guiding to the discharge area 357. In the opening/closing execution mode in the V high expectation mode, the shutter 358 is set before the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode so that a prize can be entered in the variable winning device 132 at the timing when the shutter 358 is in the mode of guiding to the V winning area 356. The first round game is set to start at . On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode in the V low expectation mode, the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode so that winnings are not allowed in the variable winning device 132 at the timing when the shutter 358 is in the mode of guiding to the V winning area 356. The first round of the round game is set to start later and after the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the discharge area 357.

FIG. 88 shows the distribution table in this embodiment. The distribution table is a table that is referred to when the result of the judgment is a jackpot result, and is used to determine the type of jackpot result.

Assignment for the first ball entry section that is referred to when a jackpot result is obtained in the judgment of the reservation information obtained based on the ball entering the first operating port 133, as shown in FIG. 88(a). For the table and the second ball entry section, which is referred to when a jackpot result is obtained in the judgment of the reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second operating port 134, as shown in FIG. 88(b). The allocation table and are both set to give either a normal jackpot result or an advantageous jackpot result. However, the ratio of the normal jackpot result and the advantageous jackpot result is set to be different, and the distribution table for the second ball entry section has a more advantageous jackpot result than the distribution table for the first ball entry section. The probability is set to be high.

The normal jackpot result is a result of the opening/closing execution mode being carried out as the opening/closing execution mode of the above-mentioned V low expectation mode, and in this opening/closing execution mode, for example, eight round games are carried out. After the opening/closing execution mode based on the normal jackpot result, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

The advantageous jackpot result is a result of the opening/closing execution mode being implemented as the opening/closing execution mode of the above-mentioned V high expectation mode, and in this opening/closing execution mode, for example, eight round games are executed. After the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous jackpot result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues for a predetermined number of games (50 times).

As described above, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high probability mode by guiding the game ball to the V prize winning area 356 during the opening/closing execution mode, and the high probability mode is set for a predetermined number of games (50 times). and continue. Therefore, based on an advantageous jackpot result, it becomes possible to carry out the opening/closing execution mode for eight rounds, and it becomes possible to carry out the high probability gaming state, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, for 50 times. On the other hand, if the result is a normal jackpot, the 8-round opening/closing execution mode becomes possible, but the game shifts to the normal gaming state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot result, the degree of advantage for the player differs greatly depending on whether the jackpot result is classified as an advantageous jackpot result or a normal jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the first ball entry section, there is a 50% probability that the game will be distributed to the normal jackpot result, and a 50% probability that the game will be distributed to the advantageous jackpot result. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second ball entry section, there is a probability of approximately 17% for the game to be distributed to the normal jackpot result, and a probability of approximately 83% for the game to be distributed to the advantageous jackpot result. Therefore, the distribution table for the second ball entry section is set to be more advantageous to the player than the distribution table for the first ball entry section.

As for the flow of the game in this embodiment, first, in the normal game state, a game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side area PE2, and a prize is generated in the first operating port 133. Based on the winning to the first operation port 133, reservation information for the first ball entry section is acquired, and a win/fail determination is made based on the reservation information. If the result of the jackpot is determined by the determination, the opening/closing execution mode by the variable winning device 132 is executed. If the jackpot result is a normal jackpot result, the game ball will not be guided to the V winning area 356 during the opening/closing execution mode, and will return to the normal gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. Return to the game of aiming at the operating port 133.

If the jackpot result is an advantageous jackpot result, the game ball is guided to the V winning area 356 during the opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability gaming state of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is set. . In the high-precision game state, by playing a game in which the right side area PE3 is caused to flow down to generate a win in the second operation port 134, it is possible to play the game without reducing the number of balls held. The high certainty gaming state ends after 50 gaming rounds are played. Therefore, in a high-precision gaming state, a jackpot result occurs before the 50th gaming round based on winnings to the second operating port 134 is executed, and by becoming an advantageous jackpot result again, the 50th gaming round is repeated. The high certainty gaming state is reset and the high certainty gaming state continues. On the other hand, if a jackpot result is not achieved even after 50 gaming rounds, or if a jackpot result is achieved midway through but becomes a normal jackpot result, the gaming state will change to the normal gaming state at that point. Transition.

Here, in the high-probability gaming state as described above, if a normal jackpot result results and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, so the winning to the second operating port 134 This makes it difficult for the player to receive a lottery (distribution lottery) on the side of the second ball entry section that is advantageous to the player. In particular, if a normal jackpot result occurs in a situation where the hold information on the second ball entry side is less than the upper limit, the hold information for the upper limit, which should be easily reached in the high-frequency support mode, is stored. Compared to the case where a normal jackpot result is obtained in the state in which the ball is played, the winning lottery on the second ball entry section side cannot be received by the difference from the upper limit number. Therefore, in this embodiment, when such an event occurs, a predetermined notification is made.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect setting process in this embodiment. As already explained, this performance setting process is a process (step S1504) that is executed when starting a game round that results in a jackpot in the variation start process (FIG. 27) on the notification/performance control device 82 side. .

In step S5801, the current gaming state is grasped and it is determined whether or not it is a high certainty gaming state. If it is not a high probability gaming state but a normal gaming state, the process advances to step S5802, where a performance table for normal result notification is obtained and a performance pattern for the current game round is determined. In the effect table for normal result notification, multiple effect patterns are set in which the jackpot result is announced just before the variable display time elapses (for example, 2 seconds before, at the first timing), depending on the variable display time that is set. The current performance pattern is determined from these multiple performance patterns by lottery or the like. In addition, when determining the effect pattern, the processing result of the immediately preceding stop result determination process for jackpot (step S1503) is also referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the stop result to be stopped is determined.

If it is determined in step S5801 that the game is in a high probability gaming state, the process advances to step S5803. In step S5803, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result. If it is not a normal jackpot result but an advantageous jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S5802 and a performance pattern is determined based on the performance table for normal result notification.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5803, and it is determined that the current game round is a game round that usually results in a jackpot during the high probability game state, the process advances to step S5804. In other words, the case where the process proceeds to step S5804 is the case where the high probability gaming state ends in the current gaming round and the state shifts to the normal gaming state. In this case, in step S5804, processing is performed to ascertain the number of pending information on the second ball entry section side. In step S5805, it is determined whether the number of pending information on the second ball entry section side is two or less. If the number is not 2 or less, that is, if there are 3 or 4 pieces of pending information on the second ball entry part side even if the high-probability gaming state ends in the current game round, the process advances to step S5802; A performance pattern determination process is performed based on the performance table for normal result notification.

On the other hand, if the number of reservation information on the second ball entry section side is two or less, it is determined in step S5806 whether the number of reservation information on the second ball entry section side is zero. If the number is not 0 but 1 or 2, in step S5808, a performance table for previous result notification is acquired and a performance pattern for the current game round is determined. In the performance table for announcing the previous result, the jackpot result is announced earlier by the first predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) than the elapse of the variable display time according to the variable display time that is set (the jackpot result is announced at the second timing). A plurality of performance patterns (results of which are announced) are set, and the current performance pattern is determined from these multiple performance patterns by lottery or the like. In addition, when determining the effect pattern, the processing result of the immediately preceding stop result determination process for jackpot (step S1503) is also referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the stop result to be stopped is determined.

After performing the process in step S5807, a high speed flag is set in the RAM 244. The high speed flag is a flag used by the MPU 242 to specify the timing to notify the game result in the current game round.

If it is determined in step S5806 that the number of pending information on the second ball entry section side is 0, in step S5809, a performance table for immediate result notification is acquired and a performance pattern for the current game round is determined. In the performance table for immediate result notification, multiple performance patterns are set in which the jackpot result is announced a second predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) earlier than the fluctuating display time has elapsed, depending on the variable display time that is set. The current performance pattern is determined from these multiple performance patterns by lottery or the like. Comparing the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period, the second predetermined period is set longer than the first predetermined period. That is, the result of the game round is announced earlier with the performance pattern determined on the performance table for immediate result notification than on the performance pattern determined on the performance table for early result notification. In addition, when determining the effect pattern, the processing result of the immediately preceding stop result determination process for jackpot (step S1503) is also referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the stop result to be stopped is determined.

After performing the process in step S5809, a super high speed flag is set in the RAM 244. The super high speed flag is a flag used by the MPU 242 to specify the timing to notify the game result in the current game round.

After executing the processing in step S5802, step S5808, or step S5810, in step S5811, a process is performed to set the effect pattern determined in these processes as the current effect pattern, and then the main effect setting process is ended. .

Next, the processing during fluctuation in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 90. As already explained, the process during fluctuation is a process executed as one process (step S1406) of the fluctuating display control process (FIG. 26) on the notification/effect control device 82 side.

In the process during fluctuation, first in step S5901, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start fluctuation of all symbol rows. By the way, the RAM 244 is provided with an elapsed time counter for keeping track of the elapsed time from the start of the game round, and when starting the game round (more specifically, when starting the fluctuation start process), the elapsed time counter is The update will start. The effect pattern determined in the above-mentioned fluctuation start process is associated with the information of the elapsed time counter, and the MPU 242 can specify the execution timing of various effects by referring to the elapsed time counter. can. In step S5901, it is determined from this elapsed time counter and the effect pattern in the game session being executed whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing. In addition, in the following description, in the process of determining whether or not it is the timing to execute each effect, the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern are referred to, similarly to the process of step S5901.

If it is the fluctuation start timing for all symbol rows, high-speed fluctuation start processing for all symbol rows is executed in step S5902. In this process, the display lamp section 63 and the speaker section 64 are controlled in response to the start of the high-speed fluctuation display, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the symbol display device 41 displays the high-speed fluctuation display of all symbol rows. start.

After executing the process in step S5902, in the subsequent step S5903, a process to start changing the display portion KP is executed in the special display area OE. In this process, a command is output to the display control device 212 to start variable display of the display section KP in the special display area OE of the symbol display device 41. At this timing, a variable display is also started on the main display section 43 on the main controller 81 side, and a variable display is started on the main display section 43 and the special display area OE at the same time as the display section KP. After executing the process in step S5903, the changing process ends.

If it is determined in step S5901 that it is not the fluctuation start timing for all symbol rows, it is determined in step S5904 whether or not it is the deceleration timing for the upper symbol row Z1. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration process for the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S5905, and then the fluctuating process is ended. In the deceleration process, the display lamp section 63 and the speaker section 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the upper symbol row Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the upper symbol row Z1 is reduced on the symbol display device 41. Switch the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

If it is determined in step S5904 that it is not the deceleration timing for the upper symbol row Z1, it is determined in step S5906 whether or not it is the deceleration timing for the lower symbol row Z3. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration process for the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S5907, and then the process for during fluctuation is ended. In the deceleration process, the display lamp section 63 and the speaker section 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the lower symbol row Z3, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the lower symbol row Z3 is reduced on the symbol display device 41. Switch the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

If it is determined in step S5906 that it is not the deceleration timing for the lower symbol row Z3, it is determined in step S5908 whether or not it is the deceleration timing for the middle symbol row Z2. If it is the deceleration timing, the process for decelerating the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S5909, and then the process for during fluctuation is ended. In the deceleration process, the display lamp section 63 and the speaker section 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the symbol display device 41 slows down the middle symbol row Z2. Switch the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 overlaps with the timing at which the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stop, and for example, a reach line is formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3. If so, deceleration processing of the ready-to-reach medium symbol row Z2 is performed in step S5909. Such processing will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S5908 that it is not the deceleration timing for the middle symbol row Z2, it is determined in step S5910 whether or not it is the stop timing for the upper symbol row Z1. If it is the stop timing, the process for stopping the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S5911, and then the process for during fluctuation is ended. In the stop processing, the display lamp section 63 and the speaker section 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the upper symbol row Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped on the symbol display device 41. Stop the variable display.

If it is not the stop timing for the upper symbol row Z1 in step S5910, it is determined in step S5912 whether or not it is the stop timing for the lower symbol row Z3. If it is the stop timing, the process for stopping the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S5913, and then the process for during fluctuation is ended. In the stop processing, the display lamp section 63 and the speaker section 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the lower symbol row Z3, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the symbol display device 41 stops the lower symbol row Z3. Stop the variable display.

If it is not the stop timing for the lower symbol row Z3 in step S5912, it is determined in step S5914 whether or not it is the stop timing for the middle symbol row Z2. If it is the stop timing, the process for stopping the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S5915, and then the process for during fluctuation is ended. In the stop processing, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the symbol display device 41 stops the middle symbol row Z2. Stop the variable display. The stopping process for the middle symbol row Z2 will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S5914 that it is not the timing to stop the middle symbol row Z2, in step S5916, various processes for the various effects being fluctuated are executed, and then the process for the various effects being fluctuated is ended. In this process, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled based on the effect pattern set in the variation start process, and a command is output to the display control device 212 to control the effect on the symbol display device 41. make it happen.

Next, the deceleration process of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S5909 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 91.

In step S6001, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to the reach display. If it is a game round in which the ready-to-reach display does not occur, the process advances to step S6002, where the speed of the medium symbol row Z2 that is being displayed in high-speed fluctuation is set to medium-speed fluctuation, and then this deceleration processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S6001 that this is the game round in which the reach display occurs, the process advances to step S6003. The process after step S6003 is a process of setting the speed of the variable display of the medium symbol row Z2, which is the final variable symbol row, to one of slow fluctuation, high speed fluctuation, and super high speed fluctuation in the current reach display.

That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, after the reach display is generated by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (FIG. 92(a)), the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 as the final fluctuation symbol row is changed. 92(b), high-speed fluctuation shown in FIG. 92(c), and ultra-high-speed fluctuation shown in FIG. 92(d). The fluctuation speed is set so that high-speed fluctuation is faster than low-speed fluctuation, and ultra-high-speed fluctuation is faster than high-speed fluctuation. Moreover, the medium-speed fluctuation that is set when reach does not occur is set to be faster than the low-speed fluctuation and slower than the high-speed fluctuation. More specifically, low-speed fluctuation is a speed that advances by 0.5 frames (symbols) in 1 sec, medium-speed fluctuation is a speed that advances by 1 frame (symbol) in 1 sec, and high-speed fluctuation is a speed that advances by 5 frames (symbols) in 1 sec. (symbols), and ultra-high-speed fluctuation is a speed that advances by 10 frames (symbols) in 1 sec.

If it is determined in step S6001 that reach has occurred, it is determined in step S6003 whether or not a high speed flag is set. As already explained, the high speed flag is a flag that is set when there is one or two pending information on the second ball entry section at the start of a game round that usually results in a jackpot during a high-precision gaming state. . If not set, the process advances to step S6004, and it is determined whether the super high speed flag is set. As already explained, the ultra-high speed flag is a flag that is set when the hold information on the second ball entry section side is 0 at the start of a game round that usually results in a jackpot during a high-precision gaming state. If it has not been set, the process proceeds to step S6005, where the speed of the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is set to low speed variation, and the present deceleration process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6003, and it is a game round that results in a normal jackpot during the high-probability gaming state, and the pending information on the second ball entry section side is 1 or 2, in step S6006, The speed of the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is set to high-speed fluctuation. After that, in step S6007, the first correction process of the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 is executed, and then the main deceleration process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 93, in this embodiment, out of the variable display time before fixed display in each game round, there is a period during which variable display of each symbol row is performed, and a period when each symbol row is stopped before fixed display. The period during which the current state (temporary stop, result display, result notification) is maintained is set in each variable display time. For example, in a game round in which the variable display time is set as 20 seconds, normally, after the variable display is performed for 18 seconds, the result is displayed for 2 seconds, and then the final display is performed. As already explained, in the temporary stop, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 makes slight reciprocating movements, or at least a part of the character such as an octopus (see FIG. 6) forming the main symbol or the sub symbol is moving. At first glance, the symbol appears to be stationary, but it is displayed in such a way that it remains incompletely stationary (stationary display). Then, after a period (2 seconds) during which the result display as a temporary stop has elapsed, a final display is performed so that the character is completely stopped without any of the above-mentioned reciprocating slight movements or movements of the character.

Further, for example, when the variable display time is 30 seconds in normal times, the variable display is performed for 28 seconds, then the result is displayed for 2 seconds, and then the final display is performed. Further, when the variable display time is 60 seconds, the variable display is performed for 58 seconds, the result is displayed for 2 seconds, and then the final display is performed. That is, regardless of the length of the variable display time, the result display period during which each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is temporarily stopped before the final display is uniformly 2 seconds.

On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned early result notification flag or immediate result notification flag is set, i.e., in a gaming session that usually results in a jackpot during a high-probability gaming state, and when the number of pending information is small, the above-mentioned The length of the display as a result of temporary stopping before final display changes.

In other words, in a game game where the variable display time is 20 seconds, when the previous result notification flag is set, the period during which the result display is performed is changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 6 seconds, and accordingly, the period during which the variable display continues is It is changed (shortened) from 18 seconds to 14 seconds. In addition, in a game game where the variable display time is 20 seconds, if the immediate result notification flag is set, the period during which the result display is performed will be changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 12 seconds, and the period during which the variable display continues will be changed accordingly. It is changed (shortened) from 18 seconds to 8 seconds.

In a game game where the variable display time is 30 seconds, when the previous result notification flag is set, the period during which the result is displayed is changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 6 seconds, and accordingly the period during which the variable display continues is from 28 seconds. It is changed (shortened) to 24 seconds. In addition, in a game game where the variable display time is 30 seconds, if the immediate result notification flag is set, the period during which the result display is performed will be changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 12 seconds, and accordingly, the period during which the variable display continues will be It is changed (shortened) from 28 seconds to 18 seconds.

In a game game where the variable display time is 60 seconds, when the previous result notification flag is set, the period during which the result is displayed is changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 6 seconds, and the period during which the variable display continues is changed from 58 seconds. It is changed (shortened) to 54 seconds. In addition, in a game game where the variable display time is 60 seconds, if the immediate result notification flag is set, the period during which the result display is performed will be changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 12 seconds, and the period during which the variable display continues will be changed accordingly. It is changed (shortened) from 58 seconds to 48 seconds.

Returning to the explanation of the deceleration process (FIG. 91) for the middle symbol row Z2, in the first correction process of step S6007, the variable display time of the current game round is grasped, and the variable display time is set not 2 seconds before the end timing of the variable display time. , a process is performed to correct the stop timing so that the variable display ends so that the middle symbol row Z2 stops before 6 seconds (first predetermined period).

If it is determined in step S6004 that the ultra-high speed flag is set, and it is a game round that results in a normal jackpot during a high-probability gaming state, and the pending information on the second ball entry section side is 0, In step S6008, the speed of the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is set to ultra-high speed fluctuation. After that, in step S6009, the second correction process of the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 is executed, and then the main deceleration process is ended.

In the second correction process of step S6009, the variable display time of the current game round is grasped, and the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped not 2 seconds before the end timing of the variable display time but 12 seconds (second predetermined period) before the end timing of the variable display time. Processing is performed to correct the stop timing so that the variable display ends.

In this way, by changing the speed of the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 in the reach display, the middle symbol row Z2 can be stopped until the final stop position without changing the final stop position of the middle symbol row Z2. The design can be changed. Here, during the high-precision gaming state, the period from when the middle symbol row Z2 moves to the final stop position and the result display starts until the final display starts, that is, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is temporarily changed. During the period when the game is stopped, the expected number of game balls that will be fired when aiming at the second operating port 134 is approximately 3 game balls that will be fired during the normal 2 sec result display period ( 0.6 sec x 3), of which 0 to 1 winnings can be expected, but during the 6 sec result display period when the previous result is announced, about 10 game balls are fired (0.6 sec x 10 ), three or more of them can be expected to win, and the expected number of balls to hit will increase. In addition, during the 12-second result display period during which instant results are announced, approximately 20 game balls are fired (0.6 seconds x 20), of which 6 or more can be expected to win, and the expected number of balls to land will further increase. To increase. As a result, time is secured in the case where the player attempts to obtain the reservation information on the second ball entry section side after the result notification is performed and it is understood that the high-precision gaming state ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the game round in which each reach display is performed, the time required for the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 to stop and the reach line to be formed is determined by the second correction in the immediate result notification. It is set to ensure a period for displaying the results when processing is performed. For example, in a game round where a reach display is performed when the shortest variable display time is 20 seconds, it takes until the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stop to form a reach line. The time is set to be shorter than 6 seconds. Therefore, by performing the second correction process as an immediate result notification, the inconvenience that the middle symbol row Z2 may stop before the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 does not occur.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the process for stopping the medium symbol row Z2, which is carried out in step S5915 in the process for during fluctuation. In addition, in the process for during fluctuation, in the process of determining the stop timing of the medium symbol row in step S5914, the stop timing is determined based on the results of the first correction process and the second correction process.

First, in step S6101, a process is performed to stop the medium symbol row Z2 which is changing. After that, in step S6102, as a result notification process, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently moves back and forth, or at least a part of a character such as an octopus forming the main symbol or the sub symbol is moving. I do. That is, the display of the result as a temporary stop is started by the processing in steps S6101 and S6102.

In the following step S6103, it is determined whether the high speed flag is set. If the high speed flag is set, the high speed flag is erased in step S6104, and then the first driving notification is set in step S6105, and the main stop processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), the first hitting notification is that if the game round ends as it is, the high-frequency support mode will end and the second ball entry club will win or lose (distribute lottery). Make an unfavorable suggestion YB indicating that you will no longer be able to receive the offer. As the non-advantageous suggestion YB, for example, while pointing to the pending number display area Da to make the player aware that the number of pending information is small, the characters ``It's bad, it's bad'' are displayed, and the player is informed that the game round will end in this state. Indicates a disadvantage. In addition, in the first input notification, the remaining time until the end of the game round, that is, the remaining period until the end of the game round and the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, is displayed over time. Perform remaining time display ZK. For example, in a rectangular image, the remaining time display ZK is set so that the color changes over time from one side to the left and right, and when the remaining time reaches 0, the color of the entire rectangle changes, so that the remaining time can be visually displayed. Make it easy to understand. The non-advantageous suggestion YB and the remaining time display ZK are displayed at positions that do not overlap with the result displays (symbol combinations that notify jackpot results) of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. As a result, in addition to the game results that would normally result in a jackpot, the player will also be informed that once the current game round ends, he will no longer be able to receive the winning/failure lottery (distribution lottery) on the second ball entry side, and the remaining time until then. can be clearly understood.

Returning to the explanation of the stopping process for the middle symbol row Z2, if it is determined in step S6103 that the high speed flag is not set, it is determined in step S6106 whether or not the super high speed flag is set. If the ultra-high speed flag is not set, the main stop processing is immediately terminated. If the ultra-high speed flag is set, processing to erase the ultra-high speed flag is performed in step S6107. Thereafter, in step S6108, a second drive notification is set, and the main stop processing is ended.

As the second input notification, as shown in FIG. 95(b), in addition to the above-mentioned non-advantageous suggestion YB and remaining time display ZK, a low-frequency transition notification DE that explicitly indicates that the high-frequency support mode ends is performed. In the low-frequency shift notification DE, the general name of the high-frequency support mode is "Electric support", and a message "Electric support ended" is displayed. The low-frequency shift notification DE is also displayed at a position that does not overlap with the result display (combination of symbols that notify jackpot results) of each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

In this embodiment, the flow of the game when early result notification or immediate result notification is performed will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 96.

When the performance time during which the variable display of the game round started at timing ta1 is performed has elapsed at timing ta2, the result display as the result of the game round is performed and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped. Then, after the result display (result notification) ends, final display starts at timing ta3 when the variable display time from timing ta1 has elapsed. Then, the final display time elapses at timing ta4. In this case, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 varies from timing ta1 to timing ta2, but is stopped (temporarily stopped) from timing ta2 to timing ta4. On the other hand, in the main display section 43, timing ta1 to timing ta3 fluctuate, and timing ta3 to timing ta4 are stopped.

If the current game round is in a high-precision game state (high-frequency support mode) and the game result is a normal jackpot result, when the opening/closing execution mode starts at timing ta4, the support mode changes to low-frequency support mode. Transition. When the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing ta5, since the opening/closing execution mode is based on the normal jackpot result as described above, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the low frequency support mode. As a result, even if a game ball is fired aiming at the second operating port 134, it is difficult to hit the second operating port 134, and instead of the winning lottery on the second ball entering section side, the first ball entering section side ( 1 operation port 133 side)), it becomes necessary to switch to a game in which a lottery is performed.

In this case, the period from when the result of the current game round is announced until the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, that is, from when the shift to the low-frequency support mode is announced until the low-frequency support mode The period until the transition is from timing ta2 to timing ta4 is 2 seconds (temporary stop period) + 0.7 seconds (final display period) in this embodiment.

On the other hand, if the current game round is in a high-probability game state and the game result is a normal jackpot result, and the previous result is notified, the performance time has elapsed for the game round that started at timing tb1. At timing tb2, display of the result as a temporary stop is started, and at timing tb3, the variable display time of the current game round has elapsed. Then, after the final display time from timing tb3 to timing tb4, the opening/closing execution mode is started.

In this case, the period from when the result of the current game round is announced until the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, that is, from when the shift to the low-frequency support mode is announced until the low-frequency support mode The period until the transition is from timing tb2 to timing tb4 is the period from timing tb2 to timing tb4, and although timing tb3 and timing tb4 are the same as timing ta3 and timing ta4, timing tb2 is set earlier than timing ta2. There is. Therefore, in this embodiment, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb4 is 6 seconds (temporary stop period) + 0.7 seconds (final display period), which is longer than the period from timing ta2 to timing t4, and is used for low-frequency support. A grace period is ensured for entering the second operating port 134 after the player knows that the mode will be shifted to.

In the case where the current game round is in a high-probability game state and the game result is a normal jackpot result, if immediate result notification is performed, the game round started at timing tc1 is set at timing tc2 when the presentation time has elapsed. The result display as a temporary stop is started at , and the variable display time of the current game round has elapsed at timing tc3. Then, after the final display time from timing tc3 to timing tc4, the opening/closing execution mode is started.

In this case, the period from when the result of the current game round is announced until the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, that is, from when the shift to the low-frequency support mode is announced until the low-frequency support mode The period until the transition is from timing tc2 to timing tc4, and although timing tc3 and timing tc4 are the same as timings ta3 and tb3 and timings ta4 and tb4, timing tc2 is longer than timing ta2 and tb2. It is set as early timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, the period from timing tc2 to timing tc4 is 12 seconds (temporary stop period) + 0.7 seconds (final display period), and is the same as the period from timing ta2 to timing t4 and the period from timing tb2 to timing tb4. This is longer than the period, and a grace period for entering the second operating port 134 after knowing that the game will shift to the low-frequency support mode is ensured.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the gaming state shifts to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the current gaming state based on the gaming result, the gaming result is notified before the gaming result is notified in a normal gaming round. And so. By doing this, it is possible to know in advance that the game will shift to a disadvantageous gaming state for the player, and then prepare for it (prepare to obtain a hold, prepare mentally, etc.).

If the number of pending information on the second ball entry section that is subject to the support mode is less than the upper limit in the game round of the game result (normal jackpot result) that becomes the low-frequency support state during the high-frequency support mode, The system is configured to notify the player of the game result first and then to notify the transition to the low-frequency support mode. As a result, if we do not obtain the pending information of the second ball entry section during this game round, we will lose the opportunity to receive the lottery for the second ball entry section, so we do not want to lose out. This can stir up the player's feelings and motivate him to shoot the game ball at the second operating port 134. In other words, as described above, by aiming at the second operating port 134, the second input port 134, which is the target of the support mode, is The suspension information on the club side will be stored up to the upper limit, making it possible to feel that it is a good deal to be able to fully enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode.

The winning/failure lottery (allocation lottery) on the side of the second ball entry section is made more advantageous to the player than that on the side of the first ball entry section. As a result, it becomes possible to further arouse the feeling that it is a waste to lose the opportunity to participate in the lottery on the side of the second ball entry club.

When performing advance result notification or immediate result notification, the fluctuation speed of the final fluctuation symbol row Z2 is changed to adjust the period until the symbols of the corresponding medium symbol row Z2 fluctuate to the stop position. Thereby, there is no need to change the stop result, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load when changing the performance due to early result notification or immediate result notification.

The first operating port 133 from which the reservation information on the first ball entry section is acquired and the second operating port 134 from which the reservation information on the second ball entry section is obtained are arranged so that they can be used separately in the gaming area PE. And so. More specifically, when the game ball is fired aiming at the first operation port 133, the game ball does not reach or is difficult to reach the second operation port 134, and the game ball is fired aiming at the second operation port 134. In this case, the game balls are arranged so that they do not reach or are difficult to reach the first operating port 133. This increases the rarity of the high-frequency support mode in which pending information on the second ball entry club side is acquired, and improves the significance of early result notification and immediate result notification in game rounds that transition to the low-frequency support mode. Can be done. That is, for example, in a configuration in which the game ball easily reaches the second operation port 134 in a situation where the game ball is fired aiming at the first operation port 133 (for example, the gauge of the first embodiment), the low frequency support Even in the mode, winnings to the second operating port 134 will occur extremely rarely, and as mentioned above, it is advantageous to acquire the pending information on the second ball entry section side up to the upper limit just before the end of the high-frequency support mode. This is because there is a possibility that it will fade.

Since the variable prize winning device 132 is arranged in the lower area PE4, even when the game ball is fired aiming at the left side area PE2 or when the game ball is fired aiming at the right side area PE3. , it is possible to generate a prize in the variable prize winning device 132. Therefore, as described above, by aiming at the second operating port 134 just before the end of the high-frequency support mode, the inconvenience of losing the winning opportunity to the variable winning device 132 does not occur.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game ball that has won a prize in the variable winning device 132 is guided to the V winning area 356, so that the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. If the player cannot enter the variable winning device 132 to win at the timing when the player can be guided to the V winning area 356, the player will suffer a great disadvantage. Therefore, by doing the above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is not won in the V winning area 356 due to aiming too much at the second operating port 134, so that the player does not suffer any disadvantage. You can do it like this.

In the above embodiment, the timing at which the result display as a temporary stop is started is changed by changing the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2, but the point is that the timing at which the result display is started is changed (earlier). Any structure may be used as long as the variation speed of the other symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is changed, or the structure may be such that the variation speed is suddenly stopped without changing the variation speed and the result display is started.

Although the decision to notify the advance result or the immediate result is made at the start of the game round, it may be made in the middle of the game round. In this case, for example, the number of pending information on the second ball entry section side is grasped at the timing of performing the deceleration process of the middle symbol row Z2, and the early result notification or immediate result notification is performed according to the number. good.

Also in this embodiment, it is possible to apply the configuration of changing the fixed display time as in each of the above embodiments.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 97, in the stop start processing on the main controller 81 side, the high frequency support mode is set by increasing the confirmation display time of the game round that is the normal jackpot result during the high probability gaming state. A configuration may also be adopted in which the timing of transition from to the low-frequency support mode is delayed.

Specifically, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the high probability gaming state is in progress. If the game is not in a high certainty gaming state, in step S6202, the first confirmation display time is set to 0.2 sec, which is the normal time. On the other hand, if the game is in a high-probability gaming state, it is determined in step S6203 whether or not the current game result is a normal jackpot result. If it is not a normal jackpot result, the first confirmed display time for normal times is set in step S6202. If it is a normal jackpot result, the process advances to step S6204, and a process is performed to grasp the number of pending information on the second ball entry section side. Then, in step S6205, it is determined whether the number of pending information on the second ball entry section side is two or less, and if there are three or four, the process advances to step S6202. If the number is 2 or less, it is determined in step S6206 whether the number is 0. If the number is not 0 but 1 or 2, the current first confirmed display time is set to 4.7 seconds in step S6207. On the other hand, if the number is 0, the current first confirmed display time is set to 10.2 seconds in step S6208.

After executing the processing in step S6202, step S6207, or step S6208, the first confirmation display start processing is performed in step S6209, and then the stop start processing is ended.

In the above configuration, when the first fixed display time of 0.2 seconds is set in step S6202, the variable display time ends after each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is temporarily stopped and the result display starts. The sum of the 2 seconds up to this point, the first confirmed display time (0.2 seconds), and the second confirmed display time (0.5 seconds) is 2.7 seconds. On the other hand, if the first fixed display time of 4.2 seconds is set in step S6207, the 2 seconds from when each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is temporarily stopped and the result display starts until the variable display time ends The sum of the first confirmed display time (4.2 sec) and the second confirmed display time (0.5 sec) is 6.7 sec, which is the same length period as when the previous result notification is performed in the above embodiment. becomes. In addition, if the first fixed display time of 10.2 seconds is set in step S6208, the 2 seconds from when each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is temporarily stopped and the result display starts until the variable display time ends. The sum of the first confirmed display time (10.2 sec) and the second confirmed display time (0.5 sec) is 12.7 sec, which is the same length period as when immediate result notification is performed in the above embodiment. becomes. This makes it possible to secure a grace period for acquiring the reservation information on the second ball entry club side.

Further, according to this modification, in the game round in which the mode is to be shifted to the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to substantially delay the timing of shifting to the low-frequency support mode. That is, in the fifth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the transition to the low-frequency support mode is notified first without changing the variable display time or the fixed display time, but in this modification, the fixed display time is not changed. By extending the display time, the timing at which the current game result is reflected, that is, the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode starts is delayed. By doing this, when the high-frequency support mode that is advantageous for the player ends, the start of the opening/closing execution mode is delayed if there is little pending information on the second ball entrance side that is the target of the support mode. By doing so, it is possible to extend the high-frequency support mode by that much and secure a period during which the hold information on the second ball entry club side is acquired.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, a new gaming experience is realized by utilizing the configuration in the modified example of the fifth embodiment that changes the timing at which game results are reflected according to the number of reservations. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the V operation processing in this embodiment. The V operation process is a process for displacing the shutter 358 of the variable prize winning device 132 in the fifth embodiment. The V operation process is activated in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

The game board of this embodiment is substantially the same as the game board 24 of the first embodiment, and the variable winning device 32 of the first embodiment is replaced with the variable winning device 132 of the fifth embodiment. The configuration has been replaced. That is, each operating port is constituted by an operating port unit 33, and the game ball that has flowed into the upper operating port 33a enters the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e.

As for the jackpot result, the type of jackpot result is determined with reference to the distribution table in the first embodiment. In other words, a type 1 jackpot result that will result in a 16-round round game and a type 2 jackpot result that will result in a 4-round round game are set. Even if it is distributed, it will be set to high frequency support mode 100 times after opening/closing execution mode. However, the level of the win/fail lottery mode is determined by whether or not a V winning occurs during the opening/closing execution mode, that is, whether or not game balls flow into the V winning area 356 in the variable winning device 132. Ru.

In step S6301, it is determined whether the V cycle measurement flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The V cycle measurement flag is a flag that is set when the conditions for operating the shutter 358 of the variable winning device 132 are established (when a confirmation of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is given), and the V cycle measurement flag After the flag is set, the shutter 358 is switched to the mode of guiding the player to the V winning area 356 at a predetermined cycle. If the V period measurement flag is not set, the V operation process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the V period measurement flag is set, the process advances to step S6302.

In step S6302, a process of subtracting 1 from the V cycle counter VS is executed. The V cycle counter is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the period after the V cycle measurement flag is set. In this embodiment, when the V cycle measurement flag is set, "7500" is input. (equivalent to 30 seconds).

In step S6303, it is determined whether or not the V cycle counter VS has reached 0, and if it is not 0, the V operation process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6303 that the V cycle counter is 0, in step S6304 the shutter 358 moves to the V winning area 356 by determining the driving state of the shutter drive unit 359. It is determined whether the mode is such that the ball is guided. If the drive unit 359 for the shutter is not under drive control and is guided to the ejection area 357 instead of the V winning area 356, in step S6305, the drive unit 359 for the shutter starts to be driven. By doing so, the shutter 358 is switched to the mode of guiding the game ball to the V winning area 356. Then, in step S6306, a process of inputting "250" into the V cycle counter VS is performed, and then the present V operation process is ended. The value input in step S6306 corresponds to a period of time during which the shutter 358 is held in a mode that guides it to the V winning area 356, and corresponds to 1 sec in this embodiment.

In step S6304, if the shutter drive unit 359 is under drive control and the shutter 358 is in a mode of guiding the game ball to the V winning area 356, the process advances to step S6307. In step S6307, the shutter 358 is switched to the mode of guiding the shutter 358 to the discharge area 357 by ending the drive of the shutter drive unit 359. Then, in step S6308, the V cycle measurement flag is erased, and then the main V operation process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, the switching of the shutter 358 occurs 30 seconds after the final notification of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is performed, and the mode is such that the user is guided to the V winning area 356, and this state lasts for 1 second. After being maintained for a period of time, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the discharge area 357.

In this embodiment, the confirmation notification of transition to the opening/closing execution mode refers to the confirmation display shown in each of the above embodiments. That is, switching between the mode of being guided to the V winning area 356 and the mode of being guided to the ejection area 357 is performed at a predetermined cycle after the confirmation display is started.

FIG. 99(a) is a flowchart showing the stop start process in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, in step S6401, processing is executed to grasp the current common reservation number CRN. Then, in step S6402, processing is performed to set the first confirmed display time according to the common reservation number CRN. This process corresponds to a modification of the fifth embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the first confirmed display time is set based on the tables shown in FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b).

As a table for determining the first confirmed display time, a table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 100(a) and a table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 100(b) are provided. In step S6402, a table corresponding to the level of the win/fail lottery mode is acquired and the first confirmed display time is determined.

In the table for the low probability mode, when the game result is a losing result, the first confirmed display time of 0.2 seconds is uniformly set regardless of the value of the common reservation number CRN. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot result, if the common pending number CRN is 1 to 3, 20 sec is set, if it is 4 to 6, 15 sec is set, and the larger the pending number, the first The final display time is set to be short. When the common reservation number CRN is 7 to 8, the first confirmed display time is set to 0.5 seconds, and if the value of the common reservation number CRN is at the upper limit (8) or near the upper limit, In some cases, the first confirmed display time is set to be even shorter.

In the table in high probability mode, if the game result is a wrong result, the first confirmation display of 0.2 seconds is uniformly displayed, regardless of the value of the common reservation number CRN, as in the table for the low probability mode above. The time is set. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot result, if the common reservation number CRN is 1 to 6, the first confirmed display time is set as in the table for the low probability mode above, and it is 1 to 3. If there are 4 to 6 pieces, 15 seconds is set. When the common reservation number CRN is 7 to 8, the first confirmed display time is set to 0.5 sec or 15 sec. The time to be set is determined by lottery; for example, 0.5 sec is set with a 50% probability, and 15 sec is set with a 50% probability.

Returning to the explanation of the process at the start of the stop, after executing the process of setting the first confirmed display time according to the win/fail lottery mode, the game result, and the value of the common reservation number CRN in step S6402, in step S6403 , performs the first confirmation display start process. Thereafter, in step S6404, V distribution start processing is executed, and then the stop start processing is ended.

In the V distribution start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 99(b), it is determined in step S6501 whether the current game round is a game round with a jackpot result. If the result is not a jackpot, the process for starting the V distribution is immediately terminated. If it is a game round with a jackpot result, in step S6502, a process is performed in which the V cycle counter VS is set to "7500" (corresponding to 30 seconds). Then, in step S6503, the V cycle measurement flag is set, and then the main V distribution start process ends. Through this process, an affirmative determination is made in step S6301 in the V operation process (FIG. 98), and drive control of the shutter drive unit 359 in the variable prize winning device 132 is started.

In the gaming state transition process (FIG. 16) in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S803 that there is a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is set as 15 seconds in the opening process of step S804. do. Then, in the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S806, a round game is started in which winnings to the variable winning device 132 are allowed based on the opening period having passed.

The manner in which V winnings occur in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 101. Note that the following description assumes a situation where the mode is low probability mode.

First, the opening/closing execution mode executed when the common reservation number CRN is 1 to 3 will be described. When the fluctuating display of game times that started at timing ta1 ends at timing ta2 and the confirmed display starts, if the common pending number CRN is small (1 to 3), the first confirmed display time is set to 20 seconds (see FIG. 100(a)). As in each of the embodiments described above, the second final display time is set to 0.5 seconds, so the total final display time is set to 20.5 seconds. The opening/closing execution mode is started at timing ta3 when the final display time has elapsed. In the opening/closing execution mode, since 15 seconds is set as the opening period as described above, the first round game starts at timing ta6 when the opening period elapses, and winnings in the variable winning device 132 are allowed. .

As described above, the switching control to allocate to either the V winning area 356 or the discharging area 357 is performed at a predetermined cycle after the final notification of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made. That is, at timing ta4, which is 30 seconds after timing ta2, which is the start timing of the first confirmation display, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the V winning area 356, and after this mode is maintained for 1 second, the timing At ta5, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the discharge area 357.

In this case, winning to the variable winning device 132 is not allowed at the timing (timing ta4 to timing ta5) in which the winning game ball is guided to the V winning area 356 side. Therefore, in this opening/closing execution mode, virtually no inflow of game balls into the V winning area 356 (V winning) occurs, and the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a low probability mode. That will happen.

On the other hand, when the fluctuating display of game times that started at timing tb1 ends at timing tb2 and the confirmed display starts, if the common pending number CRN is large (7 to 8), the first confirmed display The time is set to 0.5 sec, which is shorter than when the common reservation number CRN is small (see FIG. 100(a)). In this case, a total of 1.0 sec will be set as the final display time. At timing tb3 when the fixed display time has elapsed, the opening/closing execution mode is started, and at timing tb4 when the opening period of 15 seconds has elapsed, the first round game is started, and winnings in the variable winning device 132 are allowed. Ru.

As in the case of timing ta2 above, switching control to allocate to either the V winning area 356 or the discharging area 357 is performed at a predetermined cycle after the confirmation notification of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is performed. be exposed. That is, at timing tb5, which is 30 seconds after timing tb2, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the V winning area 356, and this mode is maintained for 1 second, and then, at timing tb6, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the V winning area 357. The mode can be changed to

In this case, at the timing (timing tb5 to timing tb6) in which the winning game ball is guided to the V winning area 356 side, winning to the variable winning device 132 is allowed. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode this time, an influx of game balls (V winning) into the V winning area 356 will actually occur, and the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. That will happen.

As described above, by changing the occurrence or non-occurrence of V winnings during the opening/closing execution mode according to the number of common reservations CRN of the game round in which the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the number of reservations and the high probability mode It is possible to create new gameplay that is associated with the set probability. For example, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the occurrence of a V winning in the low probability mode occurs when a confirmation of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made in a situation where the common reservation number CRN is 7 to 8 pieces. Therefore, if the common reservation number CRN is used for this division, the V winning probability in the low probability mode is 25%. On the other hand, the occurrence of a V winning prize in the high probability mode occurs with a probability of 50% when the confirmation of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is notified in a situation where the common reservation number CRN is 7 to 8 pieces. Therefore, by dividing by the common reservation number CRN, the V winning probability in the high probability mode is 12.5%, which is lower than in the low probability mode.

On the other hand, the common reservation number CRN increases or decreases depending on the level of support mode. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, support by the electric accessory 34 of the lower operating port 33b occurs frequently, so winnings on the second ball entry part 33e side are more likely to occur, and as a result, The value of the common reservation number CRN tends to be close to the upper limit value. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, since support by the electric accessories 34 cannot be expected, winnings are mainly won via the upper operating port 33a. Therefore, it can be said that the value of the common reservation number CRN is unlikely to be close to the upper limit value. Then, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the result is a jackpot, V winning is unlikely to occur, so the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is likely to be set to the low probability mode, and the high-frequency support In the case of a jackpot result in the mode, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is likely to be set to the high probability mode because V winning is likely to occur.

In this way, by associating the occurrence rate of V winnings with the common reservation number CRN, it is possible to vary the occurrence rate of V winnings depending on the state where the value of the common reservation number CRN tends to increase or decrease. .

Since the common reservation number CRN is the total value of the number of reservation information on the first ball entry section 33d side and the number of reservation information on the second ball entry section 33e side, the number of reservation information on the second ball entry section 33e side Even in the high-frequency support mode where it is easy to accumulate prizes, in order for the value of the common reservation number CRN to be close to the upper limit value, it is necessary to generate a prize in the upper operation opening 33a. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the V winning rate is determined based on the number of pending information on the second ball entry section 33e side, the difficulty level of generating a V winning (setting a short first confirmed display time) is increased, and the game quality is improved. It becomes possible to improve the

The ease with which pending information can be stored may also vary depending on the variable display time of each game. FIG. 102 shows a variable display time table for reach occurrence.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the low-frequency support mode (normal gaming state), the variable display time set when a reach occurs is, for example, 30 sec, 60 sec, or 90 sec, depending on the value of the variable type counter CS. is set. Different reach displays are associated with each variable display time depending on the length of the variable display time. For example, for a variable display time of 30 seconds, Normal Reach A, Normal Reach B, and Normal Reach C are set, and these Normal Reach A to C each have the production content and the expectation level of the jackpot result (selection rate selected at the time of jackpot). ) are set differently. Further, super reach is set for variable display times of 60 seconds and 90 seconds. Super reach is a reach display that is set so that the expectation of a jackpot result is higher than normal reach, and for example, the content of the reach display is set to be an advanced version of normal reach. Super reach A is set for a variable display time of 60 seconds, and super reach B is set for a variable display time of 90 seconds. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are set to differ in the level of expectation of a jackpot result and the content of the performance, and the level of expectation for a jackpot is set to be higher in Super Reach B than in Super Reach A.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102(b), in the high frequency support mode (high certainty gaming state), the variable display time set when a reach occurs is, for example, 3 seconds, 15 seconds is set. Even in the high-frequency support mode, different reach displays are associated depending on the length of the fluctuating display time. For example, a short reach is set for a fluctuating display time of 3 seconds, and a fluctuating display time of 15 seconds is set. A long reach is set for time. The short reach and the long reach are, for example, different reaches in which the period in which the medium symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner after the upper and lower reach lines are formed is different. Furthermore, between the short reach and the long reach, the long reach is set so that the expectation of a jackpot result is higher.

Incidentally, the variable display time set in the variable display time table for reach occurrence is set longer than the variable display time set in the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence. Further, the above variable display time table for reaching occurrence is referred to when the result is a miss. In the variable display time table for reach occurrence that is referred to when the result is a jackpot, the value of the variable type counter CS assigned to each variable display time (each reach display) is different, and the reach display with a long variable display time is different. , the value of the variation type counter CS is assigned so that it is more likely to be selected than in the case where the result is an outlier.

As described above, when a ready-to-win event occurs, in which the variable display time of a game round is longer than usual, the speed at which pending information is digested is slowed down. In other words, pending information is likely to accumulate due to reach occurrence.

In particular, the reach display with a long variable display time is set so that the expectation of jackpot is higher, so it is possible to accumulate pending information based on the reach display that can be expected to result in a jackpot. There is. In other words, the more likely a jackpot is expected to be displayed, the more advantageous it is to the player to store up to the upper limit of the common reservation number CRN. By doing this, for example, depending on the content of the reach display, even a player who is certain of a jackpot result can be induced to fire the game ball and obtain the pending information, and the player can be induced to fire the game ball and obtain the pending information. This makes it possible to prevent so-called stopping strikes.

The ease with which pending information is stored differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and it is easier to store pending information in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. However, the pending information is digested faster in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. Then, even in the high frequency support mode, an event may occur where the common reservation number CRN is not the upper limit value at the time of a jackpot. In particular, the reach display in high-frequency support mode was set to be shorter than the reach display in low-frequency support mode, so after the reach display started in high-frequency support mode, there was no attempt to hastily obtain pending information. However, there is a possibility that the common reservation number CRN will not reach the upper limit by the end of the reach display (end of the game round). By doing so, in the high-frequency support mode, the game can be played with the common reservation number CRN close to the upper limit value, and so-called stop play can be suppressed.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the first confirmed display time is set in relation to the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. FIG. 103 shows a validity table and a distribution table in this embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), in this embodiment, in addition to the jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed, a special losing result and a normal losing result are set as the result of the winning lottery. has been done. When the result of the winning lottery is a special winning result and a normal winning result, neither of them shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, but the set lengths of the first confirmed display time are different.

In the low-probability mode win/fail table that is referenced in the low-probability lottery mode, as shown in FIG. 103(a), the first confirmed display time is 24. 5 seconds is set. On the other hand, for normal results that are distributed relatively frequently, the first confirmed display time is set to 0.2 seconds. It should be noted that the first confirmed display time set for a normal winning result is the same length as the first confirmed display time set for a jackpot result, and a fixed display time of 0.2 seconds is set for a jackpot result.

In the high probability mode win/fail table that is referred to in the high probability lottery mode, the same first confirmed display time is set for each result, as shown in FIG. 103(b). Specifically, 0.2 sec is set as the first confirmed display time for any of the jackpot results, special losing results, and normal losing results. In other words, the same first confirmation display time is set for the jackpot result and the normal winning result regardless of the high or low winning/losing lottery mode, while for the special winning result, if the winning/failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, .5 sec is set, and in the high probability mode, 0.2 sec is set, and the first confirmed display time set differs depending on the level of the winning/failure lottery mode.

Note that the second confirmation display time is constant regardless of the level of the win/fail lottery mode and the game result, and is set to 0.5 seconds in both cases.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the jackpot results are distributed to the first type jackpot result A, the first type jackpot result B, the second type jackpot result A, and the second type jackpot result. B is provided. The first type jackpot results A and B correspond to the above-mentioned first type jackpot results, and both are game results that shift to the opening/closing execution mode in which a 16-round round game is executed. Further, the second type jackpot results A and B correspond to the above-mentioned second type jackpot results, and both are game results that shift to the opening/closing execution mode in which a four-round round game is executed.

The difference between the first type jackpot result A and the first type jackpot result B, and between the second type jackpot result A and the second type jackpot result B is the length of the opening time in the opening/closing execution mode. That is, in the opening process of step S804 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 16), if the first type jackpot result A or the second type jackpot result A, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is set as 15.0 seconds. . On the other hand, if it is the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is set as 24.3 seconds.

In this case, if the first type jackpot result A or the second type jackpot result A, the total of the first confirmed display time, second confirmed display time, and opening time will be 15.7 seconds (0.2 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 15.0 seconds). The period from when the final display of these results is started until the variable prize winning device 32 is released is 15.7 seconds. In addition, in the case of type 1 jackpot result B or type 2 jackpot result B, the total of the first confirmed display time, second confirmed display time and opening time is 25.0 seconds (0.2 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 24.3 seconds). The period from when the final display of these results is started until the variable prize winning device 32 is released is 25.0 seconds.

As a result, in the case of a special winning result in the low probability mode, the period from the start of the confirmation display of the special winning result until the start of the next game, as well as the first type jackpot result B and the second In the case of the seed jackpot result B, the period from when the confirmation display of these results is started until the variable prize winning device 32 is released corresponds to the same length period (25.0 sec).

Next, the fluctuation start process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 104. As already explained, the fluctuation start process is a process carried out in step S506 in the game time control process (FIG. 13) as a process on the main controller 81 side, and by this process, the fluctuation display on the main display section 43 is Patterns and stop results are set.

In this embodiment, in steps S6501 to S6506, similar to the processes in steps S701 to S706 described above, a win/fail determination process, a type determination process when winning a jackpot, and a stop result setting process for each jackpot are performed. In addition, in step S6504, it is determined whether it is either the 1st type jackpot result A or the 1st type jackpot result B, and if it is either, the 1st type jackpot result A is determined in step S6505. And a stop result setting process for the first type jackpot result B is performed. In step S6505, if it is the first type jackpot result A, a stop result corresponding to the first type jackpot result A is set, and if it is the first type jackpot result B, a stop result corresponding to the first type jackpot result B is set. Set the stop result. These stop results corresponding to the first type jackpot result A and the stop results corresponding to the first type jackpot result B are visually distinguishable from each other.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S6504, a stop result setting process for the second type jackpot result A and the second type jackpot result B is performed in step S6506. Then, in step S6506, if it is the second type jackpot result A, a stop result corresponding to the second type jackpot result A is set, and if it is the second type jackpot result B, the stop result corresponding to the second type jackpot result B is set. Set the corresponding stop result. These stop results corresponding to the second type jackpot result A and the stop results corresponding to the second type jackpot result B are visually distinguishable from each other. In addition, the stop results corresponding to the 2nd type jackpot result A and the stop results corresponding to the 2nd type jackpot result B are visually different from the stop results corresponding to the 1st type jackpot result A and the 1st type jackpot result B. Distinguishably different.

If it is determined in step S6502 that it is not a jackpot win, the process proceeds to step S6507, and it is determined whether or not it is a special winning result. If the result is not a special failure, a stop result setting process for normal failure is performed in step S6508. In step S6508, the stopping result is set so that it is visually distinguishable from the stopping result corresponding to each jackpot result.

If it is determined in step S6507 that the result is a special failure, a stop result setting process for special failure is performed in step S6509. In step S6509, the stopping results are set so as to be visually distinguishable from the stopping results corresponding to the respective jackpot results and the stopping results corresponding to the normal losses. In particular, the stopping result corresponding to the special winning result is compared with the stopping result of each jackpot result, and the stopping result corresponding to the 1st type jackpot result B or the stopping result corresponding to the 2nd type jackpot result B is The outage results are very different.

After executing any one of steps S6505, S6506, S6508, and S6509, the same processes as steps S708 to S710 described above are executed in steps S6510 to S6512.

That is, in this embodiment, compared to the first embodiment described above, there are first type jackpot result A and first type jackpot result B as the first type jackpot result, and there is a second type jackpot result as the second type jackpot result. There is a type jackpot result A and a second type jackpot result B. In addition, there are two types of negative results: normal negative results and special negative results. In the variation start process in this embodiment, the stop results are set so that these game results can be identified on the main display section 43.

Next, the stop start processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 105. As described above, the stop start process is a process for setting the first confirmed display time.

In step S6601, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. If the mode is not the low probability mode but the high probability mode, the process advances to step S6602, and the first confirmed display time for the current game round is set as 0.2 sec (see FIG. 103(b)). Furthermore, even if the mode is low probability mode (step S6601: YES), if it is determined in step S6602 that the result is not a particularly outlier, the first confirmed display time is set as 0.2 seconds in step S6602 (Fig. 103(a)). On the other hand, if the mode is low probability mode (step S6601: YES) and the result is a special failure (step S6603: YES), in step S6604, the first confirmation display time of the current game round is set as 24.5 seconds. Execute processing. After setting the first confirmed display time in step S6602 or step S6604, a first confirmed display start process is executed in step S6605, and then the main stop start process is ended.

Next, the opening process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 106. The opening process is a process executed on the main control device 81 side in step S804 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 16).

In step S6701, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode to be started this time is the opening/closing execution mode based on the first type jackpot result A or the second type jackpot result A. If the opening/closing execution mode is based on these jackpot results, in step S6702, the opening time of the current opening/closing execution mode is set as 15.0 seconds (see FIG. 103(c)). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6701 and the opening/closing execution mode to be started this time is the 1st type jackpot result B or the 2nd type jackpot result B, in step S6703, the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode this time is 24. Set as 3 seconds (see FIG. 103(c)). After executing the process in step S6702 or step S6703, a process to start measuring the opening time is performed in step S6704, and then the opening process ends.

Next, as a process on the notification/performance control device 82 side in the present embodiment, the stop result determination process for jackpot (of the fluctuation start process (step S1404, FIG. 27) in the fluctuation display control process (FIG. 26)) Step S1503) and the stop result determination process for reach will be explained.

In the jackpot stop result determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 107, in step S6801, it is determined whether the game result of the game round to be started this time is the 1st type jackpot result A or the 2nd type jackpot result A. Determine. In the case of these jackpot results, it is determined in step S6802 whether or not it is the first type jackpot result A. In the case of the first type jackpot result A, in step S6803, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (odd numbered main symbols) is established on one active line L1 to L5 is transferred to this game. Determined as the result of the stoppage. In addition, if it is determined in step S6802 that it is the second type jackpot result A instead of the first type jackpot result A, in step S6804, the same non-specific symbol (even number The stop result in which the combination of the main symbols (marked with the main symbols) is established is determined as the stop result of this game round.

In step S6801, if it is determined that it is neither the 1st type jackpot result A nor the 2nd type jackpot result A, that is, the game result of the game round to start this time is the 1st type jackpot result B or the 2nd type jackpot result B. If there is, the process advances to step S6805. In step S6805, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a main symbol with a "3" attached, a main symbol with a "4" attached, a main symbol with a "1" attached) on one active line L1 to L5 is selected. A stop result in which the following combinations are established is determined as a stop result for this game round. The stopping result (3, 4, 1) that is a combination of predetermined symbols is different from the stopping result that is a combination of the same symbols as described above, and is a stopping result that indicates a so-called chance. In this case, the effect pattern to be set is such that the final stop symbol row Z2 is not stopped in the ready-to-reach display to be executed, and a predetermined character (for example, a school of fish) is moved to the symbol row Z1 to Z3 so as to hide the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the predetermined character is moved to a position where it does not overlap with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the performance pattern is changed to such that the above-mentioned chance pieces are stopped.

After executing any of the processes in step S6803, step S6804, and step S6805, in step S6406, the process of storing the address of the stop symbol is performed, and then the main stop result determination process is ended.

On the other hand, in the reach stop result determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108, in step S6901, it is determined whether the game result of the game round to be started this time is a special losing result. If it is not a special winning result but a normal winning result, in step S6902, a stopping result in which a combination of winning reach symbols is established on one active line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stopping result. In step S6901, if it is determined that the game result of the game round to start this time is a special winning result, in step S6903, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "3 A combination of the main symbols marked with ``, the main symbols marked with ``4,'' and the main symbols marked with ``1'' is determined as the stopping result of this game round. That is, the stop result determined in step S6903 is the same as the stop result determined in step S6805, and is a stop result indicating a so-called chance. Also, in this case, the effect pattern to be set is set such that the symbol row Z2 that finally stops in the ready-to-reach display to be executed is not stopped, and a predetermined character (for example, a school of fish) is set as a symbol so as to hide the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the predetermined character is made to appear in front of the rows Z1 to Z3 and moved to a position where it does not overlap with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the performance pattern is changed to such that the above-mentioned chance pieces are stopped.

After executing the process of step S6902 or step S6903, in step S6904, the process of storing the address of the stop symbol is performed, and then the main stop result determination process is ended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game times on the symbol display device 41 include the stop results of the game times that result in the first type jackpot result B and the second type jackpot result B, and the stop results of the game times that result in a special winning result. are common, and are set so that the same stop result (chance) is obtained.

The flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 109.

First, the flow of the game when the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B is obtained will be explained. If the game results of the game round started at timing ta1 are these jackpot results, the fluctuating display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 ends at timing ta2, and the above chance number (3. 4.1) is temporarily suspended. After that, at timing ta3, a final display is started on the main display section 43, and the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed (the stop result corresponding to the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B). corresponding stop results). In this case, a chance effect occurs on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. A chance effect is, for example, an effect in which the above-mentioned chance eye remains frozen, the background becomes pitch black, and a heartbeat sound is emitted as a sound effect. This will continue throughout the opening. In other words, even after the fixed display time has elapsed at timing ta4, the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing ta5 and the transition to the opening occurs, the above-mentioned chance effect continues to be performed (the display screen 41a remains as it is, and A heartbeat sound effect is emitted repeatedly).

As already explained, when the game result is a jackpot result, the first confirmed display time is set to 0.2 sec, and the second confirmed display time is set to 0.5 sec. The opening time in the opening/closing execution mode of the first type jackpot result B and the second type jackpot result B is set to 24.3 seconds. Therefore, the above-mentioned chance effect will be executed for a total of 25.0 seconds. Then, at timing ta5 when the opening time has elapsed, the chance effect ends, the big winning opening 32a is opened, and the big winning effect starts on the display screen 41a.

On the other hand, if the game result of the game round started at timing tb1 is a special winning result, the fluctuating display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 ends at timing tb2, and the above chance number (3・4.1) is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, at timing tb3, a final display is started on the main display section 43, and a stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed (a stop result corresponding to a special winning result). In this case, the above chance performance occurs on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. However, since the current game result is not a game result that moves to the opening/closing execution mode, the current chance performance is performed during the confirmation display. However, since the first confirmed display time is set to 24.5 seconds and the second confirmed display time is set to 0.5 seconds, the above chance effect will be executed for a total of 25.0 seconds. That will happen. That is, the chance presentation based on the special winning result is carried out for the same length as the chance presentation carried out in the case of the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B. However, in the case of the 1st type jackpot result B or the 2nd type jackpot result B, the opening/closing execution mode is not started at timing tb4, which corresponds to timing ta4 when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the above 1st type jackpot result In the case of B or the second type jackpot result B, at timing tb5 corresponding to timing ta5 when the big winning hole 32a is opened, the big winning hole 32a is not opened, and the next game round is started, and the symbol row Z1~ The variable display of Z3 and the main display section 43 is started. If the suspension information is not stored at timing tb5, the next game round is not started and the above-mentioned chance effect ends as it is (the background returns to the original color and the sound effect of the heartbeat sound stops).

In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing ta4, for example, it is preferable to change the display mode of the main display section 43 so that it is possible to clearly identify that the gaming state has shifted. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a round display section is provided that indicates the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode, it is preferable to start displaying the round display section at timing ta4.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

After displaying the stop result of the symbol on the display screen 41a in the case of the 1st type jackpot result B or the 2nd type jackpot result B that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, the first round If the period until the big prize opening 32a is opened as a round game is a special winning result that does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode, after displaying the stop result of the symbol on the display screen 41a, the next game round The period was set to be the same length as the period until the start of the period. As a result, it cannot be determined from the length of these periods or the opening/closing manner of the big prize opening 32a whether or not the transition to the opening/closing execution mode will occur. Therefore, even if the result is a special failure that does not result in a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to enjoy this period while feeling hopeful that the transition to the opening/closing execution mode may occur, increasing interest. is planned.

The symbols on the display screen 41a are displayed depending on whether the game result of the game is the 1st type jackpot result B or the 2nd type jackpot result B that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, or the special winning result that does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode. We made the stopping result common, so that the chance roll stops in both cases. As a result, it cannot be determined from the stop result of the display screen 41a whether or not the transition to the opening/closing execution mode will occur, and the feeling of excitement during the period until the big prize opening 32a is opened or the next game round is started. can be more enjoyable.

While the display screen 41a has a configuration in which both results cannot be distinguished as described above, the main display section 43 has a configuration in which the stop results are different so that both results can be distinguished. Thereby, for example, a game hall manager or the like can confirm which result is the result, and the correspondence between the game result and the opening/closing execution mode is ensured.

The above-described effect of associating the confirmed display time with the opening period is implemented in the low probability mode, but not in the high probability mode. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly play a game in a high probability mode that can frequently result in a jackpot.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in the case where the result is a special failure and one or more pieces of holding information are stored in the holding ball storage area 232, the above-mentioned confirmed display time is set or the chance is set. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is stopped or a chance performance is performed. As a result, after the chance performance, there are two possibilities: either the big prize opening 32a is opened or the next game round is started, and it is possible to increase the difference in impression given by the performance after the chance performance. .

In the embodiment described above, the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode in the high probability mode may be shorter than that described above. That is, in the high probability mode, in addition to setting the first confirmation display time to the same time as other game results even for special winning results, for example, the first type jackpot result B in the high probability mode The opening time of the second type jackpot result B may be set to 15.0 seconds similarly to the opening period of the first type jackpot result A and the second type jackpot result A. In this way, the opening/closing execution mode in the high probability mode can also be smoothly implemented.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In the above-described first embodiment, an effect display was performed in which a bubble image appeared as a pending notice, and an effect was performed in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 were stopped in the stop mode of a pending notice. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is not executed. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the final display time or the length of the game time for one game session itself is utilized as a pending notice. In this case, when giving a pending notice, the final display time is not limited to a configuration in which it is made longer than usual, but may be shortened, or a configuration in which both lengthening and shortening are combined. Alternatively, a plurality of times having different lengths may be provided as special times, and the length of the confirmed display time may indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot in a specific game session (the game session subject to the pending notice). For example, if the hold information corresponding to a miss reach is identified first, the first type time is likely to be set as the special time, and if the hold information corresponding to a jackpot is identified first, the special time is set as the first type time. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a long type 2 time can be easily set. In a configuration that utilizes the confirmed display time or the length of the playing time for one game as a pending notice, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the confirmed display and improve the attention to the game, or to increase the number of types of effect display It becomes possible to reduce the number of displays and reduce the processing load for control. However, in view of the ease with which the player notices the pending notice, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above embodiment.

(2) In the first embodiment, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen 41a to give a notice of suspension, but the notice of postponement is a light-emitting effect using a light-emitting means such as an LED. Alternatively, it may be an accessory performance using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for movable performance. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be visual; for example, it can be auditory using sound effects, olfactory using smell, or even at least a part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the firing handle 54). It may also be possible to vibrate the performance operation section 75) or to direct wind or water at the player. The point is that the format is not particularly limited as long as it allows the player to feel that a performance related to the progress of the game has been performed.

In addition, when displaying a predetermined effect image to give a notice of reservation, another display device may be provided separately from the symbol display device 41, and the effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the display device. In this case, in order to prevent the player's attention and interest from being lost in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the display screen of the other display device may be made smaller than the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, or the display screen may be It is preferable to arrange it at a position farther from the center of the front surface of the game board 24 than 41a. However, when compared with the main display section 43, it is preferable to make the display area larger or to arrange it closer to the center of the front surface of the game board 24.

(3) In the above-described first embodiment, when a suspension notice is given, the preview display performance is displayed in the confirmation display of each game round, but instead of or in addition to this, a suspension notice is performed. In the first game round, a notification image may be displayed to notify the start of a look-ahead zone performance, such as "Entering Zone". In this case, the above-mentioned notification image is first displayed in a large size on the display screen 41a at the confirmation display of the first game round, and then the above-mentioned notification image or "○○ zone" is displayed at the end of the confirmation display or at the start timing of the next game round. It is preferable to display the characters in a smaller size and continue to do so until a specific game round. That is, it is preferable to continuously display the effect image displayed in the confirmation display of the first game round over the next game round, thereby making it easy to understand that the pending preview is continuing. In this case, in the first game, the display part KP, or the display part KP and symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in front of the notification image, so that the display part KP etc. can be seen even while the notification image is displayed. It is good to have a configuration that is In the next and subsequent game rounds, it is preferable to display the above-mentioned notification image and text so that they do not overlap with the display part KP, or with the display part KP and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, the display position of the notification image and character display may be set to a position that does not overlap with the display part KP, etc., or the display of the display part KP, etc. may be moved to avoid overlapping.

(4) In the first embodiment described above, the result of specifying a destination performed during a variable display is configured to be reflected in the time length of the final display that is performed immediately after the variable display. It may also be configured to be reflected in the time length of the final display in each session. In this case, the process of determining whether or not pending information corresponding to a jackpot or a missed reach has been identified first, and the process of setting the first confirmed display time based on the determination result, are performed at the start timing of the variable display. You can.

(5) In the first embodiment, the first confirmed display time is set to be a variable time, and the second confirmed display time is set to be a fixed time. However, the first confirmed display time is set to be a fixed time, and the second confirmed display time is set to be a fixed time. It may be a variable time. In this case, the final display time can be changed even after the final display has started, and if the first identification is performed during the final display, or if the judgment process for the first identification result is performed during the final display, , the results can be reflected in the ongoing confirmation display.

Alternatively, both the first and second confirmed display times may be variable times. In this case, both confirmed display times may be set based on the same type or the same conditions, or may be set based on different types or different conditions. Note that an example of a configuration in which settings are made based on the same type of conditions is, for example, when the first specified result is the first result, the first confirmed display time is set based on the result, and the first confirmed display time is set based on the first specified result. If the second result is different from the first result, the second final display time can be set based on the second result. Further, as a configuration in which settings are made based on different or different conditions, for example, a configuration in which a first confirmed display time is set based on a previously specified result and a second confirmed display time is set based on the common reservation number CRN. can do.

(6) In the first embodiment described above, the fixed display time is divided into the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time, but such division is not performed and the second fixed display time is not provided. It may also be a configuration. In this case, the second stop display command can also be omitted. Further, the number of divisions of the final display time is not limited to two, but may be three or more. In this case, each of the third and subsequent fixed display times other than the first and second fixed display times may be a variable time like the first fixed display time, or a fixed time like the second fixed display time. It may be.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the final display time may be divided into a first final display time and a second final display time. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the first confirmed display time may be set as a variable time and the second confirmed display time may be set as a fixed time, or as in the configuration described in (5) above, The first confirmed display time may be a fixed time, the second confirmed display time may be a variable time, or both may be variable times.

(7) In the first embodiment, the first final display time is set at the start timing of the final display on the main display section 43, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first confirmed display time may be set at a timing earlier than the start timing. In other words, the timing for setting the first fixed display time may be after the start of the variable display on the main display section 43 and before the start of the fixed display (or before the end of the fixed display if the configuration (5) above is provided). For example, it may be at any timing. This also applies to the process (step S1203) of determining whether pending information corresponding to a jackpot or a missed reach has been previously identified.

(8) In the first embodiment, the set number of times AN of pending notices (the set number of times the first confirmed display time is set as a special time) AN is set to multiple times, but it may be set to one time. In that case, the suspension notice may be given at the game round immediately before the specific game round that is the target of the reservation notice, or the suspension notice may be given at an even earlier game round.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the set number of times AN is uniformly set to two, but the number of times AN may vary or tend to vary depending on the type of the previously identified result. For example, if pending information corresponding to a jackpot is identified first, 3 times will be more likely to be selected as the set number of times AN, and if pending information corresponding to a missed reach is identified first, then 2 times will be selected as the set number of times AN. It is possible to adopt a configuration that makes it easier.

(9) In the first embodiment described above, when displaying a preview display effect in which a bubble image appears, the first confirmed display time is uniformly set as a special time. Only when displaying a preview display effect in the final display immediately after the variable display based on a specific result, the first confirmed display time is set as a special time, and the second and subsequent preview display effects are displayed. In the case where the display of the preview display effect is to be started from the next or subsequent game round, the first confirmed display time may be configured to be the normal time. When executing a preview display performance from the second time onward or when starting a preview display performance from the next game round, the notification/performance control device 82 or the display control device 212, which is a sub-side control device, is used. Since it is possible to know at the start of the variable display that a preview display effect should be displayed, the temporary stop timing of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is earlier than usual to secure time for the preview display effect. good.

Further, even when the first confirmed display time is set as a special time, a configuration may be adopted in which a case where a preview display effect is displayed and a case where a preview display effect is not displayed may occur. In this case, the first confirmed display time becomes a special time and the preview display effect is not displayed, and the first confirmed display time becomes a special time and the preview display effect is displayed at the same time. By providing a difference in the level of expectation, it is possible to increase the variation of effects related to the level of expectation, and it is possible to diversify the game effects. At this time, whether or not to display the preview display performance may be determined by the main control device 81, the notification/performance control device 82, or the display control device 212.

(10) In the above-described first embodiment, when it has been determined that the special suspension information has been previously identified, the process for determining whether or not the special suspension information has been previously identified is limited. In place of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which the process of setting the first confirmed display time to a special time is restricted.

(11) In the first embodiment, one of the plurality of fixed display times consisting of special time, normal time, and time saving time is selected at the start timing of the fixed display, and it is selected as the first fixed display time. However, the first confirmed display time is set to the normal time (depending on the common reservation number CRN, the time saving time) at a timing before the start of the confirmed display, and the confirmed display starts. If the special hold information is first specified before the end of the process, the first confirmed display time may be changed to the special time at the start timing of the confirmed display. With such a configuration, for example, even if a problem occurs in which the first confirmed display time is not set as special time, the normal time or time saving time setting made in advance may remain, so the confirmed display itself will not be executed. It becomes possible to suppress inconveniences that would otherwise be impossible.

(12) In the first embodiment described above, when the common reservation number CRN is K=3 or more, the first confirmation display time is set to the time saving time and shortened, but instead of this, or In addition, the first confirmed display time may be configured to be longer than the normal time when the common reservation number CRN is equal to or less than the reference number M (for example, 1). This makes it difficult for the held ball storage area 232 to run out of held information, making it possible to suppress interruptions in game progress.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the special display area OE and the display part KP are provided in the display screen 41a, but the display part KP is provided in the display screen of a display device other than the symbol display device 41. Alternatively, the display section KP may be configured by a light-emitting display device equipped with a light-emitting means such as an LED. When the display section KP is provided outside the display screen 41a, it is preferably provided around the display screen 41a in order to concentrate the points of interest.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the upper symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the lower symbol row are displayed fluctuating in the horizontal direction in the variable display area ME of the display screen 41a. The three symbol rows may be displayed variably in the vertical direction, or the symbols of each symbol row may be switched and displayed in individually set display areas. In other words, the symbols displayed in the display area may be sequentially replaced in ascending order or descending order. Further, the number of symbol rows is not limited to a plurality of numbers, and may be configured to include only one symbol row. In addition, in the configuration provided with a plurality of symbol rows, the number of symbol rows may be two, or may be four or more.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the same display screen 41a, but it is also possible to provide a plurality of display screens (display devices) and display one symbol row on each display screen. The configuration may be such that the symbols are displayed, or the one symbol column and the remaining two symbol columns may be displayed on separate display screens. In this case, the terms "picture display means" and "display means" can be interpreted as a generic term for all of them, or can be interpreted as corresponding to one display screen among them.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the reservation information is acquired based on winnings to the actuating ports 33a and 33b, and the reservation information is stored with a predetermined number (4 pieces) as the upper limit, but the reservation information It is also possible to have a configuration in which the information is not stored. In this way, the configuration can be simplified. This also applies to winnings in the through gate 35.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, up to four pieces of pending information based on winnings to the upper operating port 33a are stored, but the number may be less than four, or it may be five or more. You can. Further, the upper limit storage number of pending information based on each winning to the lower operation port 33b and through gate 35 may be less than 4 pieces, or may be 5 pieces or more. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit storage number of pending information based on winnings in each operating port 33a, 33b and through gate 35 is different.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the winning order is determined based on the order of winnings to the operating ports 33a and 33b. The configuration may be such that the pending information based on the above is preferentially targeted for the validity determination, or vice versa.

(18) In the first modification of the first embodiment, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are uniformly revaried when revariation is performed, but some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be revaried. It may also be configured to vary. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a pattern that can be used as a stop mode for the pending notice among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed, and if it is determined that there is a pattern that can be used, the available symbol rows It is also possible to have a configuration in which only the symbol rows other than the above are changed again.

(19) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the stop result is changed through re-variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but it may be changed without re-variation. In this case, a structure may be adopted in which the symbols Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed are instantly changed to another symbol, or a shielding image is displayed to cover the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed, or the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are An image other than the design may be displayed in the display area of Z3, and then when the shielding image or the image other than the design is erased, a changed design may appear. In addition, when changing only a part of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to display the shielding image or the image other than the symbol for the entire symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It may also be configured to be displayed only for some symbol rows.

(20) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the notification/performance control device 82 makes the decision as to whether or not to change the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 again, but the main control device 81 makes the decision. It may be a configuration or a configuration performed by the display control device 212.

(21) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the previous specification is performed while the game round is in progress, and based on the result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are suspended in the game round in progress. The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to be changed again only when they are to be displayed in a stopped manner, but in the subsequent game round, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are to be stopped and displayed in the stopped manner of the second pending notice, Even in the case where the stopping mode of the pending notice is started from a game round that is later than the game round that is in progress when the destination is specified, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed again. In that case, whether or not to perform re-variation in order to intertwine the case where the display is stopped in the stop mode of the pending notice without re-variation, and the case where the display is stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the pending notice after undergoing re-variation. It is preferable to provide a re-variation lottery means for randomly re-variing.

With such a configuration, even if the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 does not become the stop mode of the pending notice in the initial stop display, it is possible for the game player to know that re-variation will be performed until the stop result is confirmed. people can expect. This makes it possible to maintain the expectations of the players and increase the level of attention to the game. In addition, with the configuration of Modification 1, it becomes easier for the player to determine which pending information corresponds to a jackpot or a missed reach based on the re-variation; Due to the occurrence of re-fluctuation, it becomes difficult to identify pending information that was previously identified as a jackpot or a missed reach, and it is possible to add interest to guessing the pending information. The re-variation lottery may be performed by the main control device 81, or by the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212, which are sub-side control devices.

(22) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the main control device 81 sets the first confirmed display time to a special time, and in response, the notification/performance control device 82 or the display control device 212 Although the configuration is such that the columns Z1 to Z3 are re-varied, even though the main control device 81 sets the first confirmed display time to the normal time, the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 independently It is also possible to further add a configuration in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again based on the determination. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of re-variation, reduce the discomfort felt by players when re-variation is performed, and prevent players from having excessive expectations because they misunderstand it as a special performance. It is suppressed that

However, since the normal time is shorter than the special time, it may be difficult to secure time for re-variation. Therefore, when performing revariation when the first confirmed display time is set to normal time, start revariation before the start of the confirmed display, and when the first confirmed display time is set to special time. It is better to have a configuration in which the execution is carried out ahead of schedule. This makes it possible to secure an appropriate amount of re-variation time, and prevents inconveniences such as a game round ending in the middle of re-variation, or not being able to properly secure the time to display the stop results that are displayed again. be done.

(23) In the first modification of the first embodiment, regardless of whether or not the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again, when a pending notice is executed, the first confirmed display time is uniformly set to a special value. Although the configuration is such that the first confirmation display time is not set as the special time, if the re-variation is not executed even if the suspension notice is executed, the first confirmation display time may not be set as the special time. In this case, the first confirmed display time may be configured to be the normal time, but since it is necessary to secure time for displaying the preview effect in which the bubble image appears, the first confirmed display time that can be set is shorter than the special time. In addition, a second special time that is longer than the normal time may be further provided, and the second special time may be set. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the main controller 81 determines whether or not to change the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 again.

(24) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the previous specification is performed while a game round is in progress, and based on the result, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are suspended in the game round in progress. When displaying in a stopped mode, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are always changed again regardless of the progress status of the game round when the previous specification is performed, but the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation. (Refer to Figure 25(c)), the re-variation is not executed, and the re-variation is only performed when the stop variation is displayed or at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has been stopped and displayed. It may also be configured to vary. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the presence or absence of re-variation is determined based on the progress status of the game round, and when it is determined that the re-variation is to be performed, the re-variation is executed. In addition, if it is determined that the re-variation is not to be performed, the stop result stored in the register of the MPU 242 of the notification/effect control device 82 (the stop result set at the start timing of the variation display) is rewritten to the stop mode of the pending notice. , it is preferable that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed from the beginning in a suspended notice stop mode. Further, it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute revariation based on the contents of the pending command (command containing information regarding the previous specified result) sent from the main controller 81 and the timing of its reception. .

(25) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the first fixed display time is included in the first stop display command depending on whether the first confirmed display time is set to special time or when it is set to normal time or time-saving time. Although the configuration is such that the information included is different, a configuration may also be adopted in which the same information is included in each case. That is, regardless of the setting result of the first confirmed display time, the first stop display command includes at least information regarding the length of the first confirmed display time, information regarding whether or not to execute a pending notice, and the start timing of the pending notice. The configuration may also include information regarding.

(26) In the second modification of the first embodiment, in the stop start process shown in FIG. Although the configuration is such that the execution is executed at the start timing of the final display on the main display section 43, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that the execution is executed at a timing earlier than the start timing of the final display. That is, the first fixed display time may be set at any timing after the start of the variable display on the main display section 43 and before the start of the fixed display.

In addition, in the process of setting the variable display time for a complete loss in FIG. Although the configuration is such that the execution is executed at the start timing of , the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be executed at a timing earlier than the start timing of the variable display. That is, the execution timing of the above-described determination process may be any timing after the start of the final display that is performed immediately before the fluctuating display and before the start of the fluctuating display.

(27) In the second modification of the first embodiment, the process of determining whether or not special hold information has been specified by the previous specification is performed both at the start of the variable display and at the start of the fixed display. However, it may be configured to perform only one of them. For example, by configuring the variable display to be performed only at the start of the variable display, the variable display and fixed display in the same game can be set as a special time, and one of the variable display and fixed display is the special time and the other is the normal time. This is suitable when you want to avoid wasting time.

(28) Although the third modification of the first embodiment exemplifies the special figure game round, this can also be applied to the structure of the regular figure game round described in the second embodiment.

(29) In the third modification of the first embodiment, the second information area 342 includes information regarding the first confirmed display time, but for example, if the number of command types used is small, In a case where adjustment of data value settings is easy, the configuration may be such that it is included in the first information area 341.

(30) In the third modification of the first embodiment, the information regarding the first confirmed display time is assigned to the least significant bit LB1, but it may be assigned to the most significant bit LB8. In this case, the identification bit for identifying the first information area 341 (upper byte or preceding command) and the second information area 342 (lower byte or subsequent command) is In either case, bits other than the most significant bit may be used.

(31) In the first embodiment, the variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 81 to the notification/effect control device 82 before the variable display of the picture is performed on the main display section 43. However, the transmission may be performed after the pattern is displayed variably. For example, during a period in which high-speed fluctuation is being performed on the symbol display device 41, the main controller 81 may output a fluctuation start command and a type command corresponding to the game round in which the fluctuation display is started. Bye.

(32) In the second embodiment, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the confirmation display time is extended for both the winning lottery result, the open result A, and the open result B. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the confirmation display time is lengthened only when the result is an incorrect result. In other words, the final display time may be set based on the results of a lottery or the distribution of open types. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a long period of time from when the opening result is announced until the electric accessory 34 is in the open state, and from mistaking it for a malfunction by the player.

(33) In the second embodiment described above, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the final display time when the result of the winning lottery is a winning result, and the final display when the opening result is A. Although the maximum fixed display time for release result B is set to be the same length, some of them may be made different from others, or they may be made different from each other. However, in consideration of reducing the processing load on the main control device 81 and saving the usage amount of the ROM 203, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above embodiment.

(34) In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that both the result of the normal drawing lottery and the opening type of the electric accessory 34 are notified, but it may be configured to notify only one of them. Note that when the type of release of the electric accessory 34 is notified, the results of the winning/failure lottery of common figures are also notified at the same time, so if it is desired to limit the degree of notification, it is preferable to have a configuration in which only the results of the lottery of winning/falsifying figures are notified.

(35) In the second embodiment, the special display effect is a special effect when the electric accessory 34 is released in the first high winning support state when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. However, it may be configured to be executable even when the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed in a low winning support state. In this case, the special display effect is more likely to be performed in the first high winning support state than in the low winning support state, that is, when the support state of the electric accessory 34 is in the first high winning support state, special display effects are preferentially performed. A configuration may also be adopted in which display effects are performed. However, from the viewpoint of highlighting the first high winning support state and suppressing player confusion, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above embodiment.

Furthermore, a special display effect may be performed when the electric accessory 34 is released in the first high winning support state when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. In addition, since the high-frequency support mode is a state in which the electric accessory 34 is opened frequently, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34 is not released in the first high winning support state. You can also use it as

(36) In the second embodiment, in the two lottery systems of normal symbols and special symbols, the fixed display time of one of the regular symbols is changed based on the gaming state. 1 special symbol (a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner based on winning one of the upper operating port 33a and lower operating port 33b) and a second special symbol (a symbol that is won based on winning one of the upper operating port 33a and the lower operating port 33b) It can also be applied in relation to symbols that are displayed variably based on An example of such a configuration is a pachinko machine (so-called small win RUSH machine) in which the winning lottery result of the second special symbol includes more special winning results (so-called small winnings) than completely losing results.

The pachinko machine described above is configured to provide a difference in the advantageous degree of the gaming state depending on the length of the gaming time associated with one gaming round of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is set to be disadvantageous, the variable display time of the second special symbol is made extremely long. As a result, the opening timing of the variable winning device 32 is significantly delayed from the winning time at the operating port, and the opening frequency of the variable winning device 32 per unit time is greatly reduced. On the other hand, when the gaming state is set to an advantageous state, the variable display time of the second special symbol is shortened to increase the opening frequency of the variable winning device 32 per unit time. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to receive benefits even if the game ball enters the operating hole corresponding to the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second operating hole") under disadvantageous conditions. The specifications are such that it becomes easier to receive profits only when the prize is entered into the second operation port under advantageous conditions. The variable display time of the first special figure in an unfavorable state is set to the same time length as a general pachinko machine (shorter time than the time between variable displays of the second special figure in an unfavorable state). In this case, it is possible to play a game by placing a game ball into the operating hole corresponding to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first operating hole").

By the way, under the above configuration, when the player is in a disadvantageous state, the game ball may be unintentionally placed in the second operating port. At this time, if the configuration is such that the game round of the first special figure starts after the game round of the second special figure ends, the first special figure will continue to play until the game round of the second special figure ends, which has been prolonged. The game round will not start, and the state of being unable to proceed with the game will continue for a long time. Therefore, in the pachinko machine described above, a simultaneous fluctuation configuration is adopted so that the game round of the first special figure can be executed even while the game round of the second special figure is being executed. Therefore, similar to the situation that occurs between the normal symbol and the special symbol explained in the second embodiment, if the situation is disadvantageous, the second special symbol will be displayed at the end of the game round of the first special symbol. A situation may arise in which a number of game rounds are being executed. Therefore, by making the fixed display time in the game round of the second special symbol when the player is in a disadvantageous state longer than that in the case where the player is in an advantageous state, the variable display time can be shortened by that amount, and the game can be played quickly. It becomes possible to support termination.

In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the confirmation display time only when the winning lottery result of the second special symbol is a complete loss. If the winning/failure lottery result of the second special drawing is a special losing result, the result corresponds to the result of opening the variable winning device 32, so the game round of the first special drawing can be executed while this is displayed as confirmed. This is because it is inappropriate to do so.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with the small hit RUSH function, by including the special winning result in the lottery result of the first special drawing, the lottery result is a special winning result. The first game round ended before the second game round while the second game round (game round) and the second special drawing game round (second game round) whose lottery result was a special winning result were running simultaneously. In some cases, the second game round can be forcibly ended (forcibly ended with a complete loss). This is assumed to be the act of intentionally winning a prize in the second operating port in a disadvantageous situation, and then playing the game by entering a prize in the first operating port while waiting for the variable winning device 32 to be released based on the winning. This is to be done. Furthermore, even with the same special winning result, the opening pattern of the variable winning device 32 is different between the second special drawing and the first special drawing, and in the case of the former, the game ball is variable in a manner that allows winning or easy winning. While the winning device 32 is opened, in the latter case, the variable winning device 32 is opened in a manner in which the game balls cannot win or it is difficult to win compared to the case of the second special symbol.

In the above case, in order to forcibly end the second game round, instead of forcibly ending the second game round based on the completion of the final display of the first special symbol, the final display of the first special symbol is It is preferable to forcibly end the second game round (start a confirmation display) based on the start of the second game round. For example, if there is a request to lengthen or shorten the confirmed display time for the first game, in the former configuration, the forced termination timing may be delayed or early depending on the length of the confirmed display time. Although there is a possibility of slowdown, in the latter configuration, even if the length of the fixed display time is changed, it is suppressed from affecting the forced termination timing, and the degree of freedom of the fixed display time can be improved.

(37) In the modification of the second embodiment, a determination process (step S4702 in FIG. 71) for determining whether or not the game is determined to be suspended, and a process for setting a final display time based on the result (step S4702) are performed. Although S4703) is performed when variable display is started, it may be performed when fixed display is started, as in the first embodiment. That is, if it is determined that the game is paused during the variable display, the final display time may be shortened in the final display immediately after the variable display. With this configuration, the presence or absence of a game stop can be quickly reflected in the confirmed display time (and by extension, the playing time related to one game), and the results of the lottery of common figures and the release of the electric accessory 34 can be quickly reflected. It becomes possible to notify the player of the type more quickly. Furthermore, with the above configuration, if it is determined that the game has been restarted during the variable display, the confirmed display time is returned to the time used during the game in the confirmed display immediately after the variable display. be able to. This makes it possible to further suppress the act of intentionally trying to shorten the playing time for one game of the normal figure game even when the player has no intention of ending the game.

(38) In the modification of the second embodiment described above, a configuration in which a plurality of lottery symbols consisting of regular symbols and special symbols fluctuate simultaneously has been exemplified, but this is not limited to a configuration in which multiple lottery symbols coexist. Even if multiple lottery systems coexist, the system is not limited to a configuration in which they are changed simultaneously. For example, even if the configuration includes only a single lottery system, if the game ends with the pending information remaining, the configuration of the above modified example allows the remaining pending information to be quickly digested. , it is possible to obtain the effect that it becomes easier for the next player to start playing the game.

(39) In the modification of the second embodiment, the firing of game balls is stopped, the special figure game times are not being displayed in a variable manner, and the special figure reservation information is not stored. Although the configuration is such that it is determined that the game is paused when all of the conditions are satisfied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is that it is determined that the game is paused when at least one of these conditions is satisfied. You can also use it as

(40) In the modification of the second embodiment described above, when determining whether or not the game is paused, it is determined whether or not the firing of game balls has been stopped; however, instead of this, Alternatively, in addition, it may be configured to determine whether or not the production operation section 75, the ball lending button, or the return button has been operated, or to refer to the operation history. In short, any configuration may be used as long as it determines whether or not the game is paused based on the operation status of the operation means that can be operated by the player.

(41) In the third embodiment, the error target (predetermined abnormality occurrence ), a value is set in the error counter EK, an error flag is set, and error processing is performed, but the target of errors is not limited to the above. For example, it may be that the gaming machine main body 12 has been opened to the outer frame 11, that the inner frame 13 has been opened, or that the upper tray 71 has become full. Further, it is not necessary to treat any of the above events as errors, and a configuration may be adopted in which one or more of these events are treated as errors. For example, the opening of the front door frame 14 and the fullness of the lower tray 72 may be treated as error events, while the occurrence of ball jamming may not be treated as an error event.

(41) In the third embodiment described above, the progress speed of the game round is reduced by setting the error counter EK and the error flag, but the events targeted for reducing the progress speed are also the same as described above. but not limited to. For example, the firing stop switch on the firing handle 54 may be operated. Note that the firing stop switch is a switch that prevents the game ball from being fired even when the firing handle 54 is operated. In addition, a sensor is provided to detect the remaining game balls on the upper tray 71, and based on the main controller 81 knowing that the number of remaining game balls on the upper tray 71 has become less than a predetermined number, the advancing speed is It is also possible to adopt a configuration that reduces the .

(42) In the third embodiment, the first confirmation display time is extended to slow down the progress of the game, but the second confirmation display time may be extended, and the first confirmation display time is extended. It may be configured to extend both the display time and the second fixed display time, it may be configured to extend the variable display time, or it may be configured to reduce the progress speed by combining these.

(43) In the third embodiment described above, the first confirmed display time of a gaming round executed in a situation where the error counter EK is larger than 0 or an error flag is set is extended. It may also be configured to extend the first confirmation display time of some of the game times to be executed in this situation. For example, the first confirmed display time may be extended or not extended intermittently for a predetermined number of games (for example, once), or if the result is a predetermined result (for example, a losing result) in the above situation, the first confirmed display time is extended. However, if the result is different from the predetermined result (for example, a jackpot result), it may be extended. Furthermore, various counters (C1, C2, C3, CS, etc.) for determining the validity of game times executed in the above situation may be used to determine which game times are to be extended and which game times are not to be extended.

(44) In the third embodiment, the error counter EK is set to a value (CRN+1 or CRN) corresponding to the common reservation number CRN at the time when the error event occurs. The configuration may be such that the error counter EK is set to a value corresponding to the common reservation number CRN at the time when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of occurrence, or the common reservation number CRN at the time when the error event occurs. The error counter EK may be set to a value obtained by adding a predetermined number larger than 1 to the error counter EK. Also, a value may be set according to the common reservation number CRN at the timing when the game is stopped after an error occurs (for example, when the firing handle 54 is returned to the initial position or when the firing handle 54 is released). Alternatively, it may be configured to set a value according to the common reservation number CRN at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing when the game was stopped. If the common reservation number CRN is taken as the number CRN at the time when the predetermined period has passed, for example, it is possible to take into account the time lag until the game ball fired immediately before the error occurs and enters the upper operating port 33a as the starting ball entry part. It is possible.

(45) In the third embodiment, the time set as the first confirmed display time is not limited to the above (5.0 sec), and may be longer or shorter than this. In addition, the time set as the first confirmed display time does not have to be uniform and the same time; a long time is likely to be set when the error event has occurred shortly, and It may be configured such that the set time becomes shorter as the time elapses, or vice versa. Based on the premise that the game result of the game round being played at the time the error event occurred is most likely to be overlooked, the first game result of the game round being played at the time the error event occurred is It can be said that the configuration that makes the final display time the longest is preferable.

(46) In the third embodiment described above, the length of the first confirmed display time may be determined in relation to the elapsed time from the occurrence of the error. For example, it can be said that the shorter the period from the occurrence of an error event to the start timing of the first confirmation display, the higher the possibility that the error is still being dealt with and the game result will be overlooked. Therefore, if the first confirmed display time is set to be longer as the elapsed time is shorter in relation to the elapsed time from the occurrence of the error event as described above, the possibility of game results being overlooked can be reduced. It becomes possible to further reduce the amount.

(47) In the third embodiment, the length of the first fixed display time may be determined in relation to the variable display time of each game. For example, if you set the first confirmed display time of a game session with a long variable display time to be short, and set the first confirmed display time of a game session with a short variable display time to be long, Similar to (46) above, the first confirmed display time can be set in relation to the elapsed time since the error occurred, and in order to set it in relation to the elapsed time, it is necessary to actually measure the elapsed time. This does not occur, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, the first confirmed display time for game sessions where a long variable display time is set is set to be long, and the first confirmed display time for game sessions where a short variable display time is set is set to be short. Good too. Based on the premise that the longer the variable display time is set, the higher the possibility of a jackpot result being, by doing the above, the game results of the game rounds in which players are likely to have a high level of interest can be adjusted. It is possible to suitably avoid events that would otherwise be overlooked.

(48) In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that a delay effect is performed, but a configuration may also be adopted in which the final display time is simply extended and the delay effect is not performed. In particular, when an error occurs, recovery processing will be performed, so a configuration that does not add new production processing is considered to greatly contribute to early recovery.

(49) In the third embodiment, when an error event occurs, the information on the occurrence of the error event may be output as an external output to, for example, a hall computer. In this case, in situations where the first confirmed display time is extended, such as when the error counter EK is greater than 0 or when the error flag is set, the occurrence information of the above error event will continue to be output. If the configuration is such that the output of the occurrence information of the error event is stopped based on the error counter EK becoming 0 or the error flag being erased, the administrator of the gaming hall can set the first confirmed display time. It will be possible to clearly understand the situation in which the extension of the period is being carried out.

(50) In the third and fourth embodiments described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the positional displacement of the accessory provided in the gaming machine occurs in a situation where the first confirmed display time is extended. In other words, the delay effect is created through the positional displacement of the accessory. Specifically, when the accessory is placed in the first position, the delay effect is not performed, and the difference between the first position and is arranged in a different second position, a delay effect is performed. The first position and the second position may be different enough to be visually distinguishable from the player or the game hall manager. For example, the first position indicating that no delay effect is being performed may be , it may be arranged in a position that is invisible or difficult to see from the player or the game hall manager, and becomes visible or easy to see by moving to the second position.

(51) The delay effects in the third and fourth embodiments are not limited to the above aspects, and for example, the background color may be different, or the brightness of the display screen 41a or the game board 24 may be changed (reduced). Alternatively, the configuration may be implemented using another indicator lamp section 63 or the like.

(52) In the third and fourth embodiments, when the first fixed display time is extended, the delay effect is performed during the first fixed display time. The delay effect may be performed during the second fixed display time, or it may not be performed during the first fixed display time, but may be performed during the variable display time, the second fixed display time, or one of these.

(53) In the modification of the third embodiment, the error flag is erased based on the operation of the firing handle 54, but for example, if the touch sensor provided on the firing handle 54 is turned on The error flag may be erased based on the fact that the player's hand or the like touches it even though it has not been operated, or other operation parts of the gaming machine (operation buttons for performance, ball rental buttons, etc.) The error flag may be erased based on the operation of the operating section or the touch of a hand or the like to the operating section. In addition, the game starts when the game ball is fired, the game ball is fired and enters the designated ball entry area, the payout conditions for the game ball are met, the validity judgment is made, etc. The error flag may be deleted when the condition is established (it has already been established).

(54) In the modification of the third embodiment, the error flag is erased when a game start operation is performed on the condition that the error has been resolved. Even if the player does not do so, the error flag may be erased if a game start operation is performed.

(55) In a modification of the third embodiment, when a game operation is being performed, even if an error event occurs, the error flag is not set and the game operation is not performed. The configuration may be such that an error flag is set under the condition.

(56) In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is informed of the situation in which the operation flag is set so that the player can understand the situation. For example, the presence or absence of the operation flag may be notified by controlling the light emission of a light emitting unit such as an LED built into or near the operation button 77, or the presence or absence of the operation flag may be displayed on the display screen 41a. You can also use it as

(57) In the fourth embodiment, when the operation flag is set, the time set as the first confirmed display time may be longer or shorter than 30 seconds. Alternatively, the extension time may be set in advance as a predetermined time (30 seconds), and the extension of the predetermined time may be allocated to each piece of hold information by dividing the time based on stored hold information. Specifically, when the common reservation number CRN is 2, the predetermined time may be divided into 15 seconds and 15 seconds and set as the first confirmed display time for each game.

(58) In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the variable display time of the game round is set as the first fixed display time. A configuration may also be adopted in which the time until the end) is set as the first confirmed display time.

(59) In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the first confirmed display time of the game round that results in a jackpot is set as the variable display time of the game round, but the game results are not limited to this. However, it may be configured such that not only the game round that results in the game result, but also the first fixed display time of other game rounds are set as the variable display time of the game round. For example, if a game session that results in a jackpot is specified through the pending notice process, the variable display time for that game session will be set to 1. It may also be configured to be set as a fixed display time. By doing so, in a configuration in which a continuous performance is generated over a plurality of game rounds by a pending notice as in the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent the performance from being overlooked.

In addition, as the first confirmed display time of the game session that results in the jackpot result, the total time of the variable display time of the game session that results in the jackpot result and the variable display time of the game session that occurs before that. It is also possible to configure the settings. In this case, as a performance during the first confirmation display, in addition to the performance of a game round that results in a jackpot, it is preferable to perform a performance of a game round that is carried out before that.

(60) In the fifth embodiment, when a normal jackpot result occurs during the high-frequency support mode and the transition to the low-frequency support mode, the fluctuating symbol display ends early. The variable display of symbols may be configured to end early in a predetermined number of (50th) game time as the game time when the support mode ends.

(61) In the fifth embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode, which is advantageous for the player, ends, the fluctuating symbol display ends early. The above configuration may be applied when the process ends.

(62) In the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed to end the fluctuation display of the symbols earlier, but the fluctuation speed is also changed for the other symbol rows Z1 and Z3. Alternatively, instead of changing the speed of variation, it may be configured to suddenly stop and end the variation display of the symbols.

(63) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the number of pending balls on the second ball entering section side is small, the fluctuating display of symbols is ended early, but the number of pending balls on the first ball entering section side is also taken into account. A configuration may also be adopted in which it is determined whether or not to end the variable display of symbols early. For example, if the hold information on the first ball entering section side is stored, but the holding information on the second ball entering section side is not stored, the fluctuating display of symbols is ended early, and the second ball entering section side is stored. Even if the reservation information on the side of the club is not stored, if the reservation information on the side of the first ball entering club is also not stored, the variable display of symbols may not be ended early.

(64) In the fifth embodiment, the timing at which the fluctuating symbol display ends may be determined by taking into consideration the opening pattern of the electric accessory 134a. For example, if the electric accessory 134a is brought into the open state immediately, it can be said that the reservation information on the second ball entry section side can be replenished quickly, but if the electric accessory 134a is not brought into the open state easily, the second It can be said that it is difficult to supplement the pending information on the 2nd ball club side. Therefore, the opening timing of the electric accessory 134a is grasped, and if the opening timing is the first timing, the fluctuating display of the symbol is ended at a timing corresponding to the first timing, and the opening timing is set to be lower than the first timing. If the second timing is later than the second timing, the variable display of the symbols may be ended at a timing corresponding to the second timing and earlier than the first timing. Furthermore, the variable display of the symbols may be ended in accordance with the opening timing of the electric accessory 134a. For example, the end timing of the variable display may be set so that the game ball enters the second operating port 134 by firing the game ball at the timing when the variable display of the symbols ends.

(65) In the fifth embodiment, it goes without saying that the first input notification effect and the second input notification effect are not limited to those described above.

(66) In the fifth embodiment described above, the fluctuation pattern is set based on the number of reservations on the second ball entry section side at the start of the game round that usually results in a jackpot during the high-frequency support mode, Although the configuration is such that the performance of the game round is performed according to the fluctuating pattern, the fluctuating pattern may be changeable during the game round. For example, at the start timing of the deceleration process for the middle symbol row, the number of reservations on the second ball entering section side is grasped again, and the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 is set according to the number of reservations. By doing this, when the hold information on the second ball entry section side is acquired and the hold information is replenished during the game round, it is also possible to perform a normal performance. Therefore, even if the number of pending games at the start of a game round is small, it is possible to uniformly prevent the game from being stopped first.

(67) In the fifth embodiment, when the reservation information on the first special symbol side and the reservation information on the second special symbol side are stored, the reservation information on the first special symbol side is higher than the reservation information on the second special symbol side. A configuration of so-called priority digestion may be applied in which the pending information on the drawing side is given priority and is subjected to the determination of validity. More specifically, a configuration in which the reservation information on the second special map side acquired after the reservation information on the first special map side is subject to validity determination before the reservation information on the first special map side. You can also use it as As mentioned above, the distribution table for the first ball entry section and the distribution table for the second ball entry section have different advantages, so that the second special drawing side is more advantageous to the player. However, it is not desirable for the player that the validity judgment regarding the suspension information on the first special symbol side is made in the high-frequency support mode in which the suspension information on the second special symbol side is likely to be acquired. Therefore, if the above-mentioned priority digestion configuration is applied, in the high-frequency support mode, it will be possible to postpone the reservation information on the first special drawing side, and if the result of the normal jackpot is announced early. In addition, it becomes possible to easily obtain pending information on the second special figure side that is advantageous for the player.

(68) In the configuration in which the first confirmed display time is extended as in the modification of the fifth embodiment, if pending information is acquired (replenished) during the first confirmed display time, the set The display may be configured to end without waiting for the first confirmed display time to elapse.

(69) In the sixth embodiment, the first confirmed display time becomes shorter as the number of reservations increases, so that V winnings are more likely to occur. It may be arranged so that V winnings are more likely to occur.

(70) In the sixth embodiment, the degree of advantage such as whether or not a V winning is generated is determined by the operation of the shutter 358 in the variable winning device 132, but the degree of advantage is determined by other accessories. It is also possible to realize high or low levels. For example, if the accessory is provided upstream of the variable winning device 132 in the gaming area PE and the accessory is placed at the first position, the game ball is guided to the variable winning device 132, and the accessory is placed at the first position. When placed at a second position different from the first position, the game ball is configured not to be guided to the variable prize winning device 132 or to be difficult to be guided. Then, the operation of the accessory is configured to start from the timing when the confirmation notification in the game round is started, and the timing at which the accessory is placed in the first position is when the variable winning device 132 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode. The time from the confirmation notification to the opening timing of the variable prize winning device 132 is adjusted so that it overlaps or does not overlap with the timing when the prize winning device 132 is opened. As a result, even if the variable winning device 132 is controlled to open or close even if the variable winning device 132 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to create a situation in which winning to the variable winning device 132 is likely to occur and a situation in which it is unlikely to occur. .

(71) In the sixth embodiment, the V winning rate is different based on the value of the common reservation number CRN. A configuration may be adopted in which one of the pieces of information is used to vary the V winning rate. For example, when the game board 124 of the fifth embodiment is applied, during the low probability mode (low frequency support mode), almost no reservation information on the second ball entry section side is acquired; mode), it becomes difficult to obtain reservation information on the first ball entry section side. Therefore, for example, during the low probability mode (low frequency support mode), the first confirmation display time is set so that the V winning rate varies depending on the number of pending information on the first ball entry section side, and the first confirmed display time is set in the low probability mode (high frequency During the support mode), it is preferable to set the first confirmed display time so that the V winning rate varies depending on the number of pending information on the second ball entry section side.

(72) In the sixth embodiment, when the common reservation number CRN is 7 or 8 in the high probability mode, the first confirmed display time is set by lottery. The length of the first confirmed display time may be determined depending on the number of pending items, such as 15.0 sec is set in the case of 8 items, and 0.5 sec is set in the case of 8 items. In this case, as long as the common reservation number CRN is 8 (upper limit number) and there is a jackpot result, a V prize will occur, creating a novel gaming experience that completely links the number of reservations and the consecutive winning rate. can do. In such a configuration, it is preferable to make the suspension information during the high-frequency support mode less likely to be acquired than the above in order to prevent a permanent succession. Specifically, the frequency at which the electric accessory 34 is opened is made lower than the above, the variable display time when reach does not occur during the high frequency support mode is made shorter than the above, and the A configuration may be considered in which the variable display time when a reach occurs during the frequency support mode is made much shorter than the above.

(73) In the seventh embodiment, the first fixed display time of the special winning result and the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode based on the first type jackpot result B and the second type jackpot result B are adjusted respectively. So, we made sure that the final display time of the special winning results and the total of the final display time and opening time of these jackpot results were the same length, but the adjustment of the first confirmed display time, the adjustment of the opening time, and the 2. The relationship between the special winning results and these jackpot results may be defined by adjusting each of the above or a combination of one or more of the above.

(74) In the seventh embodiment, it goes without saying that the chance effects are not limited to those described above.

(75) In the seventh embodiment, in the case of a special losing result, the first confirmed display time is set based on the relationship with the first type jackpot result B and the second type jackpot result B. However, the above-mentioned first confirmation display time may be set at a predetermined rate when the result is a normal result. Specifically, for example, a predetermined lottery may be performed when the result is normally out of the range, and when the lottery is won, the first confirmed display time may be set.

(76) In each of the above embodiments, the number of prize balls (“1”) based on the ball entering the second ball entry portion 33e or the second operating port 134 is transferred to the first ball entry portion 33d or the first operating port 133. Although the number of prize balls is set to be less than the number of prize balls ("3") based on the number of pitches entered, the number is not limited to this. The number of prize balls based on balls entering the second ball entry section 33e and the second operating port 134 is set to be equal to or greater than the number of prize balls based on balls entering the first ball entry section 33d and the first operating port 133. It is also possible to set it so that

However, as already explained, setting the prize ball number to "1" based on the ball entering the second ball entry section 33e or the second operating port 134 shown in the above embodiment has the effect of accelerating the progress of the game. This has a close relationship with shortening the variable display time and the like in emphasizing the difference between the normal gaming state and the high-precision gaming state. If the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering the second ball entry portion 33e or the second operating port 134 is set to "2", "3", etc., many prize balls will be awarded to the player. obtain. For this reason, if you want to suppress the granting of excessive benefits, you can try to reduce the entry rate (rate of acquiring pending information) or reduce the reduction in variable display time and fixed display time. It is assumed that such measures will be necessary. This becomes a factor that hinders the speedy progression of game rounds. Therefore, desirably, the number of prize balls based on the balls entering the second ball entry portion 33e or the second operating port 134 may be set to "1" so as to be able to suppress the increase in the number of game balls in the high-precision gaming state.

(77) In each of the above embodiments, by devising the structure of the operating port unit 33, the game ball that enters the upper operating port 33a is placed in either the first ball entering section 33d or the second ball entering section 33e. Although the game ball that enters the lower operating port 33b enters only the second ball entry portion 33e, this may be changed as follows. Specifically, the lower operating port 33b and the electric accessory 34 accompanying it may be provided separately from the upper operating port 33a, and a configuration corresponding to the second ball entry portion 33e may be added to the lower operating port 33b. good. In other words, the game ball that enters the upper operating port 33a can enter either the first ball entry section 33d or the second ball entry section 33e, while the game ball that enters the lower operating port 33b is provided separately. It may be configured such that the ball enters the second ball entry section. In such a configuration, when a ball enters the first ball entry section 33d or the second ball entry section 33e through the upper operating port 33a, the number of prize balls is set to "3", and the number of balls awarded to the added second ball entry section is "3". It is also possible to set the number of prize balls to "1" when a ball enters through the downward operation opening 33b.

(78) In each of the above embodiments, the notification/effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are provided separately, but it is also possible to provide one control device that integrates the functions of these control devices 82 and 212. .

(79) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine where a game ball is placed in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Furthermore, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The inventions described in each feature group below are as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns in a variable manner. When a prize is entered into the activated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of the symbols is started.If you win the lottery , a specific symbol combination, etc. is stopped and displayed, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175)." This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function for executing winning processing for the operating opening by the main controller 81);
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing special information acquired by the acquisition means;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main control device 81) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Privilege awarding means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
A pattern display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying the pattern;
Starting variable display of symbols in the symbol display means based on the award determination being made by the award determination means, and stopping and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the award determination as one game round. , a display control means for controlling the display of the picture display means (a function for executing the game time control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means (a function for executing processing at the start of stop by the main controller 81) for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed;
a stop display execution unit (a function for executing final display processing by the main controller 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting unit;
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display or the stop display immediately thereafter to a first period (a special first fixed display time). If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter, the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display is defined as the first period. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a different second period (determined display time when the first determined display time is set to normal time).

According to the above configuration, the stop display period of a game round can be made different depending on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied during the game round or not. This makes it possible to change the period from the start of variable display of symbols until the end of static display of symbols (playing time for one game round) in accordance with changes in the situation that occur during that game round. Become.

By the way, in recent gaming machines, generally, symbols are displayed variably based on a predetermined variable display period, and once the variable display starts, the period cannot be changed. For this reason, for example, if there is a request to change the playing time of a game round in the middle of a game round, if you try to respond by changing the variable display period, you will have no choice but to completely redesign the gaming machine. . Even if such a change could be realized, during variable display, visual or auditory game effects are usually performed in line with the variable display period, in addition to the variable display of symbols, and in some cases, In some cases, these game presentations are performed in combination. For this reason, in case the variable display period is changed to variable display, it is necessary to have a configuration that allows various effects adjustments to be made during the variable display, which inconveniences a significant increase in the burden of effect design. be. In this regard, the present configuration utilizes the stop display period to change the game time of a game session. This makes it possible to change the playing time for one game while keeping the variable display period as the predetermined period. Moreover, since the original purpose of the stop display is to show the result of the award determination, there are many cases where no game performance is performed during the stop display period, or even if it is performed, it is a simple one. For this reason, even if the stop display period is changed, the burden of adjusting the performance is light, and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. In this way, according to the present configuration, it is possible to change the playing time of a game round in the middle of the game round while suppressing inconveniences in game design. This makes it possible to increase the performance effect by allowing sudden addition of game performance, change the tempo of game progress, etc., and improve the level of interest.

In addition, in feature A1, "the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the immediately subsequent stop display to the first stop display when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter." "Means for setting the stop display period to a second period different from the period" is defined as "means for setting the stop display period to a second period different from the period", and "the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the game round to a first period (first fixed period) when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game round. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the game round, the stop display period of the game round is set to a second period (a fixed display time when the display time is set to a special time), and the stop display period of the game round is set to a second period (a fixed display time when the display time is set to a special time) 1. Means for setting the final display time (fixed display time when the fixed display time is set to normal time)".

Feature A2. Feature A1 is characterized in that the stop display period setting means includes a stop display setting means for setting a stop display period at a timing after the start of the variable display and before the end of the stop display. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the length of the stop display period can be changed according to a change in the situation after the variable display starts. At this time, with this configuration, the stop display period is set at the latest before the end of the stop display, so the stop display can be properly executed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to change the gaming period related to one gaming session in the middle of the gaming session while suppressing the occurrence of inconvenience in executing the stop display.

Feature A3. A feature characterized in that the stop display setting means includes means for setting a stop display period corresponding to the start timing of the stop display (a function for executing processing at the start of stop by the main controller 81). The gaming machine described in A2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reflect a situation change that occurs before the start timing of the stop display on the length of the stop display period. This makes it possible to deal with changes in the situation that occur at the end of the variable display, and provides an optimal configuration when changing the game period for one game session midway through.

Feature A4. During the stop display, the present invention is characterized by being equipped with a performance control means (a function for executing stop-start processing by the notification/performance control device 82) that controls the game performance to be performed by a predetermined performance means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

The length of the stop display period can be changed according to changes in the situation during a game, and according to the above configuration, it is possible to add or reduce game effects according to the changes in the situation during the stop display. Become. In other words, it becomes possible to use the stop display period as a period for adjusting the performance, making it easier to adjust the performance compared to adding or subtracting in a variable display where game performances are likely to occur frequently. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, regarding the "predetermined presentation means" of feature A4, the "picture display means" may also serve as the "predetermined presentation means", or a means different from the "picture display means" may take on the role. .

Feature A5. The first period is longer than the second period,
A feature characterized in that the effect control means includes means for controlling so that a predetermined game effect (a preview display effect in which a bubble image appears) is performed when the stop display period is the first period. A gaming machine described on A4.

According to the above configuration, by setting the stop display period to the longer first period, it is possible to execute a predetermined game effect, so it is possible to allow the addition of a game effect during the execution of a game round. . This makes it possible to expand production opportunities and enhance production effects.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A4 or A5, wherein the performance control means includes means for ending the game performance performed during the stop display by the end of the stop display.

For example, if the game effect continues even after the stop display ends (after the end of the game round), there is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to recognize the boundary between the game round and the subsequent game round. Furthermore, if the game effect overlaps with the game effect to be executed in the next game round, there is a risk that the distinguishability between the effects may decrease or the player's understanding of the effect may be hindered. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the game performance performed during the stop display is configured to end by the end of the stop display, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed, and the play is made easier. It becomes possible to improve the quality.

Feature A7. a first control means (main control device 81) including the display control means;
A second control means (notification/effect control device 82, display control device 212) including the effect control means,
The first control means sends a predetermined command (first stop display command) including period information corresponding to the first period or the second period to the second control means in response to the start timing of the stop display. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means for outputting to the main controller 81 (a function for executing final display processing by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the first control means is responsible for controlling the variable display and stop display of the symbols, and the second control means is responsible for controlling the execution of game effects, so that it is possible to distribute the load of control processing. This makes it possible to suppress load concentration compared to the case where each of the above controls is performed by a single control device. On the other hand, due to the configuration in which the game performance is performed on the premise of a stop display, the second control means has no choice but to function as a subordinate device of the first control means. It is configured to output commands. Therefore, the reception timing of the predetermined command can be grasped as the start timing of the stop display, and the second control means can easily grasp the start timing of the stop display compared to the case where the command is outputted in advance. . Moreover, since the command includes period information corresponding to the first period or the second period, it is possible to simultaneously grasp the length of the stop display period. As a result, the number of times commands are exchanged during stop display is reduced, making it possible to reduce the loads on both control means.

Note that feature A7 is defined as “having a first pattern as the pattern,
When a game round is executed, a second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display means or a display means different from the symbol display means, and a stop result corresponds to the result of the award determination. a second picture display control means (a function for executing a variable display control process by the notification/effect control device 82) that controls the display of the picture display means or the different display means so as to stop displaying the picture;
a first control means (main control device 81) including the display control means;
A second control means (notification/presentation control device 82, display control device 212) including the second picture display control means,
The first control means sends a predetermined command (first stop display command) including period information corresponding to the first period or the second period to the second control means in response to the start timing of the stop display. (a function for executing final display processing by the main control device 81)."

Feature A8. When setting the stop display period to the first period, the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to be longer than the second period and for which the stop display period is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, further comprising means for setting a period shorter than the period of the variable display executed immediately before.

If the stop display period is made unnecessarily long, the user will tend to get the impression that the waiting time from the end of one variable display to the start of the next variable display is long, which may lead to a feeling of lag. In this regard, in this configuration, even when the stop display period is set as the longer first period, it is configured to be shorter than the variable display period. This makes it possible to proceed with the game at a good tempo even when the stop display period becomes longer, and to ensure ease of play.

Feature A9. The stop display period includes a variable period (one of a first fixed display time and a second fixed display time) in which a period corresponding to the first period or the second period can be set, and a fixed length. a fixed period (one of a first fixed display time and a second fixed display time), and the other of the variable period and the fixed period starts after one of the variable period and the fixed period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

In the above configuration, since a fixed period with a fixed length is included in the stop display period, it is possible to appropriately secure the minimum required stop display period even though the length of the stop display period is variable. becomes.

Feature A10. The stop display period is independent of the first stop display period (one of the first confirmed display time and the second confirmed display time) that is set based on the fulfillment status of the predetermined condition. a second stop display period (the other of the first fixed display time and second fixed display time) set to The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the other of the first stop display period and the second stop display period is started.

According to the above configuration, apart from the first stop display period whose length changes depending on the fulfillment status of the predetermined condition, a second stop display period is provided that is set regardless of the fulfillment status of the predetermined condition. . This makes it possible to make complex adjustments by setting the second stop display period as a fixed period to ensure the minimum stop display period, or by making it a variable period that can be set based on conditions different from the predetermined conditions. Compared to the case where the stop display period is made up of only the first stop display period, the range of selection can be expanded. In particular, when the first stop display period starts after the second stop display period has elapsed, the stop display period can be changed even after the start of the stop display, and special information can be generated during the stop display. It will also be possible to respond to

Feature A11. The stop display period setting means includes:
first means for setting the stop display period to the second period;
a second means for changing the stop display period set to the second period by the first means to the first period based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the stop display period set as the second period is changed to the first period after the fact. In this case, for example, even if a problem occurs in which the stop display period is not set to the second period, the settings for the first period made in advance may remain, so it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the stop display itself cannot be executed. become.

Feature A12. A lottery means (a function for executing a win/fail determination process by the main controller 81) that performs a lottery process based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (winning at the operating port);
Based on the lottery processing being performed by the lottery means, a game repeat operation is started on a predetermined notification means (main display section 43, symbol display device 41), and a notification result corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is started. Game round control means (game round control processing by the main control device 81 ) and
Equipped with
The game time control means is characterized in that it includes means for defining a game period for one game time in the middle of the game time (a function for executing processing at the time of stop start by the main control device 81). A gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, since the game period of a game round can be defined in the middle of the game round, adjustments such as lengthening or shortening the game period can be made while the game round is in progress. can be done. As a result, when performing a game performance using the game period, it becomes possible to allow sudden addition or deletion of a game performance, and it becomes possible to increase the flexibility of performance adjustment.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features A1 to A11 above may be applied to the feature A12. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature A13. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function for executing winning processing for the operating opening by the main controller 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers being an upper limit;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attached information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is a grant determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination for the
Privilege awarding means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means indicates that the game return operation is ended. A game time control means (by the main controller 81) that controls a predetermined notification means so that the game reuse operation of each game time is performed as one time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. (a function that executes game control processing);
Equipped with
The game time control means is a means for specifying the timing at which the game time operation of the next game time is started for the game time in the middle of the game time (the main controller 81 executes a stop start process). A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of

According to the above configuration, it is possible to specify the start timing of the next game round in the middle of a game round, so the start timing can be delayed or advanced. As a result, when performing a game performance using the game rounds, it becomes possible to allow sudden addition or deletion of a game performance, and it becomes possible to increase the flexibility of performance adjustment.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features A1 to A11 above may be applied to the feature A13. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Note that the "predetermined condition" in the feature A1 does not necessarily have to be a single condition, and may be composed of a plurality of conditions. Therefore, for example, if the configuration has a first condition and a second condition as conditions, the case where both of them are satisfied is considered to be a case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the case where at least one of them is not satisfied can be interpreted as a case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In this case, the case where both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied is not necessarily limited to the case where those conditions are satisfied at the same time; for example, the second condition is satisfied after the first condition is satisfied. It may also be a step-by-step process, such as when . Furthermore, failure of a certain condition to be satisfied can also be interpreted as a "predetermined condition." That is, a case where the above-mentioned specific condition is not satisfied can be interpreted as a case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a case where the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied can be interpreted as a case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. This also applies to the above features A2 to A13.

Feature A14. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function for executing winning processing for the operating opening by the main controller 81);
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing special information acquired by the acquisition means;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main control device 81) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Privilege awarding means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
A pattern display means (main display section 43) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
The pattern display means is configured to cause the pattern display device to start variable display of the pattern based on the addition determination performed by the addition determination device, and to stop displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the addition determination. A display control means that performs display control (a function that executes the game time control process by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
a first control means (main control device 81) including at least the display control means;
a second control means (notification/performance control device 82) that controls the game based on commands output from the first control means;
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means (a function for executing processing at the start of stop by the main controller 81) for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed;
a stop display execution unit (a function for executing final display processing by the main controller 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting unit;
Equipped with
A game characterized in that the first control means includes means for outputting a predetermined command (variation command) output based on the variable display including information regarding the stop display period. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since information regarding the stop display period is included in the variable display command that is output based on the variable display being performed, the dedicated command for the stop display period can be omitted. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands. In addition, since the command for variable display is also used as a notification command for the stop display period, the number of times commands are exchanged between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and both control means It becomes possible to reduce the load on

In addition, in feature A14 above, "a predetermined command to be output based on the execution of the variable display" may be replaced by "a predetermined command that includes information regarding the mode of the variable display" or "a predetermined command that is outputted based on the execution of the variable display" or a predetermined command to be output based on the fact that the variable display has been performed.

Feature A15. The predetermined command includes a first information area (first information area 341) that includes information regarding the type of command, and a second information area (second information area 342) that includes information regarding the period of the variable display. is set,
The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the first control means includes means for including and outputting information regarding the stop display period in the second information area.

According to the above configuration, since the information regarding the stop display period is included in the second information area and output, it is possible to suppress the generation of surplus bits and facilitate coordination with other commands.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function for executing winning processing for the operating opening by the main controller 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers being an upper limit;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attached information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is a grant determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the
Privilege awarding means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
A pattern display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying the pattern;
Starting variable display of symbols in the symbol display means based on the award determination being made by the award determination means, and stopping and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the award determination as one game round. , a display control means for controlling the display of the symbol display means so that each game round is played according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81); )and,
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determination means, before the predetermined special information becomes the determination target. A destination specifying means (a function for executing confirmation processing for a pending notice by the main controller 81) at the timing of
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means (a function for executing processing at the start of stop by the main controller 81) for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed;
a stop display execution unit (a function for executing final display processing by the main controller 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting unit;
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the immediately subsequent stop display to the stop display period of the stop display when the destination specifying means performs the specification during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting based on a specified result (a function for executing processing at the start of stopping by the main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to correlate the determination result of the provision determination for the special information that has been previously specified with the stop display period of the gaming session. This makes it possible to utilize the length of the stop display period as a suggestion effect of a previously specified result, etc., and it is possible to diversify the effect variations. Furthermore, in the above configuration, when a player is specified during a game round, the stop display period for that game round is set based on the result of the game round, so the contents of the special information are promptly reflected in the game round. be able to. For example, in a configuration in which when a player is specified by the player specifying means while a game round is in progress, the result is reflected in the next and subsequent game rounds, the specific game round for which the player is identified is the same as the game round in progress. If the game is played next, it becomes difficult to secure an opportunity to change the stop display period. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the stop display period can be changed including the game session in progress, it is possible to stably secure change opportunities. In particular, in a configuration in which the stop display period is used as a suggestive effect, the opportunities for performing the effect can be expanded and the interest level can be improved.

In addition, in feature B1, "the stop display period setting means is configured to set the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display or when the specification is performed by the destination specifying means during the stop display immediately thereafter. "a means for setting a stop display period based on the identification result of the player specifying means" is defined as "a means for setting a stop display period based on the identification result of the player specifying means", and "a means for setting a stop display period based on the identification result of the player specifying means", It may also be read as "means for setting the display period based on the identification result of the destination identification means".

Feature B2. The display control means includes a destination identification determination means (a function of executing the process of step S1203 by the main control device 81) for determining whether the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period based on the determination result of the destination specifying determination means.

For example, if the configuration is such that each time the destination is specified by the destination specifying means, it is directly reflected in the setting of the stop display period, if the destination is specified multiple times in one game, the stop This may force the setting of the display period to be redone, which may lead to an increase in processing load. In this regard, in the present configuration, the process of specifying the destination and the process of determining the result thereof are performed separately, and the stop display period is set based on the result of the latter. At this time, by executing the determination process in accordance with the setting timing of the stop display period, it becomes possible to set the stop display period all at once, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature B3. When it has been determined that the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result, the determination processing in the destination identification determination means and the identification result of the destination identification means in the stop display period setting means are performed. The gaming machine according to feature B2, further comprising a limiting means (a function for executing the process of step S1202 by the main controller 81) for limiting at least one of the stop display period setting processes based on the above-mentioned characteristics.

For example, in a configuration in which a suggestive effect that suggests a specific result, etc. is performed over multiple game sessions, the current game session is subject to the execution of the suggestive effect that started from the previous game session. There are cases. In such a case, if the stop display period is set based on a specific result that occurred during the game, there is a risk that the settings will be changed or overlapped. In this regard, in this configuration, if it has been determined that the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result, the determination process by the destination identification determination means and the stop display period based on the identification result of the destination identification means. Since the configuration is such that at least one of the setting processes is restricted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of setting changes and duplications.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, characterized in that even if the restriction is performed by the restriction means, the identification by the destination identification means is not restricted.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to continue to perform the process of specifying the destination while restricting the judgment process by the judgment means for specifying the destination in order to suppress changes and duplication of the settings of the stop display period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that even other game performances using the previously specified result are restricted, and it is possible to provide a configuration suitable for diversifying and compounding the performances.

Feature B5. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to a first period (first confirmed display time) when the identification result of the destination specifying means is a first result (identification of information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence). (determined display time when set to a special time), and if the destination specifying means does not perform the specification during the variable display or the stop display immediately thereafter, or the specification result of the destination specifying means is the first result. When the second result (identification of information corresponding to a normal outlier result) is different from the above, the stop display period is set to a second period different from the first period (when the first confirmed display time is set to the normal time). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, further comprising means for determining a fixed display time.

According to the above configuration, the stop display period can be varied depending on the content of the result specified by the first specifying means, and the length of the stop display period can be used as a suggestive effect that suggests the first specify result, etc. It becomes possible to realize this in a practically preferable manner.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the first period is longer than the two periods.

For example, if the configuration is such that the first period when the earlier specified result is the first result is shorter than the second period when no earlier specified or the earlier specified result is not the first result, The second period, which is a typical stop display period, has to be made longer, which may lead to a delay in game progress. In this regard, in this configuration, since the first period is configured to be longer than the second period, the constraints of the first period can be eliminated when the second period is shortened, and the second period is displayed as stopped. It becomes possible to set the period to be suitable for the original purpose of the period. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress delay in game progress and provide a suitable configuration for utilizing the stop display period as a suggestive effect.

Feature B7. Equipped with a performance control means (a function for executing stop/start processing by the notification/performance control device 82) that controls the game performance to be performed by a predetermined performance means,
The effect control means is a means (processing in steps S1602 and S1603 by the notification/effect control device 82) for controlling so that a special effect (a preview display effect in which a bubble image appears) is performed during the stop display period that is the first period. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the above function.

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is performed using the longer first period, it is possible to perform the special performance after appropriately securing the performance time. Furthermore, by configuring the special effect to be performed during the stop display period, it becomes possible to clearly differentiate it from other effects performed during the variable display. In particular, during the stop display period, the pattern is stopped and displayed, and the result of the application determination has already been displayed. Therefore, by executing the special performance during such a period, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the pictures and effectively increase the degree of attention to the special performance. Moreover, since a special performance can be performed in the game session in progress when the player is specified, it is possible to allow the addition of a special performance in the middle of the game, and it is possible to expand performance opportunities.

In addition, regarding the "predetermined presentation means" of feature B7, the "picture display means" may also serve as the "predetermined presentation means", or a means different from the "picture display means" may take on the role. .

Feature B8. having a first pattern as the pattern;
When a game round is executed, a second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display means or a display means different from the symbol display means, and a stop result corresponds to the result of the award determination. a second picture display control means (a function for executing a variable display control process by the notification/effect control device 82) that controls the display of the picture display means or the different display means so as to stop displaying;
When the specification is performed by the destination specifying means, the second picture can be stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the specification result of the destination specifying means,
The second picture display control means includes:
When the stop display period is set to the first period by the stop display period setting means, the second picture stopped and displayed upon the end of the variable display is changed to a stop result corresponding to the identification result of the destination specifying means. Equipped with a changing means for changing (a function of executing re-variation processing by the notification/performance control device 82),
The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, wherein the changing means performs the changing during the stop display period that is the first period.

According to the above configuration, the second picture is displayed separately from the first picture. Since this second symbol is stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the result of the award determination, it is assumed that the player is watching it with great interest. In addition, in this configuration, the second symbol can be stopped and displayed as a stop result corresponding to the earlier specified result, and the second symbol can be used to suggest the earlier specified result, etc. has been done. Therefore, the player can easily notice the suggestive performance, and can suitably increase expectations for the subsequent game round. Moreover, according to this configuration, when the stop display period is set to the first period, the second picture is changed to the stop result corresponding to the previously specified result. This makes it possible to add changes to the stop result mid-way, making it possible to expand performance opportunities. In addition, since the above changes are made in the first period, which is the longer period, it is possible to ensure an appropriate change period, which may prevent the changes from being made properly or the period for displaying the suspension results after the change. Such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Note that feature B8 is configured such that, when the specification is performed by the destination specifying means, the pattern can be stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the identification result of the destination specifying means,
The display control means includes:
When the stop display period is set to the first period by the stop display period setting means, the stopped display pattern is changed to a stop result corresponding to the identification result of the destination specifying means when the variable display ends. Equipped with means of change,
The change means performs the change during the stop display period that is the first period.''

Feature B9. The changing means causes the second picture that was stopped and displayed upon the end of the variable display to be variably displayed again during the stop display period, and the means for stopping and displaying the stop result corresponding to the identification result of the destination specifying means (notifying means) - The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is equipped with a function of executing re-variation processing and stop display processing by the production control device 82.

For example, if the stop result is changed instantly, the player may not notice the change. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the interposition of the re-variable display makes it easier to notice the change in the stop result, and the significance of the suggestive effect by changing the second picture can be suitably ensured. Further, by displaying the variable display again, it is possible to add the fun of guessing which stop result will be changed, which improves the interest.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the changing means includes means for variably displaying the second picture again when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the stop display.

According to the above configuration, since the second picture is variably displayed again after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the stop display period, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the stop result before variable display again. In addition, it becomes easier to recognize that the re-variable display has been performed, and it becomes possible to facilitate the player's understanding of the performance. Moreover, by providing a time period before the re-variable display, it is possible to arouse expectations for the re-variable display and improve interest.

Feature B11. The second picture display control means includes:
a first changing means as the changing means;
When the stop display period is set to the second period by the stop display period setting means, the second picture that is stopped and displayed upon the end of the variable display is set to a stop result that is different from the stop result that was stopped and displayed. a second changing means for changing;
The game according to any one of features B6 to B10, wherein the second changing means includes means for starting the change before the start of the stop display in which the stop display period is the second period. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the second picture can be changed even when the stop display period is the second period, it is possible to increase the frequency of changing the second picture. This reduces the player's discomfort when the second symbol is changed, and prevents the player from having excessive expectations due to the misunderstanding that it is a special performance. However, since the second period is shorter than the first period, there is a concern that it will be difficult to secure a change period. In this regard, in this configuration, when changing the second picture in a situation where the stop display period is the second period, the change of the second picture is started before the start of the stop display, and compared to the case of the first period. It is said that the structure will be brought forward. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately secure the change period, and problems such as not being able to properly perform the change or not being able to properly secure the display period for the stop result after the change can be suppressed.

Feature B12. According to any one of features B8 to B11, the display control means includes means for maintaining the stop display result of the first picture even if the stop result of the second picture is changed by the changing means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop result of the second symbol is changed, it is possible to recognize the state of the stop display from the first symbol, and the function and significance of the stop display can be ensured. It becomes possible.

In addition, when applying any of the above-mentioned features B9 to B12 to the above-mentioned feature B8 that has been replaced, in each of the above-mentioned features B9 to B12, "second picture" → "picture", "second picture display control means" →"Display control means" can be read interchangeably.

Feature B13. The configuration is such that a first type period and a second type period having different lengths can be set as the first period,
When the identification result of the destination identification means is a first predetermined result and when the identification result is a second predetermined result different from the first predetermined result, the first period may be the type 1 period. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B12, wherein at least one of the probability of being set and the probability of setting the second type period are different.

According to the above configuration, the length of the first period can be different depending on whether the identification result of the destination identification means is the first predetermined result or the case where the identification result is the second predetermined result. Thereby, when the stop display period of the first period is executed, it is possible to give the user the pleasure of guessing the specific content from the length thereof, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature B14. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function for executing winning processing for the operating opening by the main controller 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers being an upper limit;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attached information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is a grant determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the
Privilege awarding means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
A pattern display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying the pattern;
Starting variable display of symbols in the symbol display means based on the award determination being made by the award determination means, and stopping and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the award determination as one game round. , a display control means for controlling the display of the symbol display means so that each game round is played according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81); )and,
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determination means, before the predetermined special information becomes the determination target. A destination specifying means (a function for executing confirmation processing for a pending notice by the main controller 81) at the timing of
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means (a function for executing processing at the start of stop by the main controller 81) for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed;
a stop display execution unit (a function for executing final display processing by the main controller 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting unit;
Prepare,
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period of the stop display based on the identification result of the destination specifying means (a function of executing processing at the start of stop by the main controller 81). A gaming machine with special features.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature B1 can be expected. Note that each configuration described in any one of the features B1 to B13 above may be applied to the feature B14. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function for executing winning processing for the operating opening by the main controller 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers being an upper limit;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attached information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is a grant determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the
Privilege awarding means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
A pattern display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying the pattern;
Starting variable display of symbols in the symbol display means based on the award determination being made by the award determination means, and stopping and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the award determination as one game round. , a display control means for controlling the display of the symbol display means so that each game round is played according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81); )and,
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
a stop display period setting unit (a function for executing processing at the start of stop by the main controller 81) for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed;
a stop display execution unit (a function for executing a final display process by the main controller 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting unit;
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means includes:
Grasping means for grasping the number of game rounds to be played before the execution of a specific game round corresponding to predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means (executing the processes of steps S1208 to S1211 by the main controller 81) function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: stop display setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1211 to S1218 by the main controller 81) for setting a stop display period based on the grasping result of the grasping means. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the length of the stop display period by taking into account the number of games to be played before the execution of a specific game. As a result, for example, when a specific effect is performed during the stop display period of each game session that is executed before a specific game session, the number of executions is suppressed from increasing depending on the number of memories of special information. be done.

In addition, in feature C1, "a grasping means for grasping the number of game rounds played before the execution of a specific game round corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means" is replaced with "a target for setting the stop display period". It may be read as "a grasping means for grasping the number of the game round that the target game round is from the specific game round corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means".

Feature C2. Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determination means, before the predetermined special information becomes the determination target. A destination specifying means (a function of executing a confirmation process for a pending notice by the main controller 81) is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the stop display setting means includes means for setting a stop display period based on the identification result of the destination specifying means and the grasping result of the grasping means.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to correlate the result of the granting determination corresponding to the special information that has been previously specified with the stop display period of the gaming session. This makes it possible to utilize the length of the stop display period as a suggestion effect of a previously specified result, etc., and it is possible to diversify the effect variations.

On the other hand, in the above configuration, a plurality of pieces of special information can be stored, and the first specifying means may perform the first specifying under a situation where a large number of special information is stored. In such a case, the specific game round that is the target of the previous specification will be executed with a large delay from the timing of the previous specification by the first specification means. In such a case, if the configuration is such that the previous specified result is immediately reflected in the stop display period of the game, the number of other games that intervene until the specific game will increase, resulting in a hint effect for which game. This may make it difficult for the player to understand what is going on, which may cause confusion among the players. Furthermore, for example, in a configuration in which, when the destination is specified by the destination specifying means, the stop display period is set as a special period until immediately before the execution of a specific game is repeated, the number of repetitions depends on the number of memories of special information. If the number of players increases, it is assumed that the player may misunderstand the intention of the performance. In this regard, in this configuration, the stop display period is set based on the number of game times from the specific game time that the target game time for which the stop display period is to be set is counted. As a result, in addition to being able to adjust the number of intervening games between the time when the stop display period is set as a special period and the time when a specific game time is executed, the stop display can also be adjusted depending on the number of special information stored. This also suppresses the occurrence of inconveniences such as an increase in the number of times a period is repeated as a special period. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform the function as a suggestive effect during the stop display period, and it is possible to improve interest.

Feature C3. The grasping means is
Storage number grasping means (step S1301 by main controller 81) for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the special information specified by the destination identifying means is stored in the acquired information storage means; function) and
The apparatus according to feature C2, further comprising means for grasping the number of times based on the grasping result of the memory count grasping means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1208 and S1209 by the main controller 81). Game machine.

For example, if another special information that follows the previously identified special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, that subsequent special information will also be included in the calculation, and there is a risk that the number of games played cannot be properly grasped. There is. In this regard, with this configuration, the number of times the previously identified special information is stored is determined, and the number of games played is determined based on the result, so it is possible to eliminate the influence of subsequent special information. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Feature C4. The stop display setting means sets the stop display period to a first period (corresponding to the identification result of the destination specifying means being a predetermined result) when the number of times grasped by the grasping means is less than or equal to a predetermined number. When the first confirmed display time is set to a special time (fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to a special time), and the number of times grasped by the grasping means is larger than the predetermined number of times, the stop display period is set to a period different from the first period. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for setting the period to two (determined display time when the first determined display time is set to normal time).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the number of special information stored is large, the stop display period can be limited to the first period only for game times that are relatively close to the specific game time. As a result, when using the length of the stop display period as a suggestion for a specific result, etc., it becomes easier for players to associate the length of the stop display period with a specific game, and it functions as a suggestion. can be suitably demonstrated.

In addition, when feature C4 is applied to feature C2, "the stop display setting means sets the stop display period so that when the grasp result of the grasping means is the first result, and means for setting the stop display period to a second period different from the first period when the grasping result of the grasping means is a second result different from the first result. It can also be read as "I am prepared."

Feature C5. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to the first period based on the number of memories grasped by the memory number grasping means and the predetermined number of times when the identification is performed by the destination specifying means. A waiting number setting means (a function for executing the process of step S1209 by the main controller 81) for setting the number of waiting times for waiting for the set processing (waiting number counter WC),
The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the stop display setting means sets the stop display period based on the number of times of waiting when the number of times of waiting is set by the number of waiting times setting means.

According to the above configuration, once the number of times of waiting is set, the stop display period can be set from then on by managing the number of times of waiting. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to compare the number of memories with a predetermined number of times each time the stop display period is set, and to determine which period to set the stop display period based on the results, which increases the processing load. It becomes possible to reduce the

Feature C6. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period in a plurality of game times including the target game time when the stop display period is the first period in the target game time for which the stop display period is set. The gaming machine according to feature C4 or C5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for setting the special period setting to the first period (a function of executing a process of determining the number of execution times DN of the special period setting by the main control device 81).

Since the original purpose of the stop display is to show the player the result of the grant determination, if the stop display period is extremely long, the player is likely to get the impression that it has been delayed; conversely, if the stop display period is extremely short, the player This makes it difficult to recognize the judgment results. For this reason, the difference between the first period and the second period is likely to be limited, and there is a concern that even if the stop display period is the first period, the player may not notice or overlook it. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the stop display period is set as the first period in the target game round, the stop display period is also set as the first period in subsequent game rounds. For this reason, even if something is overlooked in the first game, it can be noticed in a later game, and the function as a suggestive performance can be suitably performed.

Feature C7. The plurality of game times are configured such that a first game time and a second game time that are different from each other can be set,
In the case where the specified result of the destination specifying means is a first predetermined result, and in the case where the specified result is a second predetermined result different from the first predetermined result, the first number of times is determined as the plurality of gaming times. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein at least one of the probability that the second game round is set and the probability that the second game round is set are different.

According to the above configuration, the number of gaming times in which the stop display period is the first period is determined depending on whether the specified result of the destination specifying means is the first predetermined result or the case where the specified result is the second predetermined result. It can be different. Thereby, it is possible to give the user the pleasure of guessing the specific content based on the number of executions in the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature C8. The plurality of game times are a predetermined specific number of game times (set number of times AN),
The stop display period setting means actually sets the stop display period to the first stop display period based on the number of memories and the specified number of times grasped by the memory number grasping means when the specification is performed by the destination specifying means. The game according to feature C6 or C7, characterized in that the game is equipped with an execution number setting means for setting the number of executions for a period (a function of executing a process of grasping the execution number DN of the special period setting by the main controller 81). Machine.

The number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means varies from time to time, but in this configuration, the number of executions with the stop display period as the first period is set based on the magnitude relationship between the number of memories and the specific number of times. be done. For this reason, the stop display period can be set to the first period within the range of the number of memories stored each time, and it becomes possible to appropriately perform suggestive effects.

Feature C9. According to any one of features C6 to C8, the execution number setting means includes means for setting the execution number so that the stop display period of the specific game round is not the first period. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, even though the variable display of a specific game time has ended, the stop display period is prevented from continuing to be the first period. Thereby, it is possible to easily understand which game round the suggestive effect is for, and the function of the suggestive effect can be suitably performed.

Feature C10. The execution number setting means sets the specific number of times as the number of executions with the stop display period as the first period when the number of memories grasped by the memory number grasping means is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, and The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C9, further comprising means for setting the number of executions to be a number smaller than the specific number of times when the number of executions is smaller than the specific number of times.

According to the above configuration, different execution times are set depending on whether the memory count is greater than or equal to the specific number of times and when it is less than the specific number of times, so even in the latter case, the stop display period can be set as the first period. , it becomes possible to expand the opportunities for performing suggestive performances.

Feature C11. The execution number setting means sets the specific number of times as the number of executions with the stop display period as the first period when the number of memories grasped by the memory number grasping means is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, and The game according to any one of features C6 to C9, further comprising means for restricting the setting of the first period when the number of memories ascertained by the number ascertaining means is less than the specific number of times. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the setting of the first period is restricted when the number of memories is less than the specific number of times, it is possible to prevent the change of the stop display period from extending to the stop display of a specific game. Ru. As a result, it is suppressed from becoming difficult to understand which game round the suggestive performance is targeted for, and the function of the suggestive performance can be suitably performed.

Feature C12. The stop display setting means sets the stop display period of the immediately subsequent stop display to the stop display period of the stop display when the destination specifying means performs the specification during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C11, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for setting based on the identification result (a function of executing processing at the start of stopping by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the previous specification is performed, the stop display period of the game session in progress is set based on the result of the previous specification, so that the contents of the special information can be promptly reflected in the game session. . As a result, the first period can include the stop display period of the game in progress, and it becomes possible to expand the opportunities for executing the suggestive effect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function for executing winning processing for the operating opening by the main controller 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers being an upper limit;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attached information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is a grant determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the
Privilege awarding means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
A pattern display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying the pattern;
Starting variable display of symbols in the symbol display means based on the award determination being made by the award determination means, and stopping and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the award determination as one game round. , a display control means for controlling the display of the symbol display means so that each game round is played according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81); )and,
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means (a function for executing processing at the start of stop by the main controller 81) for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed;
a stop display execution unit (a function for executing a final display process by the main controller 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting unit;
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means changes the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display or when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes during the stop display immediately thereafter. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with means for executing the processing of steps S1216 to S1218 by the main control device 81.

According to the above configuration, since the stop display period is changed when the number of stored special information changes, it is possible to correlate the number of stored special information and the length of the stop display period. As a result, for example, if there is a large number of special information stored, the start timing of the next game can be brought forward by shortening the stop display period, or conversely, if there is a small number of special information stored, the stop display period may be shortened. By increasing the length of , it is possible to make adjustments such as making it difficult for the acquired information storage means to run out of special information. Moreover, with this configuration, when special information is stored, the stop display period of the game in progress can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect a change in the number of stored special information in the stop display period. As a result, especially when shortening the stop display period, responsiveness can be improved compared to a configuration that waits for the next game and then adjusts the time, promoting more efficient game progress. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature D2. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to a first period (the fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to the normal time) when the number of memories is less than a predetermined number (K=3). , means for setting the stop display period to a second period shorter than the first period (determined display time when the first determined display time is set to the time saving time) when the number of memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number; The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S1216 to S1218 by the main control device 81.

According to the above configuration, when the number of stored special information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the stop display period is set to the shorter second period, so one game is played less than when the stop display period is the first period. The gaming period related to this can be shortened. This makes it possible to promote efficient game progress and improve the ease of play.

Feature D3. The display control means includes:
variable display period setting means (a function for executing variable display time setting processing by the main controller 81) for setting a variable display period for performing the variable display;
means for executing the variable display based on the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means (a function for executing the game time control process by the main controller 81);
The variable display period setting means sets the variable display period to a type 1 period when the number of memories is less than a specific number, and sets the variable display period to a type 1 period when the number of memories is greater than or equal to the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature D2, further comprising means for setting the type 2 period to a shorter period.

According to the above configuration, when the number of stored special information is equal to or greater than a specific number, the variable display period is set to the second period on the shorter side. Such a gaming period can be shortened. This makes it possible to realize smoother game progress compared to the case where only one of these periods is shortened. In particular, under a configuration in which when special information is stored, the stop display period of the game in progress can be set based on the number of special information stored, the stop display period can be shortened prior to shortening the variable display period. can do. This makes it possible to start shortening the time as soon as possible, and to promote further efficiency.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the predetermined number and the specific number are the same number.

According to the above configuration, when the period is shortened in the variable display, the period of the stop display before and after that can be shortened, and the shortening of each period of the variable display and the stop display can be suitably harmonized. becomes possible.

Feature D5. The display control means includes a storage number grasping means for grasping the number of stored special information at a timing corresponding to the setting timing of the stop display period in the stop display period setting means (the main controller 81 executes the process of step S1216). function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period based on the grasp result of the memory number grasp means.

For example, if the configuration is such that each time special information is stored, the number of memories stored at that time is reflected in the stop display period setting, if special information is stored multiple times during a game, the stop You may be forced to reconfigure the display period. In this regard, with this configuration, the stop display period can be set based on the number of memories at the timing of setting the stop display period, so even if storage occurs multiple times, resetting is suppressed, reducing the processing load. becomes possible.

Feature D6. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to the first predetermined period when the number of memories is greater than a predetermined reference number, and sets the stop display period to the first predetermined period when the number of memories is less than or equal to the reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, further comprising means for setting the second predetermined period to be longer than the first predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, when the number of stored special information is equal to or less than the reference number, the stop display period is set as the second predetermined period on the longer side. It is possible to lengthen the gaming period related to a gaming session. This makes it difficult for the acquired information storage means to run out of special information, making it possible to suppress interruptions in game progress.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function for executing winning processing for the operating opening by the main controller 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers being an upper limit;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attached information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is a grant determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination for the
Privilege awarding means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
A pattern display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying the pattern;
Starting variable display of symbols in the symbol display means based on the award determination being made by the award determination means, and stopping and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the award determination as one game round. , a display control means for controlling the display of the symbol display means so that each game round is played according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81); )and,
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determination means, before the predetermined special information becomes the determination target. A destination specifying means (a function for executing confirmation processing for a pending notice by the main controller 81) at the timing of
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
variable display period setting means (a function for executing variable display time setting processing by the main controller 81) for setting a variable display period for performing the variable display;
means for executing the variable display based on the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means (a function for executing the game time control process by the main controller 81);
a stop display period setting unit (a function for executing processing at the start of stop by the main controller 81) for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed;
means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function for executing a final display process by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The variable display period setting means includes means for setting a variable display period based on the identification result of the destination identification means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2904 to S2917 by the main controller 81),
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting a stop display period based on the identification result of the destination specifying means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2504 to S2518 by the main controller 81). A gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, since the device includes means for setting the variable display period and the stop display period based on the information specified by the destination specifying means, the gaming period for one game round is determined according to the identification result of the destination specifying device. can be changed. This makes it possible to utilize the length of the game period related to one game round as a suggestive effect such as the above-mentioned determination result, and it is possible to diversify the effect variations.

Feature E2. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the immediately subsequent stop display to the stop display period of the stop display when the destination specifying means performs the specification during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for setting based on the identification result (a function of executing processing at the start of stopping by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the previous specification is performed, the stop display period of the game session in progress is set based on the result of the previous specification, so that the contents of the special information can be promptly reflected in the game session. . This makes it possible to secure an opportunity to change the stop display period even if the game session that is the target of previous identification is the game session that will be played next to the game session that is currently in progress. It becomes possible to expand.

Feature E3. The display control means includes:
a first destination that determines whether the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result at a first timing that is after the start of the variable display and before the start of the stop display immediately after the variable display; identification determination means (a function for executing the process of step S2504 by the main controller 81);
determining whether the identification result of the destination identifying means is a predetermined result at a second timing that is after the start of the stop display immediately after the stop display and before the start of the variable display immediately after the stop display; 2nd destination identification determination means (a function for executing the process of step S2904 by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means is a means for setting a stop display period based on the determination result of the first destination identification determining means (a function for executing a stop start process by the main controller 81);
The variable display period setting means is a means for setting a variable display period based on the determination result of the second destination identification determination means (a function for executing a process of setting a variable display time for when the main controller 81 is completely off). )and,
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the variable display period and the stop display can be adjusted regardless of whether the first specified result becomes the predetermined result during the stop display or the first specified result becomes the predetermined result during the variable display. It is possible to start changing the period as soon as possible, and it becomes possible to expand opportunities for changing the period.

Feature E4. The game according to feature E3, wherein the first timing is a timing corresponding to the start timing of the stop display immediately after the above, and the second timing is a timing corresponding to the start timing of the variable display immediately after the above. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in the first destination identification determination means, the determination process is performed in accordance with the start timing of the stop display, that is, the setting timing of the stop display period, so that the first destination identification determination means is performed in accordance with the start timing of the stop display, that is, the setting timing of the stop display period. The result can be reflected in the stop display period of the stop display. In addition, in the second destination identification determination means, the determination process is performed in accordance with the start timing of the variable display, that is, the setting timing of the variable display period, so that the result of destination identification that occurs up to the start of the variable display is This can be reflected in the variable display period of the display. In other words, no matter which timing during a game round the destination is specified, it can be immediately reflected in the stop display period and the variable display period, making it possible to further expand the change opportunities.

Feature E5. The display control means includes:
A first step of determining whether the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result at any timing after the start of the variable display and before the start of the stop display immediately after the variable display. destination identification determination means (a function for executing the process of step S2504 by the main controller 81);
Determining whether the identification result of the destination identifying means is a predetermined result at any timing after the start of the stop display immediately after the stop display and before the start of the variable display immediately after the stop display. a second destination identification determining means (a function for executing the process of step S2904 by the main controller 81);
Priority means for prioritizing one of the determination result of the first destination identification determination means and the determination result of the second destination identification determination means over the other (executes the processing of steps S2502 and S2902 by the main controller 81) function) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the stop display period setting means and the variable display period setting means set each period based on a determination result of the side prioritized by the priority means.

According to the above configuration, since the first destination identification determination means and the second destination identification determination means are provided, when the first destination identification result becomes the predetermined result during the stop display and the first destination identification result becomes the predetermined result during the variable display. Regardless of whether a predetermined result is achieved, changing the variable display period and the stopped display period can be started as soon as possible, and opportunities to change the period can be expanded. On the other hand, when the above two determination means with different determination timings are provided, if the previous determination is made between the time when one determination is made and the other determination is made, the determination results will conflict and the period will be set. This may lead to duplication or mid-course changes. In this regard, in this configuration, each period is set based on the determination result of the side prioritized by the priority means, so the determination results can be unified, and duplication of period settings and changes in the middle can be suitably suppressed. becomes possible.

Note that it is possible to apply the configuration of the feature E4 described above to the feature E5. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying the configuration of feature E4.

Feature E6. The priority means determines which of the first destination identification determination means and the second destination identification determination means determines first that the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result. The gaming machine according to feature E5, characterized in that priority is given to results.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a practically preferable aspect for unifying the determination results. In particular, if the configuration is such that priority is given to the determination result of the determination means that later determined that the specific result is the predetermined result, a delay in setting the period is likely to occur due to the need to wait for the later determination result. With this configuration, the occurrence of such a delay is suppressed, and it becomes possible to change the variable display period and the stop display period from an early stage.

Feature E7. The variable display period setting means has a first period (8.0 sec) and a second period (1.0 sec) shorter than the first period as a variable display period that can be set,
The stop display period setting means has a first predetermined period (0.7 sec) and a second predetermined period (2.0 sec) longer than the first predetermined period as a settable stop display period,
The variable display period setting means includes means for setting the variable display period to the second period when the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result,
Any of features E1 to E6 characterized in that the stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period to the second predetermined period when the identification result of the destination specifying means is a predetermined result. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, when the previously specified result is a predetermined result, the variable display period is shortened and the stop display period is lengthened, so that the proportion occupied by the stop display in one game round can be increased. . This makes it possible to enhance the presence of the stop display and increase the degree of attention to the suggestive effect.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, further comprising means for making the second predetermined period longer than the second period.

Normally, the stop display period is extremely short compared to the variable display period, but by making an extreme change that reverses the length relationship between the stop display period and the variable display period, players will feel a great deal of discomfort. can be given. This makes it easier for the player to notice the suggestive performance, making it possible to suitably heighten expectations for the subsequent game round.

Feature E9. Feature E7 or E8 includes means for making the total period of the second period and the second predetermined period shorter than the total period of the first period and the first predetermined period. gaming machines.

It is assumed that the player's interest will be more likely to be focused on the specific game round corresponding to the previously specified special information, and according to the above configuration, the period required until the specific game round can be shortened. This makes it possible for the player to quickly play a specific game round, thereby increasing the level of interest.

Feature E10. The variable display period setting means sets a variable display period for a game round to be played before a specific game round corresponding to the predetermined special information, based on the identification result of the destination specifying means,
Any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that the stop display period setting means sets a stop display period for a game round to be played before the specific game round based on the identification result of the destination specifying means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, since the periods of the variable display and the stop display that are performed before the specific game cycle differ depending on the identification result of the earlier identification means, the suggestive effect is performed using the earlier identification result. The above can be considered as a practically preferred embodiment.

<Characteristics Group F>
Feature F1. A first lottery means that performs a first lottery based on the fulfillment of a predetermined first condition (the winning of a game ball in the actuation openings 33a, 33b) function) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is conducted by the first lottery means, variable display of symbols is started on a predetermined display means (main display section 43, symbol display device 41), and the display corresponds to the result of the first lottery. a first display control means (a function for executing the game round control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means by stopping and displaying the stop result as one time in the first game round;
a second lottery means (second lottery means) that performs a second lottery different from the first lottery based on the fulfillment of a predetermined second condition different from the first condition (the winning of a game ball into the through gate 35); A function of executing the validity judgment process for ordinary figures by the main control device 81);
Based on the fact that the second lottery is conducted by the second lottery means, the symbols may be changed on the predetermined display means or display means different from the predetermined display means (symbol display device 41, accessory display section 44). A second display control that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means by starting the display and stopping and displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery as one time of the second game round. means (a function for executing the normal figure game time control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
It has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. ,
comprising a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing by the main controller 81) for shifting the gaming state to any of the plurality of gaming states based on the lottery result of the first lottery;
The second display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed (a function that executes a setting process of a regular map confirmation display time by the main controller 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function for executing the normal figure game times control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means is a means for setting a stop display period (main control A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing a setting process of a fixed display time of ordinary figures by the device 81.

Under the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the player is expected to continue playing until the end of the gaming state, but under the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, the player is expected to continue playing until the end of the gaming state. It is conceivable that the player attempts to round up the game by completing the corresponding first game round. However, in a configuration where the first game round and the second game round corresponding to the second lottery coexist, the second game round may remain incomplete at the end of the first game round. In such a case, inconveniences may occur, such as the player being unable to finish the game because he or she is concerned about the result of the second lottery, or the player finishing the game with the result still being advantageous to the player. In this regard, the present configuration is configured such that the stop display period for the second game round in the first gaming state is longer than that in the second gaming state. In this case, in the first game state, the variable display period of the second game round can be shortened by the length of the stop display period of the second game round. Therefore, the period required until the stop result is displayed can be shortened, and the result of the second lottery can be notified to the player as soon as possible. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suitably suppressed, and the ease of play is improved.

Feature F2. The feature F1 is characterized in that, during execution of one of the first game round and the second game round, the other of the first game round and the second game round can be executed. Game machine.

In a configuration in which one of the first and second game rounds can be executed while the other is being executed, by lengthening the stop display period for the second game round, the second game round is not completed at the end of the first game round. Even when the game ends, it is possible to increase the probability that the symbols of the second game round are in a stopped display state. When the symbols of the second game round are in a stopped display state, the result of the second lottery can be immediately grasped by visually recognizing the symbol, and the increased probability reduces the frequency of occurrence of the result waiting event itself. This makes it easier to quickly notify the results of the second lottery.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the second gaming state is a state in which the frequency of execution of the second gaming round per unit time is likely to be higher than that in the first gaming state.

In the first gaming state, the frequency of execution of the second gaming round per unit time is required to be lower than in the second gaming state. Under such constraints, by making the stop display period of the second game round in the first game state longer than that of the second game state, the execution frequency of the second game round per unit time in the first game state can be increased. The variable display period of the second game round can be shortened while suppressing an increase in the number of games. This makes it possible to quickly inform the players of the results of the second lottery while preventing the functionality of the first gaming state from being impaired.

Feature F4. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
a ball entry portion (lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the ball entry portion or enter the ball easily; and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion or it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state. (closed state), and a variable ball entry means (electric accessory 34) that can be switched to
Variable control means (main controller 81 (function to execute processing for electric support),
a privilege awarding means (a function for executing a gaming state transition process by the main controller 81) capable of awarding a privilege to a player based on the result of the first lottery being a specific result;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the first lottery means includes means for performing the first lottery based on the entry of game balls into the ball entry section.

According to the above configuration, during a game, the player's attention level is high for the first game round (first lottery) that has a strong connection to awarding benefits, and the player's attention level for the second game round (second lottery) is high. It is assumed that interest will be lower than in the first game round. Therefore, even with a configuration in which the stop display period of the second game round is lengthened, it becomes less noticeable during the game, and it is possible to suppress the induction of a feeling of prolongation. In this way, in a configuration where a plurality of lottery systems of the first and second lottery systems coexist, by lengthening the period of stop display of the symbols related to the lottery system in which the player is less interested, the player can reduce the feeling of prolongation during the game. It is possible to promptly notify the result of the second lottery when the first game round ends while suppressing the desire to play.

Feature F5. As the stop display period that can be set in the first gaming state, there are a plurality of periods of different lengths (4.0 sec, 10.0 sec, 16.0 sec),
The stop display period setting means is a means for selecting one of the plurality of periods and setting it as a stop display period based on the fact that the second lottery result is a predetermined result in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature F4, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S3702 to S3704 by the control device 81.

Due to the configuration in which the stop display period of the second game round is lengthened, the grace period from when the player grasps the result of the second lottery until the variable ball entry means is set to the first state tends to be long. As a result, if the variable ball entering means realizes that it will be switched to the first state when there is no intention to end the game, it is possible to trigger a so-called stop shot in which the game ball is fired at the timing of switching to the first state. There are concerns. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the stop display period of the second game round is diversified, the period until the second variable ball entry means is switched to the first state is prevented from becoming uniform. Ru. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing of switching to the first state, making it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature F6. Notification control means (notification/performance control device 82, display control device 212) that controls a predetermined notification device (symbol display device 41) to perform a specific notification (special display performance) corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control. ),
The notification control means controls the predetermined notification means so that when the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, the specific notification is performed before switching to the first state. Equipped with means for specific notification to control,
The specific notification means is:
If the length of the stop display period relating to the second game round is equal to or greater than the predetermined length, the specific notification is started during the stop display of the symbols relating to the second game round, and the length is less than the predetermined length. If so, timing setting means for setting the start timing of the specific notification so that the specific notification is started before the stop display of the symbols related to the second game round is started;
means for starting the specific notification based on the start timing set by the timing setting means;
The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when performing a specific notification using the stop display period, it is possible to appropriately secure time for the specific effect even when the stop display period is variable.

Feature F7. Notification control means (notification/performance control device 82, display control device 212) that controls a predetermined notification device (symbol display device 41) to perform a specific notification (special display performance) corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control. ),
The notification control means controls the predetermined notification means so that when the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, the specific notification is performed before switching to the first state. Equipped with means for specific notification to control,
The specific notification means is configured to perform specific notification so that the specific notification may be executed in a first execution period and the specific notification may be executed in a second execution period different from the first execution period. The gaming machine according to feature F5, further comprising means for setting an execution mode of notification.

If the execution period of specific notification is standardized, it may become possible to predict the timing of switching to the first state from the start timing of specific notification. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the execution period of the specific notification is diversified, it becomes difficult to predict the timing of switching to the first state based on the start timing of the specific notification, and the so-called stoppage is made difficult. It becomes possible to suppress it.

Feature F8. Feature F7 characterized in that the notification mode of the specific notification is the same in the case where the specific notification is performed in the first execution period and the case where the specific notification is performed in the second execution period. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult to determine the execution period of the specific notification from the notification mode of the specific notification. This makes it difficult to predict the timing of switching to the first state from the start timing of specific notification, and it becomes possible to suppress so-called stoppage.

Note that in feature F8, "the notification mode of the specific notification is common" may be replaced with "the notification mode of the specific notification is difficult to identify or cannot be identified." Even in this case, the same effects as in the above case can be achieved.

Feature F9. The game state includes a first game state (low frequency support mode) and a second game state (high frequency support mode) in which the variable ball entering means is more likely to be in the first state than the first game state. and
The first state of the variable ball entry means includes a first state (low winning support state) and a second state (first high state) in which the game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than the first state. winning support status), and
The variable control means includes means for performing the switching control so that the aspect of the first state becomes the second aspect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F8, characterized in that the predetermined condition is configured to be satisfied in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in the second game state that is likely to be the first state, the control state of the variable ball entry means (for convenience, referred to as the support state) in which one set of switching control is one or more times is changed at short intervals. Since it is easy to repeat, it is easy for players to think that even if they miss one support state, they can make up for it in the next support state. On the other hand, in the first game state where it is difficult to be in the first state, the period from the end of the support state until the next support state occurs is likely to be long, and it is difficult to expect the next support state to occur in the first place. Therefore, under the first gaming state, there is a strong need to effectively utilize the opportunity to be switched and controlled by the second mode. In this regard, in this configuration, by providing the feature F1 through the feature F5, it is possible to prevent players from finishing the game while leaving an opportunity for switching control by the second aspect, and to meet the needs of the player. It can be configured to suit.

Feature F10. The stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period so that the stop display period for the second game round is longer than the stop display period for the first game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9.

According to the above configuration, the period of variable display related to the second game time can be shortened by the lengthening of the stop display period related to the second game time. Thereby, when the player shifts his/her line of sight to the second game round while watching the first game round, it becomes easier to quickly grasp the result of the second lottery. As a result, the period required to return the line of sight to the first game round is shortened, and the occurrence of inconveniences such as missing the stop result of the first game round or the game performance during the first game round is suppressed. On the other hand, since the stop display period of the first game round is configured to be short, it is suppressed from giving the impression that the first game round is delayed while the player is viewing the first game round, and this inhibits the player's desire to play. is suppressed.

Furthermore, when feature F10 is applied to feature F2 above, "when the player shifts his/her line of sight from the first game round to the second game round during a game, the symbols of the second game round are in a stopped display state. As a result, the frequency of quickly returning the line of sight to the first game round is increased, and it is possible to better prevent the player from missing the stop result of the first game round or the game performance during the first game round. This is expected to have the effect of "being able to do things."

Feature F11. Means is provided for starting the stop display in the other of the first game round and the second game round based on the start of the stop display in one of the first game round and the second game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F10.

If there is a request to lengthen or shorten the stop display period of one picture, for example, it is possible to start the stop display of the other picture based on the end of the stop display of one picture. If so, depending on the length of the stop display period of one picture, the start timing of the stop display of the other picture may be delayed or brought forward. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the length of the stop display period is changed, it is suppressed from affecting the start timing of the stop display for the other picture, and the degree of freedom of the stop display period can be improved.

Feature F12. A first lottery means that performs a first lottery based on the fulfillment of a predetermined first condition (the winning of a game ball in the actuation openings 33a, 33b) function) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is conducted by the first lottery means, variable display of symbols is started on a predetermined display means (main display section 43, symbol display device 41), and the display corresponds to the result of the first lottery. a first display control means (a function for executing the game round control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means by stopping and displaying the stop result as one time in the first game round;
A second lottery means different from the first lottery (by the main controller 81 A function that executes the validity judgment process for general drawings),
Based on the fact that the second lottery is conducted by the second lottery means, the symbols may be changed on the predetermined display means or display means different from the predetermined display means (symbol display device 41, accessory display section 44). A second display control that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means by starting the display and stopping and displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery as one time of the second game round. means (a function for executing the normal figure game time control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The second display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed (a function that executes a setting process of a regular map confirmation display time by the main controller 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function for executing the normal figure game times control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period for the second game round so that the stop display period for the second game round is longer than the stop display period for the first game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, since the stop display period of the second game round is made relatively long, the variable display period of the second game round can be shortened accordingly. Thereby, when the player shifts his/her line of sight to the second game round while watching the first game round, it becomes easier to quickly grasp the result of the second lottery. As a result, the period required to return the line of sight to the first game round is shortened, and the occurrence of inconveniences such as missing the stop result of the first game round or the game performance during the first game round is suppressed. On the other hand, since the stop display period of the first game round is configured to be relatively short, it is possible to suppress giving the impression that the player is playing the game in the first game round for a long time. Motivation is suppressed.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A lottery means (a function for executing a win/fail determination process for regular symbols by the main controller 81) that performs a lottery process based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (a game ball enters the through gate 35);
Based on the lottery processing being performed by the lottery means, variable display of symbols is started on predetermined display means (symbol display device 41, accessory display section 44), and a stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is generated. a display control means (a function for executing the normal figure game time control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means so as to stop and display the;
A gaming suspension determination means (a function for executing gaming suspension determination processing by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not a player has suspended gaming;
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed (a function that executes a setting process of a regular map confirmation display time by the main controller 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function for executing the normal figure game times control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting a stop display period based on the determination result of the game stop determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 by the main controller 81). A gaming machine that does.

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the player is pausing the game, and the stop display period of the symbols is set based on the result. Thereby, it is possible to correlate the game situation of the player with the period during which the symbols are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, by making the stop display period shorter when the game is paused than when the game is in progress, a player who is about to round up the game can quickly learn the results of the remaining game rounds. The remaining game rounds left by the previous player are quickly used up, making it easier for the next player to start playing. Conversely, by making the stop display period longer when the game is paused than when the game is in progress, the start timing of the next game will be delayed, which may contribute to ensuring a short break. can. In this way, by correlating the player's gaming situation with the period of stop display of the symbols, it is possible to achieve things that could not be done with conventional gaming machines, and the level of interest is improved.

In addition, in feature G1, "gaming suspension determining means for determining whether the player is pausing the game" is replaced with "gaming determining means for determining whether the player is playing the game (by the main controller 81)". It may also be read as "Function to execute game suspension determination processing)". In addition, in feature G1, the configuration of the "gaming stop determination means" is deleted, and the "operating means (firing handle 54) by which the player performs the game start operation, and the operation that specifies that the said operating means has been operated." specifying means," and further, "the stop display period setting means sets a stop display period based on the determination result of the gaming stop determining means"; and "the stop display period setting means , means for setting a stop display period based on the identification result of the operation identification means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 by the main controller 81)".

Feature G2. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to a first period (4.0 sec to 16.0 sec) when the determination result of the game stop determining means is a result that corresponds to the player being playing. and when the determination result of the gaming suspension determination means is a result corresponding to the player pausing the game, the suspension display period is set to a second period (0.5 sec) shorter than the first period. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for setting (a function for executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the stop display period is shorter when the game is paused than when the game is in progress. As a result, a player who is about to round up the game can quickly learn the results of the remaining game rounds, and the remaining game rounds of the previous player can be used up quickly so that the next player can play. The ease of play is improved, such as by making it easier to start.

Feature G3. Equipped with an operation means (firing handle 54) that can be operated by the player,
The game suspension determination means includes means for determining whether or not the player has suspended the game based on the operation status of the operation means (a function for executing the process of step S4603 by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2.

In the above configuration, an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided, and it is determined whether or not the game is paused based on the operation status of the operating means. This makes it possible to determine whether or not a game is being played based on the player's actions, making it easier to make an appropriate determination.

Feature G4. A firing means (a firing handle 54) capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
A ball entrance part (general prize opening 31, operating openings 33a, 33b, through gate 35) into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Equipped with
The game suspension determining means is a means for determining whether or not the player has paused the game based on the status of the firing operation or the status of firing the game ball in the firing unit (processing in step S4603 by the main controller 81). 3.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether the game is paused based on the status of the player's firing operation or the status of firing the game ball. In a game where the game ball is aimed at entering the ball entry section, firing the game ball is essential, and with this configuration, it becomes easier to appropriately determine whether or not a game is being played.

Feature G5. The lottery means is provided as a first lottery means, and the display control means is provided as a first display control means,
The first display control means starts variable display of symbols based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery process, and stops displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process. The display control is performed once in one game,
a second lottery means (second lottery means) that performs a second lottery process different from the lottery process performed by the first lottery means based on the establishment of a condition different from the predetermined condition (a winning of a game ball in the actuation openings 33a, 33b); A function of executing the validity judgment process for special symbols by the main control device 81);
Variable display of symbols on the predetermined display means or display means different from the predetermined display means (main display section 43, symbol display device 41) based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means. and a second display control that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means, with stopping and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process as one second game round. means (a function for executing the game time control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The game stop determining means is a means for determining that the game is being played when the second game round is being executed even if the operation situation corresponds to a game stop (step S4604 by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function for executing processing.

According to the above configuration, even if the operation status of the operating means is a situation corresponding to a game stop, if the second game round is being executed, it is determined that the game is in progress, so that erroneous determination of a game stop is suppressed. This makes it possible to improve the determination accuracy.

Feature G6. The lottery means is provided as a first lottery means, and the display control means is provided as a first display control means,
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function for executing winning processing for the operating opening by the main controller 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers being an upper limit;
Information determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information an information determination means (a function for executing the validity determination process for special symbols by the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the information determination process on the information;
Based on the information determination process being performed by the information determination means, variable display of the picture is started on the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (main display section 43, symbol display device 41). A second display control means (main controller 81);
Equipped with
The game stop determining means is a means for determining that a game is in progress when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means even if the operating situation corresponds to a game stop (a means (by the main controller 81) The gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the process of step S4605.

According to the above configuration, even if the operation status of the operating means is a situation corresponding to pausing the game, if special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, it is determined that the game is in progress, so it is erroneously determined that the game is pausing. can be suppressed and the determination accuracy can be improved.

Feature G7. The stop display period setting means is configured to, when it is determined by the game stop determination means that the player is pausing the game during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter, the stop display period setting means determines, based on the result of the determination, The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, further comprising means for setting a stop display period for the stop display immediately after the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of changing the length of the stop display period to changes in the gaming situation, and it is possible to quickly reflect the presence or absence of a game stop in the stop display period.

Feature G8. The stop display period setting means, when it is determined by the game stop determination means that the player has restarted the game during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter, the stop display period setting means determines that the player has resumed playing the game immediately after the variable display based on the result of the determination. The gaming machine according to feature G7, further comprising means for setting a stop display period for the stop display.

According to the above configuration, when the game is restarted after the game is stopped, the length of the stop display period can be quickly reflected, and the stop display period can be quickly returned to the period used during the game.

Feature G9. A first lottery means that performs a first lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition (the winning of a game ball in the through gate 35) (the main controller 81 executes a win/fail judgment process for regular figures) function) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is conducted by the first lottery means, variable display of symbols is started on predetermined display means (symbol display device 41, accessory display section 44), and the result of the first lottery is A first display control means that controls the display of the predetermined display means by stopping and displaying the corresponding stop result as one of the first game times (a function for executing the normal figure game time control process by the main control device 81) )and,
A second lottery in which a second lottery different from the first lottery is performed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined second condition different from the first condition (the winning of a game ball into the operating ports 33a, 33b). means (a function of executing the validity judgment process for special symbols by the main control device 81);
Variable display of symbols on the predetermined display means or display means different from the predetermined display means (main display section 43, symbol display device 41) based on the second lottery being conducted by the second lottery means. a second display control means for controlling the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means so as to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery as one time of the second game round; A function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The first display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed (a function that executes a setting process of a regular map confirmation display time by the main controller 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function for executing the normal figure game times control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means is a means for setting a stop display period for the first game round based on the execution status of the second game round (executing the processing of steps S4604, S4702 to S4706 by the main controller 81). A gaming machine characterized by having the following functions:

According to the above configuration, the length of the stop display period of the first game round can be varied depending on the execution status of the second game round. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the players and provide novel gameplay.

Note that each configuration described in any of the features G1 to G8 above may be applied to the feature G9. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature G10. A first lottery means that performs a first lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition (the winning of a game ball in the through gate 35) (the main controller 81 executes a win/fail judgment process for regular figures) function) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is conducted by the first lottery means, variable display of symbols is started on predetermined display means (symbol display device 41, accessory display section 44), and the result of the first lottery is a first display control means (a function for executing the normal figure game times control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means so as to stop and display the corresponding stop result;
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of a predetermined second condition different from the first condition (the winning of a game ball into the actuating ports 33a, 33b) (the actuating port by the main controller 81) function to execute prize-winning processing), and
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers being an upper limit;
Information determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information an information determination means (a function for executing the validity determination process for special symbols by the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the information determination process on the information;
Based on the information determination process being performed by the information determination means, variable display of the picture is started on the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (main display section 43, symbol display device 41). a second display control means (game control processing by the main controller 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means so as to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination; function) and
Equipped with
The first display control means includes:
A stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed (a function that executes a setting process of a regular map confirmation display time by the main controller 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function for executing the normal figure game times control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The stop display period setting means is a means for setting a stop display period for the first game round based on the storage status of special information in the acquired information storage means (processing of steps S4605, S4702 to S4706 by the main controller 81). A game machine characterized by being equipped with a function for executing the following functions.

According to the above configuration, the length of the stop display period of the first game round can be varied depending on the storage status of special information regarding the second game round. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the players and provide novel gameplay.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A grant determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main controller 81) that executes a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a benefit to a player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition;
Based on the award determination being made by the award determination means, a predetermined notification means starts the production of the game round, and then, after notifying the result corresponding to the result of the award determination, the performance of the game round is started. A game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing by the main control device 81) that ends the performance;
an abnormality identifying means (a function for executing error handling processing by the main controller 81) capable of identifying the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality;
Based on the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality being identified by the abnormality specifying means, a changing means (stop initiation by the main controller 81 (a function to execute time processing, a function to execute processing during fluctuation by the notification/effect control device 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the length of the notification period during which the result notification for the game round is performed is changed based on the occurrence of an abnormality. As a result, for example, if the notification period becomes longer, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that if the result notification of a game round is carried out while taking measures based on the occurrence of an abnormality, the result notification will be overlooked. For example, if the notification period is shortened, in a configuration where the overall length of the performance of a game round is shortened based on the occurrence of an abnormality, only the notification period of the result notification will remain long and the balance of the performance will be disrupted. This eliminates the inconvenience that such shortening effects may not be observed.

Feature H2. The changing means increases the length of the notification period during which the result notification is performed by the gaming time control means based on the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality being identified by the abnormality identifying means. The gaming machine described in H1.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that if the result notification of a game round is made while taking measures based on the occurrence of an abnormality, the result notification will be overlooked.

Feature H3. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) that acquires special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Equipped with
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination on the special information stored in the information storage means,
The changing means is characterized in that when the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is identified by the abnormality specifying means, the special information stored in the information storage means is subject to changing the notification period of the result notification. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2.

After an abnormality occurs, it is thought that the manager of the gaming hall or the like will deal with the abnormality, and the player will interrupt the game. In this case, it is considered that new special information will not be acquired after the abnormality occurs until the corresponding countermeasure is completed. From that point of view, as in the above configuration, it is sufficient to change the notification period of result notification for the special information acquired at the time of abnormality occurrence, for example, change the notification period of a predetermined number of gaming times across the board. This makes it possible to respond in accordance with the gaming situation rather than a configuration where the game is played. In addition, if the notification period for a predetermined number of games is uniformly changed, the processing load itself may be reduced. Due to the fact that the number of rounds has not been completed, there may be an inconvenience that the notification period for the result notification is changed even after the game is restarted.

Feature H4. The changing means changes the notification period of the result notification, including the special information acquired by the acquisition means until a predetermined period has elapsed after the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality was identified by the abnormality identifying means. The gaming machine according to feature H3, characterized in that it is a target.

For example, in a configuration where special information is acquired based on the acquisition condition that a game ball is launched into a gaming area and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area, the launch of the game ball may be stopped based on the occurrence of an abnormality. However, there is a possibility that a game ball that has already been launched will enter the predetermined ball entry section, and new special information may be acquired. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to target special information that is acquired later than the timing when the game is stopped, and it is possible to take measures that are more in line with the actual situation of the game. Become.

Feature H5. The changing means, when the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is identified by the abnormality specifying means, changes the gaming cycle being executed by the gaming cycle control means before the start of the result notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that it is possible to change the notification period of the result notification in the game round that is executed by the game round control means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the result notification from being overlooked even for the game session in progress. In this case, since the condition is that the result notification has not started, there is no need for complicated processing such as changing the result notification that is being executed in the current game round, and the result notification before the execution is performed. It is only necessary to change the length of the notification period, and with a simple configuration, it is possible to secure more opportunities to confirm the result notification.

Feature H6. comprising an operation specifying means (a function for executing the process of step S5305 by the main control device 81) for specifying a game operation by a player;
The changing means specifies the game operation by the operation specifying means after the predetermined abnormality occurrence is specified by the abnormality specifying means and after the predetermined abnormality occurrence is no longer specified by the abnormality specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, characterized in that it is possible to terminate the change of the notification period of the result notification based on this.

If a player performs a gaming operation after an abnormality has occurred and the abnormality has no longer been identified, this means that the management of the gaming hall has finished dealing with the abnormality and the player is ready to resume playing. It can be considered as something. Therefore, in such a situation, by adopting a configuration that ends the change as in the above configuration, the notification period may be changed even though the player has resumed playing, which is an inconvenience. can be avoided.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the predetermined abnormality is at least an abnormality that allows the game round control means to continue the game round.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to ensure the significance of changing the length of the notification period for result notification. In other words, if the progress of a game round is stopped based on the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality, it is considered that the result notification will not be performed or the result notification will stop with the result notification being performed, and the length of the notification period for the result notification. This is because changing it would be meaningless.

Feature H8. Features H1 to 6 are characterized in that the changing means is capable of changing the length of the notification period during which the result notification is performed without changing the duration of the game round executed by the game round control means. The gaming machine according to any one of H7.

According to the above configuration, since the duration of the game round is not changed, for example, in a configuration where the performance of the game round is performed by a different notification means (display screen, etc.) than the predetermined notification means, the duration of the game round is not changed. There is no discrepancy between the duration of a game round and the duration of a game round on the side of the different notification means. This makes it possible to avoid giving players a sense of discomfort due to discrepancies in performance, and eliminates the need to perform processing to eliminate discrepancies in performance (for example, processing to lengthen or shorten one of them). This also helps to avoid an increase in processing load.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A firing means (a firing handle 54) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a firing operation by a player;
a starting ball entry portion (upper operating port 33a, lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
A grant determining means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry section (a function for executing a propriety determination process by the main controller 81) and,
Based on the award determination made by the award determination means, the presentation of the game round is started on a predetermined display means (main display section 43), and the game round is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the result of the award determination. a first control means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be played on the predetermined display means, with the completion of the performance being regarded as one game time;
A second control means for maintaining the result display displayed as the stop result for a predetermined period after the first control means finishes the game round (a function for executing processing at the start of stop by the main control device 81). and,
Based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a result corresponding to granting the benefit, the result display by the second control means is performed after the game round corresponding to the grant determination. after the predetermined period has elapsed, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) that grants the benefit;
A gaming machine comprising:
It has an operation section (operation button 77) operated by the player,
Changing means capable of increasing the length of the predetermined period during which the result display is performed by the second control means based on the operation of the operation unit (the process of step S5501 by the main controller 81) 1. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function to perform the above functions.

According to the above configuration, based on the fact that the game ball fired based on the firing operation by the player enters the starting ball entry section, the award determination is made, the game round is started, and the result is When a player operates an operation unit in a series of games in which a display is performed and a privilege can be awarded, the length of the predetermined period during which the result display continues becomes longer after a game round is played. In other words, the period from when the game is played until the bonus is awarded becomes longer. As a result, for example, a player who has started a game, but has to leave his/her seat due to urgent business, will have a grace period before receiving the benefit, so he/she can finish the emergency business. becomes possible.

In other words, if you have something to do, it would be fine not to launch the game ball and start the game, but for example, if you predict that you will win a jackpot and receive a bonus depending on the performance of the game round. If you do, you may want to prepare a drink or go to the bathroom to enjoy the jackpot to the fullest. With conventional gaming machines, once the game ball enters the starting ball section, the process from award determination to game play and bonus awarding is entirely up to the gaming machine. It has become difficult for those involved to control its progress. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, even if the game is about to start, it is possible to delay the granting of benefits by operating the operation panel, and it is possible to respond to the diverse needs of players. can.

In addition, in order to adjust the length of the period from the start of the game to the awarding of benefits, it is also possible to consider a configuration in which, for example, the length of the performance of the game round is adjusted. However, if this is done, when the length of the period is extended by an operation by the player, it will be necessary to change the presentation content of the game round, and there is a possibility that the processing load will increase. On the other hand, if the configuration lengthens the predetermined period during which results are displayed, all you need to do is change the period during which results are displayed in a stopped state. It becomes possible to produce an effect.

Furthermore, since the game was configured to change the length of the predetermined period instead of stopping the progress of the game by operating the operation unit, the progress of the game could be stopped even if there were still unplayed games. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the game being left unattended and subsequent players unable to play.

Regarding the "privilege granting means", "variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area and capable of shifting between an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the open state" and a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means. If the variable ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then to a specific state in which variable ball entry control is executed, in which the variable ball entry means is brought into the closed state, the game ball must be brought into the variable ball entry means. Since game balls cannot be paid out as a bonus, the significance of lengthening the predetermined period as described above is further enhanced.

Feature I2. If the operating unit is operated in a situation where the length of the predetermined period is changed by the changing means, it is possible to prevent the changing means from changing the length of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the predetermined period continues to be long. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the change by the change means is applied only to a predetermined game round, and once the change is finished, the change is not automatically made. However, in this case, if an attempt is made to cover the necessary extension by displaying the results in the predetermined game round, there may arise a problem that the extension of one round of result display becomes too long. Specifically, for example, if a player wants to extend the game by 4 minutes, the length of the result display after the predetermined game round should be set to 4 minutes. Even if you later finish your business and try to resume the game, you will have to wait for the remaining two minutes. On the other hand, for example, if the display of the results of the 8 suspended game rounds is extended to 30 seconds each, in the same way, if the result display can be extended for a total of 4 minutes, the extension will be extended in the middle game round. It is also possible to prevent this from occurring, and the degree of freedom in playing the game is improved compared to a configuration in which the length is uniformly extended.

Feature I3. When changing the length of the predetermined period, the changing means increases the length of the predetermined period so that the length is within the longest length of the game round set by the first control means. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the results are displayed endlessly and the game essentially stops. In other words, even if it gets longer, it is only the length of one game, and even if the extension operation is performed and the gaming machine is left unused while there are still unplayed games, the length of the game will be the same as one game. After waiting for a number of rounds, subsequent players can play games.

Feature I4. When changing the length of the predetermined period, the changing means increases the length of the predetermined period so that it is longer than the shortest length of the game round determined by the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3.

According to the above configuration, instead of an extension that does not give enough time to finish an errand, there is actually a time delay for just one game, making it possible to substantially achieve the effect of feature I1.

Feature I5. Any one of features I1 to I4 characterized in that, when the length of the predetermined period is changed by the changing means, means for displaying a specific display indicating that the change has been made together with the result display is provided. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, it is clear to players and game hall managers that the awarding of benefits is not being started or the next game round is not being started due to some kind of error in the gaming machine, but that the change has been made by the changing means. can be grasped. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary error handling.

Feature I6. comprising a storage means (operation flag) for storing operation information indicating that the operation unit has been operated;
The changing means changes the result display when the operation information is stored in the storage means and when the content of the game round by the first control means becomes a predetermined specific content. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that the length of the predetermined period is increased.

Specific content may include, for example, a reach display that guarantees a jackpot, or a production in which a character that does not appear often appears, and if such specific content occurs, the corresponding game cycle Since there is a high possibility that a benefit will be granted later, it can be said that the need to change the length of the predetermined period increases. Therefore, if the above configuration is adopted, it becomes possible to set the settings in advance so that there will be a grace period to finish the errand when such a specific content occurs, and the user does not have to worry about operating the operation panel when the specific content occurs. It is no longer necessary to do so, and it becomes possible to fully enjoy playing games with specific content.

Feature I7. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Equipped with
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination on the special information stored in the information storage means,
A destination for specifying information when the predetermined special information stored in the information storage means becomes a determination target by the provision determination means at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes a determination target. Equipped with a specifying means (a function for executing confirmation processing for pending notice by the main controller 81),
The changing means changes the result display for the special information to be subject to the provision determination before the special information corresponding to the game round having the specified content, based on the identification result by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature I6, characterized in that the length of the predetermined period can be increased.

According to the above configuration, it is possible not only to have a grace period until the bonus is granted after the specific content is achieved, but also to enjoy the game rounds that have the specific content.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or feature I7, wherein the specific content is content corresponding to a result of the award determination by the award determination means that results in awarding the benefit.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature I6 can be suitably achieved.

Feature I9. When changing the length of the predetermined period, the changing means increases the length of the predetermined period so as to match the duration of the game round having the specific content;
A third control means capable of executing the performance of the game round having the specific content during the predetermined period changed by the changing means (a function of executing a stop/start process by the notification/performance control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific content is repeatedly performed using the predetermined period of result display. This makes it possible to reconfirm specific content even if the user has missed it.

Feature I10. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Equipped with
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination on the special information stored in the information storage means,
A destination for specifying information in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the information storage means becomes a determination target by the provision determination means at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes a determination target. Equipped with a specifying means (a function for executing confirmation processing for pending notice by the main controller 81),
The changing means changes the result display for the special information to be subject to the provision determination before the special information corresponding to the game round having the specified content, based on the identification result by the destination specifying means. increasing the length of the predetermined period so that the length of the predetermined period is equal to the duration of the game round having the specific content;
A third control means capable of executing the performance of the game round having the specific content during the predetermined period changed by the changing means (a function of executing a stop/start process by the notification/performance control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, during the predetermined period of displaying the results before the game session having the specific content, the performance of the game session having the specific content is performed. This makes it possible to achieve an effect equivalent to the effect of feature I9.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A transition determination means (a function for executing the propriety determination process by the main controller 81) that determines whether or not to transition the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition;
Based on the fact that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition corresponding result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, the gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state (game state transition processing by the main controller 81) function) and
Based on the transition determination being made by the transition determination means, a predetermined notification means starts the performance of the game round, and ends the performance of the game round as a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination. A gaming machine comprising: a game round control means (a function for executing a game round control process by the main controller 81) for causing the performance of the game round to be performed by the predetermined notification means as one game round. ,
As the gaming state, an advantageous state (high frequency support mode) and a non-advantageous state (low frequency support mode) are set so that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low,
When starting the game round, the game round control means includes a duration setting means (a process for setting a variable display time by the main controller 81) that sets the duration of the current game round according to the result of the transition determination. control the predetermined notification means to play the current game round over the duration set by the duration setting means;
A specific period is set as a continuation period set by the continuation period setting means when the result of the transition determination is a non-advantageous transition corresponding result (usually a jackpot result) that causes the transition to the non-advantageous state. Ori,
The game time control means includes:
The result of the transition determination is the unadvantageous transition response result, and a first means (notification/performance control device) for displaying the stop result at a first timing in a game round in which the specific period is set as the continuation period. 82 function to stop the normal medium pattern row),
The result of the transition determination is the non-advantageous transition response result, and in a game round in which the specific period is set as the continuation period, the stop result is determined at a second timing that is earlier than the first timing. A second means for displaying (a function that performs a process of stopping the middle symbol row in a situation where the previous result notification flag or the immediate result notification flag by the notification/performance control device 82 is set),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In a configuration in which game results are announced through the performance of a game round, the turning point where the degree of advantage for the player differs greatly, such as whether it is a hit or a miss or what kind of win it is, is determined at a later timing. By doing so, the attention level of the entire gaming session can be increased. Based on this premise, it can be considered that whether the player will shift to an advantageous state or a non-advantageous state, which has a different degree of advantage, should be notified at a timing as late as possible. In particular, shifting to a non-advantageous state in which the player has a low advantage is not based on the timing of the first side, but rather the timing of the second side, from the perspective of making the game play more enjoyable while giving the player hope that there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous state. It is thought that notification should be made in good time.

However, there is also the idea that if the current gaming state is an advantageous state and the game transitions to a non-advantageous state when the game round ends, the player should maximize the benefit of the remaining advantageous state. Therefore, with the above configuration, although the notification of transition to the non-advantageous state is normally indicated by the stop result at the first timing, in the special case described above, Since it is indicated by the stop result at the previous timing, the second timing, it is possible to use the time difference between the first timing and the second timing to make preparations before shifting to a non-advantageous state. can. In this way, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of players, and it can be useful in realizing innovative gaming features.

Regarding the "first means" and "second means",
"A first means for displaying the stop result based on the fact that the result of the transition determination is the non-advantageous transition response result, and the first condition is satisfied in a game round in which the specific period is set as the continuation period. and,
Based on the fact that the result of the transition determination is the unadvantageous transition response result, and a second condition that is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied in the game round in which the specific period is set as the continuation period. "Second means for displaying the stop result"
It may be expressed as In this case, in each feature below, "first timing" will be read as "based on the first condition being met," etc., and "second timing" will be replaced with "based on the second condition being met." It is recommended to read and apply it as "te" etc.

Feature J2. The game time control means, after displaying the stop result by the first means or the second means, maintains the stop result until the continuation period elapses. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, once the stop result is displayed by the first means or the second means, it will not be overturned, resulting in a configuration in which so-called re-variation cannot be expected. This makes it possible for the player to accept the transition to the non-advantageous state and promptly begin preparations before shifting to the non-advantageous state.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the second means displays the stop result at the second timing in the game round during the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the case where the stop result is displayed at the second timing is the case where the state shifts from an advantageous state to a non-advantageous state. This allows the player to play the game so as to maximize the benefits of the remaining advantageous state.

Feature J4. A firing means (a firing handle 54) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a firing operation by a player;
a ball entry portion (second operating port 134) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
an information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Equipped with
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially perform the transition determination on the special information stored in the information storage means,
A variable receiving means (electric accessory 134a) capable of switching between a first state in which it is easy to accept game balls into the ball entry section and a second state in which it is difficult to receive game balls into the ball entry section than in the first state;
Variable acceptance control means that executes variable acceptance control for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (a function for executing processing for power support by the main controller 81) and,
Equipped with
The control mode of the variable admission control by the variable admission control means is a high-frequency state (high-frequency support mode) and a low-frequency state so that the frequency at which the variable admission means is in the first state is relatively high or low. (Infrequent support mode) is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the high-frequency state is set in the advantageous state, and the low-frequency state is set in the non-advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the non-advantageous state, the frequency in which the variable receiving means is in the first state becomes lower, and the ball enters the low-frequency state in which the frequency of balls entering the ball entry section is reduced. Therefore, for example, if the current gaming state is an advantageous state and a high-frequency state, it is better to fire the game ball so that it enters the ball entry area as much as possible before shifting to the low-frequency state. As a person, I will do something special. By applying the configuration of feature J1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to suitably achieve the effect of feature J1.

Feature J5. A firing means (a firing handle 54) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a firing operation by a player;
A first ball entry part (first operating port 133) and a second ball entry part (second operating port 134) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information for acquiring first special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section, and acquiring second special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section. acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81);
a first information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the first special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a first predetermined number set in advance as an upper limit;
a second information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a second predetermined number determined in advance as an upper limit;
Equipped with
The transition determination means includes:
With respect to the first special information stored in the first information storage means, first transition determination means (based on reservation information on the first ball entry section side by the main controller 81) sequentially performs first transition determination as the transition determination. function to execute validity judgment processing),
A second transition determination means (main controller 81 (a function of executing the validity judgment process based on the reservation information on the second ball entry section side);
Equipped with
In the advantageous state, it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry part than in the first ball entry part, and in the non-advantageous state, it is easier for the ball to enter the first ball entry part than in the second ball entry part. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, characterized in that it becomes easier to ball.

According to the above configuration, when the result is a non-advantageous transition correspondence result and the player transitions to a non-advantageous state, the first ball entry section where the first transition determination is made is performed more favorably than the second ball entry section where the second transition determination that is advantageous to the player is performed. It is easier to enter the ball in the ball entry section. Therefore, for example, if the current situation is advantageous, the ball enters the second ball entry section and the ball enters the second ball entry section before the situation shifts to a non-advantageous state and it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry section. 2. It is better for the player to obtain special information. Therefore, by applying the configuration of feature J1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to suitably achieve the effect of feature J1.

Feature J6. A firing means (a firing handle 54) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a firing operation by a player;
a ball entry portion (second operating port 134) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
an information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Equipped with
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially perform the transition determination on the special information stored in the information storage means,
The second means is characterized in that the stop result is displayed at the second timing when the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is a specific number or less that is less than the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5.

According to the above configuration, when the number of special information for which a transfer determination is made is less than or equal to a specific number that is less than a predetermined number that is the storage upper limit number, the second means determines that the stop result is an unfavorable transfer response result. The display will be displayed at an earlier timing. By doing this, for example, in a configuration in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball entering section due to the non-advantageous state, the ball enters the ball entering section as much as possible before shifting to the non-advantageous state. In this way, by first displaying the stop result, it is possible to provide relief to the player.

Feature J7. As described in feature J6, the first means displays the stop result at the first timing when the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is greater than the specific number. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the stop result first even though a sufficient number of special information is stored. Thereby, while ensuring the performance effect of the game round, displaying the stop result first can be done exceptionally from the viewpoint of saving the player.

Feature J8. The firing means fires the game ball at a predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to feature J6 or feature J7, wherein the difference between the first timing and the second timing is set to be longer than the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, by displaying the stop result first at the second timing, at least one game ball is fired. By doing this, you can avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fire a single game ball even though you have displayed the stop result first, and the ball not entering the ball entry area. can do.

Feature J9. The difference between the first timing and the second timing is set to be longer than the difference between the predetermined number and the specific number multiplied by the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in J8.

According to the above configuration, at least the missing game balls up to the predetermined number will be fired. Thereby, the above-mentioned shortage can be made up for by the game balls fired after the stop result is displayed.

Feature J10. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9, further comprising means for displaying the remaining duration of the current game round when the stop result is displayed by the second means. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to clearly understand how long it will take to shift to the non-advantageous state by displaying the remaining duration. This makes it easier to prepare before shifting to a non-advantageous state.

Note that the above configuration is more preferable if it includes "a means for updating the remaining duration period every predetermined period" because it is possible to clearly indicate the remaining duration period that decreases moment by moment.

Feature J11. The predetermined notification means is a display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of pictures;
The game time control means causes the plurality of symbols to be displayed in a variable manner as an effect of the game time, so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the transition determination is displayed as the stop result. ,
Any of the features J1 to J10, characterized in that when the stop result is displayed at the second timing by the second means, it is possible to change the speed of fluctuating display of the plurality of symbols. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

As in the above configuration, if you change the speed of the fluctuation display of the symbols, there is no need to change the symbol combination that corresponds to the result of the transition judgment in order to stop the symbol combination as a stop result. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a result different from the result that should be displayed is displayed.

For more details about the above configuration, please refer to
"The predetermined notification means is a display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of pictures,
The game time control means causes the plurality of symbols to be displayed in a variable manner as an effect of the game time, so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the award determination is displayed as the stop result. ,
When the stop result is displayed at the second timing by the second means, the speed of the variable display of the plurality of symbols is changed so as not to change the combination of the symbols to be stopped as the stop result. Is possible"
It may be expressed as

Feature J12. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Attachment determining means for sequentially executing an attribution determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined attribution information (a function for executing an appropriateness determination process by the main controller 81) )and,
Based on the award determination being made by the award determination means, a predetermined notification means starts the performance of the game round, and after that, a result notification corresponding to the result of the award determination is performed, and then the performance of the game round is started. A game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing by the main control device 81) that ends the production;
If the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant corresponding result corresponding to the grant information, a benefit grant unit (a function for executing gaming state transition processing by the main controller 81) that grants a benefit to the player. and,
A gaming machine comprising:
performance period setting means (a function for executing a process of setting a variable display time by the main control device 81) capable of setting a performance period (variable display time) during which the performance of the game time is executed by the game time control means;
Notification period setting means capable of setting a notification period during which the result notification corresponding to the result of the provision determination is performed (function to execute processing during fluctuation by the notification/effect control device 82, processing at the start of stop by the main control device 81) ) and
Equipped with
The game round control means executes the performance of the game round over the performance period set by the performance period setting means, and thereafter executes the performance of the game round over the notification period set by the notification period setting means. executing the result notification corresponding to the result of the grant determination for the time;
The benefit granting means is configured to grant the benefit after the notification period has elapsed,
The notification period setting means includes:
When the number of special information stored in the information storage means is a first predetermined number, a first means for setting the length of the notification period as a first specific period (normal use by the notification/effect control device 82) function to stop the middle symbol row),
When the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is a second predetermined number that is smaller than the first predetermined number, the length of the notification period is set to a second specific period that is longer than the first specific period. a second means (a function that performs the process of stopping the medium symbol row in a situation where the previous result notification flag and the immediate result notification flag by the notification/performance control device 82 are set);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the number of special pieces of information is small, the period during which result notification is performed becomes long, and when the number of special pieces of information is large, the period during which result notification is performed becomes short. In general, the fewer the number of special information, the longer the performance period of a game episode, so that the situation where special information is not stored is less likely to occur, or when a large number of special information is stored. In some cases, the speed at which special information is digested is improved to make the game progress smoothly. In this respect, it can be said that the above configuration matches the relationship between the length of the performance period of a game round and the number of special information. In other words, it can be said that by using the above configuration, the above effects can be expected by changing the length of the notification period, even if the length of the performance period of the game round is not changed as in the conventional case. In this way, if the length of the notification period can be changed depending on the number of special information, it is possible to configure the game round, which consists of a set of performance period and notification period, to be significantly different from the conventional one, which is an innovative method. This can be of great help in realizing gameplay.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Based on the fulfillment of a predetermined determination condition, a determination means (main controller 81); and
If the determination result by the determination means is a specific result corresponding to executing the specific control, the specific control means (a function of executing the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main control device 81) that executes the specific control; ,
Based on the judgment made by the judgment means, a notification effect means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying the judgment result by a predetermined notification means (a function for executing the game time control process by the main controller 81) )and,
In the case where the determination result by the determination means is the specific result, the specific period (fixed display time, opening period setting means (a function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81, a function for executing opening processing by the main controller 81),
Equipped with
The period setting means includes:
A first setting means capable of setting a first period as the specific period (for example, a function of setting a first confirmed display time when the common reservation number CRN is 1 to 6 in the stop start processing by the main controller 81) and,
A second setting means capable of setting a second period shorter than the first period as the specific period (for example, when the common reservation number CRN is 7 to 8 in the stop start processing by the main controller 81, the first confirmation function to set the display time),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Considering the flow of the game, in which a judgment condition is met, a grant judgment is made, and a benefit is awarded based on the result of the judgment, there is a high level of interest in notification effects to notify the result of the grant judgment. Furthermore, based on the premise that the player will feel joy when the bonus is granted, it is certain that the player will receive the bonus for a specific period from when the judgment result is announced until the bonus is granted. It can be said that this is the point where the player's attention level may decrease due to the sense of relief. In this regard, conventional efforts have been made to eliminate the drop in attention by performing a performance that congratulates the granting of benefits during such a specific period. However, even if such an effect is performed, it is still a waiting time for specific control, and there is a limit to how much attention can be improved.

Therefore, as in the above configuration, by setting the length of the specific period to be the first period or the second period, the waiting time as described above may be longer or shorter, and it is also possible to apply such length or shortness to the performance. However, it is possible to make the user think that the merits and demerits will have a bearing on subsequent profits (for example, the benefits obtained during specific control will vary). Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature K2. Feature K1 characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is different depending on whether the first period is set by the first setting means or the second period is set by the second setting means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the length of a specific period does not just make you think that it affects profits, but actually affects profits. This makes it possible to realize a new gaming experience that utilizes a specific period, which in the past was just a waiting time.

Note that the above configuration, for example,
“In the case where the first period is set by the first setting means and the second period is set by the second setting means, an advantageous event (V winning) that is advantageous to the player will occur after that. ``The probability of occurrence is different.''
It may be expressed as

Feature K3. Feature K2 characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player when the second period is set by the second setting means than when the first period is set by the first setting means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the shorter the waiting time, the more advantageous it is for the player. This creates a configuration in which specific controls are performed one after another in a situation where the reward has been confirmed and the excitement has subsided, and a configuration in which such waiting time is short is advantageous. You can enjoy the game to the fullest without giving up. On the other hand, the longer the waiting time is, the longer the player is disadvantaged, but assuming that the more advantageous the player is, the longer the notification presentation will be, the longer the waiting time for the disadvantaged side becomes. Even if this were the case, the total length with the notification performance would be the same as the advantageous side, and just because the specific period becomes longer does not necessarily mean that it becomes redundant.

Feature K4. The control mode of the specific control is the same when the first period is set by the first setting means and when the second period is set by the second setting means. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether the first period or the second period is set, the control mode of the specific control is the same, so the benefit itself obtained by the specific control does not change. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of feature K2 without significantly changing the configuration of the existing specific control.

Feature K5. a displacement means (shutter 358) capable of displacing between a first position and a second position that is different from the first position and is more advantageous to the player than the first position;
Displacement control for displacing the displacement means from the first position to the second position and then to the first position at a predetermined period based on notification of the determination result by the determination means. a displacement control means (a function for executing processing for V operation by the main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, since the displacement control by the displacement control means is performed at a predetermined period, the first specific period from the notification of the determination result to the start of the specific control is In the case where the period is set and the case where the second period is set, the timing at which the displacement means is placed at the second position advantageous to the player may or may not overlap with the specific control, or may overlap in both cases. Even in the case where the specific control is performed, it is possible to make a difference in the timing during specific control at which the overlap occurs. Thereby, it is possible to create a difference in the degree of advantage depending on the length of the specific period.

Feature K6. A firing means (a firing handle 54) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a firing operation by a player;
a starting ball entry portion (upper operating port 33a, lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
A variable ball entry means (variable prize winning device 132) that can be displaced between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the open state;
A payout means (putout control device 97) that pays out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means;
Variable ball entry control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81) for executing variable ball entry control for changing the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state; ,
Equipped with
The determination means performs the provision determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion,
The specific control is the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry means,
The displacement means includes:
When placed at the first position, guiding the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to a first area (ejection area 357) that is disadvantageous for the player;
When placed in the second position, the variable ball entry means guides the game ball that has entered the player to a second region (V winning region 356) that is advantageous for the player. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means is guided to the first area. The degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether the player is guided to the second area or the second area. This makes it possible to suitably achieve the effect of feature K5 without significantly changing the existing configuration of paying out prize balls corresponding to balls entering the variable ball entry means.

Feature K7. A firing means (a firing handle 54) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a firing operation by a player;
a starting ball entry portion (upper operating port 33a, lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Equipped with
The determination means performs the provision determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion,
By entering the game ball into the starting ball entry section, the first setting means sets the specific period as the first period, and the second setting means sets the specific period as the second period. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that the state set as .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which it is determined whether or not to perform specific control based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, the length of the specific period is also determined based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section. Change. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that is significantly different from conventional games, in which a jackpot is determined by the ball entering the starting ball entry section.

Feature K8. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) that acquires special information based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Equipped with
The determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination on the special information stored in the information storage means,
When the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is less than the specific number, the first period is set by the first setting means, and the special information stored in the information storage means is less than the specified number. The gaming machine according to feature K7, characterized in that the second period is set by the second setting means when the period is greater than or equal to the number of days.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the special information for determination of provision is acquired based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section, and the special information is stored up to a predetermined number, the number of stored special information is The length of the specific period is set based on. By doing this, even the so-called special information that is waiting for the provision judgment can be involved in the game, increasing the importance of getting the special information, that is, letting the ball enter the starting ball entry section, and making the game more enjoyable. can improve sex. Moreover, because the specific period for the specific control is set using special information that is different from the special information that triggered the specific control, the conventional method that had only a one-to-one relationship between special information and specific control It becomes possible to provide novel gameplay that is significantly different from other games.

Feature K9. Feature K8 characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player when the second period is set by the second setting means than when the first period is set by the first setting means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the larger the number of special information stored, the more advantageous it becomes to the player. By doing this, for example, even if a player knows that a specific control will be performed before or during the notification performance, if the number of special information is small, the player will be further notified of the starting ball entry part. It is thought that the game ball is fired to make the ball enter the ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent so-called stopping.

Feature K10. The notification effect means includes a duration setting means (variable display time setting processing by the main controller 81) that sets a duration of the notification effect when executing the notification effect based on the result of the determination by the determination means. ), and executes the notification effect based on the duration set by the duration setting means,
The duration setting means sets the duration period to be longer when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result that the specific control will be executed than when the determination result is that the specific control will not be executed. The gaming machine according to feature K9, characterized by having a configuration that is easy to set.

Generally, a long performance is performed in a game round that results in a jackpot, and measures are taken to make the performance of the game round fully enjoyable. However, if it is too long, players who know that they will win a jackpot midway through or in advance, or players who want to quickly obtain benefits based on a jackpot, may feel that the game round is redundant. On the other hand, there are players who want to enjoy long performances as mentioned above, and it may be difficult to satisfy the different needs of both players. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the longer the notification performance that is the specific control, the more time is secured for acquiring special information, thereby increasing the possibility that a second period that is advantageous to the player will be set. This can be a meaningful time both for players who want to enjoy the performance for a long time and for players who feel that the long performance is meaningless.

Feature K11. A variable receiving means (electric accessory 134a) capable of switching between a first state in which it is easy to accept game balls into the starting ball entry section and a second state in which it is difficult to receive game balls into the starting ball entry section than in the first state; ,
Variable acceptance control means that executes variable acceptance control for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (a function for executing processing for power support by the main controller 81) and,
Equipped with
The control mode of the variable admission control by the variable admission control means is a high-frequency state (high-frequency support mode) and a low-frequency state so that the frequency at which the variable admission means is in the first state is relatively high or low. The gaming machine according to feature K9 or feature K10, characterized in that (low frequency support mode) is set.

As in the above configuration, by using the variable receiving means that assists the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section, the ease with which special information can be stored changes. Specifically, special information is more likely to be obtained in a high-frequency state in which the first state is where the ball enters the starting ball entering section, and in a low-frequency state in which the first state is less frequent than in the high-frequency state. This makes it difficult to obtain special information. Therefore, in a high frequency state, there is a high possibility that the second period will be set by the second setting means, and in a low frequency state, there is a high possibility that the first period will be set by the first setting means. Therefore, it is possible to correlate not only the frequency of grant determinations but also the length of a specific period and its advantage, thereby improving the gameplay.

Feature K12. The notification effect means includes a duration setting means (variable display time setting processing by the main controller 81) that sets a duration of the notification effect when executing the notification effect based on the result of the determination by the determination means. ), and executes the notification effect based on the duration set by the duration setting means,
The duration setting means determines that when the determination result by the determination means during the high frequency state is a determination result that causes the specific control to be executed, the determination result by the determination means during the low frequency state is better. The gaming machine according to feature K11, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that it is easier to set the duration period to be shorter than when the determination result is that the specific control is executed.

Based on the premise that special information is more likely to accumulate during a high frequency state than during a low frequency state, the possibility that the second period will be set increases when specific control is performed. On the other hand, if the above configuration is such that the duration of the notification effect during which the specific control is performed is likely to be shorter during the high frequency state than during the low frequency state, the specific control will be performed. Even if an attempt is made to obtain special information after a different notification performance has started, there may be a situation where it is not possible to obtain the special information in time. By doing this, it is possible to increase the significance of progressing the game with the special information stored as close to the predetermined number as the upper limit value, and the variable acceptance means is in the first state during the high frequency state. It becomes possible to suppress the so-called stop shot action in which a game ball is fired at a certain situation.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A starting ball entry part (upper operating port 33a, lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area (gaming area PE) can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32, 132) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible for a ball to enter;
Variable ball entry control means capable of executing variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state and then brought into the closed state (a function for executing the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81) and,
Transition determining means for sequentially performing transition determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (a function for executing validity determination processing by the main controller 81) )and,
If the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition result that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a specific state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means. A transition means (a function for executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81),
Based on the transition determination being made by the transition determination means, a predetermined notification means starts the performance of the game round, and then, after notifying the result corresponding to the result of the transition determination, the performance of the game round is started. A game time control means (a function for executing variable display control processing by the notification/performance control device 82) for ending the production;
A gaming machine comprising:
comprising a period setting means (a function for executing processing at the start of a stop by the main controller 81) for setting a specific period in which the result notification is performed;
When the result of the transition determination regarding the special information is a specific result different from the transition result, the period setting means sets the specific period to the variable input when the transition means transitions to the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that the period can be set to have a length corresponding to a waiting period until the ball means is switched from the closed state to the open state.

In the flow of a series of game rounds, in which the performance of a game round is started based on the transition determination, a result corresponding to the result of the transition determination is made, and the game round ends, the result of the transition determination is If it is a transition result, the game moves to a specific state in which variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means after the game round, and if the result of the transition determination is not a transition result, the above game is played as long as the special information is stored in the storage means. The sessions will be held sequentially. In this kind of gameplay, while the production of the game round is designed to increase the player's attention by making them expect a transition result, after the performance of the game round, Since the result of the transition determination that triggered the relevant game round is notified as a result notification, the player can clearly recognize, for example, that the result is not a transition result. In this case, no matter how you enhance the performance of the game, if the result will be announced in the end, people will only be interested in the result, and the work of confirming whether it is a hit or miss will be affected by the result notification. There is a risk that the game will become a game where only the players are allowed to play. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the result is not notified after the performance of the game round, or if the result is made difficult to understand, it will be difficult for the manager of the game hall, etc., to confirm the result of the transition determination, for example. Such inconveniences may occur.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific period for notifying the result is set to a length corresponding to the waiting period until the variable ball entrance means is switched from the closed state to the open state when the result of the transition determination is a transition result. It is possible to set it. Therefore, even if a specific result (missing result) that is not a transfer result is notified as a result notification, the result may be notified because the performance of the next game round will not start until the specified period has passed. It is possible to have the user view the result notification while creating the expectation that the result may be a transition result rather than a specific result (outlier result). With such a configuration, there is no need to make the result notification difficult to understand, and it is possible to increase the attention level until the final timing of the result notification (the start timing of the performance of the next game round). .

Feature L2. The period setting means sets the specific period during which the result notification is performed when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, to the specific period in which the result notification is performed when the transition determination result by the transition determination means is the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the gaming machine is set to be shorter than the specific period in which the result notification is performed in a certain case.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference in waiting period until the variable ball entry means enters the open state in the case of a transition result. Therefore, it is possible to associate the specific period when the result is a specific result with the specific period and waiting period when the result is a transition. In addition, in this way, there is no need to shorten the waiting period, and a sufficient period can be secured for preparations for controlling the variable ball entry means and for performing presentations.

Feature L3. The period setting means sets the specific period when the transition determination result by the transition determination means is the specific result to be the total period of the specific period and the waiting period when the transition result is the transition result. The gaming machine according to feature L2, characterized in that the game machine is set to .

According to the above configuration, the specific period when the result is a specific result, and the specific period and the waiting period when the result is a transition are the same length. As a result, it is no longer possible to determine whether the result is a specific result or a transition result based on whether or not the next game round is started and the manner in which the variable ball entry means is opened and closed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of making both results difficult to understand.

Feature L4. If the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the specified result, the transition means does not cause the transition to the specified state, and the game time control means determines that the specified period in which the specified result is notified has elapsed. If the special information is stored in the information storage means, then the performance of the game round regarding the next special information is started. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, the identification result is a so-called out-of-order result that does not transition to the specific state. Moreover, unlike the so-called small hit result in which the variable ball entry means is opened and closed less times than in the specific state, for example, the result is a complete miss in which the variable ball entry means is not opened and closed. By doing this, the degree of advantage will be greatly different between the transition result that transitions to a specific state and the specific result that does not transition to a specific state, and the effect of setting the length of the specific period as in feature L1 It becomes possible to suitably increase the

Feature L5. The game time control means includes means for stopping a specific stopping mode as the result notification when the result of the transition determination is the transition result, and a means (notification/stopping mode) for stopping when the result of the transition determination is the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S6503 by the production control device 82.

According to the above configuration, it is difficult to determine whether the result is a transfer result or a specific result from the result notification by the game time control means. This makes it possible to suitably enhance the effect of making both results difficult to understand.

Feature L6. As determination modes for the transition determination by the transition determination means, a high probability mode and a low probability mode are provided so that the probability of the transition result is relatively high or low,
When the result of the transition determination in the low probability mode is the specific result, the period setting means sets the specific period to be a period with a length corresponding to the waiting period, while Features L1 to L1 characterized in that when the result of the transition determination in the probability mode is the specific result, the specific period is set to be a period different from the specific period set in the low probability mode. The gaming machine according to any one of L5.

If we take advantage of the psychology of players that they have high expectations for a transition result in the low probability mode where the probability of a transition result is low, we can set a specific period based on the specific result as in feature L1. By doing so, it can be said that the production effect can be suitably enhanced. Therefore, by adopting the above-mentioned configuration, it becomes possible to fully utilize the presentation effect of feature L1, and it is possible to prevent the progress of the game in the high probability mode from being hindered.

Feature L7. Based on the transition determination performed by the transition determination means, a specific notification means (main display section 43) different from the predetermined notification means starts producing the game round, and then displays the result of the transition determination. a second game round control means (a function for executing the game round control process by the main control device 81) that terminates the production of the game round after notifying the result corresponding to the second game round;
When the result of the transition determination is the transition result, the second game time control means performs transition result notification corresponding to the transition result as the result notification, and when the result of the transition determination is the specific result. , The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the result notification is a specific result notification different from the transition result notification.

According to the above configuration, by checking the result notification by the second game round control means, it becomes possible to clearly distinguish whether the result of the transition determination is a transition result or a specific result. This makes it possible to have the game hall manager or the like execute the work of confirming the results while obtaining the production effect due to the configuration of feature L1.

Regarding the relationship between the "predetermined notifying means" and the "specific notifying means," for example, if a difference is created in the distinctiveness by saying, for example, "the specific notifying means is smaller than the predetermined notifying means," It is possible to make both the notification means desired to be shown to the players and the notification means desired to be shown to the game hall manager. Furthermore, by ``allowing the game ball to flow between the predetermined notification means and the specific notification means'', even if the player attempts to check both notification means, the game area will be interposed between them. When shifting the line of sight from one notifying means to the other notifying means, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to be distracted by the falling of the game ball and to feel uncomfortable that the results of both notifying means do not match.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) that acquires determination information based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
a grant determining means (a function for executing propriety determination processing by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not to grant a benefit to a player with respect to the determination information stored in the information storage means;
Privilege awarding means for awarding the privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of the award determination by the award determination means is a grant response result corresponding to granting the benefit (game control by the main controller 81) function to execute state transition processing),
Equipped with
As the gaming state, a high probability state and a low probability state are set such that the probability that the result of the award determination by the award determination means is the award corresponding result is relatively high or low,
A state setting means for setting the gaming state to the high probability state (a function for executing a transition process when the opening/closing execution mode is ended by the main controller 81),
A gaming machine characterized in that the state setting means is capable of setting the high probability state according to the number of pieces of determination information stored in the information storage means.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine in which the determination information is acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination information is stored in the information storage means, and a grant determination is made regarding the determination information, A high probability state and a low probability state in which the probabilities of grant determination are relatively high and low are set, and the setting is performed according to the number of determination information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, the game features are completely different from conventional gaming machines, which are set to a high probability state or a low probability state depending on the award determination result and the type of award given based on the result. becomes possible.

In particular, since it is configured to be executed depending on the number of determination information, for example, if there is a large number of determination information, if the configuration is such that it is likely to be a high probability state, the game is performed in an attempt to satisfy the acquisition condition as much as possible. However, if the configuration is the opposite, it would be possible to create a special gameplay experience in which, although we would like to have the player make a granting decision that is an opportunity to obtain a benefit, we would like to have the granting decision be made while preventing the acquisition condition from being satisfied as much as possible. It becomes possible. In this way, the ease with which benefits are granted differs depending on the relationship between the fulfillment of the acquisition conditions, and thus it becomes possible for players to be involved in the ease with which benefits are granted, increasing interest through active participation in the game. is planned.

Feature M2. A specific period (a period during which the variable winning device 132 is in an open state) is set in which a specific event (V winning) that triggers the setting of the high probability state by the setting means,
first means for enabling the specific event to occur during the specific period when the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is a first number;
a second means for limiting the occurrence of the specific event in the specific period when the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is a second number different from the first number;
The gaming machine according to feature M1, comprising:

According to the above configuration, a novel gameplay feature in which a high probability state is set according to the number of determination information of the feature M1 can be easily understood and simple for the player, such as whether or not a specific event occurs during a specific period. This can be achieved by changing the configuration. As a result, it is clearly understood that the number of determination information is involved in setting a high probability state, and it becomes possible to fully enjoy the gameplay of feature M1.

Feature M3. The specific event may occur at a specific timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from a predetermined start timing,
The first means is configured to include the specific timing in the specific period,
The second means is configured to set the specific timing so that the specific timing is not included in the specific period or is less likely to be included in the specific timing than when it is set by the first means. The gaming machine described in M2.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature M2 can be achieved by setting the period, such as whether or not the timing at which a specific event can occur is included in the specific period. As a result, it is possible to realize the gameplay of feature M1 with a simple and easy-to-understand configuration such as setting a period, without requiring complicated control or visually difficult-to-understand processing.

Feature M4. The first means sets a waiting period until the start of the specific period as a first period so that the specific timing is included in the specific period,
The second means sets the waiting period as a second period different from the first period, so that the specific timing is not included in the specific period or is set by the first means. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the gaming machine is set so that specific timing is unlikely to be included.

According to the above configuration, the first means and the second means do not make the specific period different, but make the waiting period before the specific period different. Thereby, for example, if the accessory operates during a specific period and the bonus is more likely to be awarded, there is no need to change the operation mode of the accessory. Therefore, it is possible to realize the gameplay of feature M1 while ensuring visual fairness.

Feature M5. The state setting means includes:
The benefit is granted by the benefit granting means based on the result of the granting determination, the number of the determination information being stored in the information storage means in the situation where the granting determination is made by the granting determination means. Depending on the situation, whether or not to set the high probability state can be made different depending on whether the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is the same or different. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4.

According to the above configuration, the number of determination information may be the same or different during the period from when the grant determination is made until the benefit is granted based on the result of the grant determination. , the difference is whether or not a high probability state is also set. In other words, whether or not the high probability state will be reached will differ depending on whether the acquisition condition is satisfied during the period from when the grant determination is made until the benefit is granted. By doing this, you can use the so-called waiting time after the grant judgment is made until the bonus is granted to set the key part of the game, which is a novelty that has not been seen before. It is possible to realize a great gameplay experience.

Feature M6. The gaming states include a first gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined acquisition condition is more likely to be met, and a second gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined acquisition condition is less likely to be met than in the first gaming state. ) is set, The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5.

According to the above configuration, the number of stored determination information that is largely involved in setting a high probability state is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. For example, if the configuration is such that a higher probability state is more likely to be set as more judgment information is stored, a first game state in which a predetermined acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied is set to a higher probability state than a second game state. It becomes easy. If the configuration is reversed, the ease with which the predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied and the ease with which a high probability state is set are contradictory to each other, resulting in a game with a novel feel.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature A groups to feature M groups to each of the configurations of feature A groups to feature M groups detailed above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means (launching handle 54) operated by a player, a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the fired game ball A ball path (rail parts 51, 52) that leads the ball to a predetermined gaming area (gaming area PE), and each gaming component arranged within the gaming area, and a predetermined passing portion (general winning prize) of each gaming component is provided. A gaming machine that provides a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a slot (31, etc.).

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 32... Variable winning device, 33a... Upper operating port, 33b... Lower operating port, 34... Electric accessory, 35... Through gate, 41... Symbol display device, 43... Main display section, 54... Firing handle , 77...operation button, 81...main control device, 82...notification/performance control device, 101...display control device, 133...first operating port, 134...second operating port, 232...held ball storage area, 341...th 1 information area, 342...second information area, 356...V winning area, 357...discharging area.

Claims (1)

a firing means capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
a predetermined ball entrance means into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means;
specific determination means for performing a specific determination based on the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means;
variable ball entry means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
Variable control means for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on the result of the specific determination;
A display means capable of displaying changing patterns;
a control means capable of starting displaying a change in the symbol on the display means based on the specific determination being made by the specific determination means, and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the specific determination;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is
In a situation where the result of the specific determination is a first result corresponding to execution of the variable ball entry control, a display of a stop result corresponding to the first result is emitted in a manner that can reach the variable ball entry means. a first means that allows the game to be played in a second period that is longer than the first period until a predetermined game ball reaches the variable ball entry means;
In a situation where the result of the specific determination is a second result that does not correspond to the execution of the variable ball entry control, a stop result corresponding to the second result is displayed in a third period that is longer than the first period. A second means that makes it possible to
a third means that enables display of a stop result corresponding to the second result to be performed in a fourth period shorter than the third period in a situation where the result of the specific determination is the second result; ,
A specific notification capable of prompting the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means during at least a part of the second period in which the first means displays a stop result corresponding to the first result. means that enable the
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images